TECHNICAL AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING (TVET) · Vocational Education and Training...

Page:i

TECHNICAL AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING

(TVET)

CURRICULUM FRAMEWORK(Classes PP-XII)

Royal Education CouncilParo : Bhutan

TVET Curriculum Framework

Page:ii

Published by:Royal Education Council,Royal Government of BhutanTel: +975-8-271226Fax: +975-8-271991Website: www.rec.gov.bt

Provisional edition 2019

Copyright ©2019 Royal Education Council

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form without the permission from Royal Education Council, Royal Government of Bhutan.

Acknowledgment:

The REC would like to acknowledge the technical assistance provided by Ministry of Labour and Human Resources (MoLHR), Royal Government of Bhutan in the development of Technical and Vocational Education and Training Curriculum Framework for Classes PP - XII. The REC also extends its sincere gratitude to ADB for financial support, all the schools and individuals for their valuable contributions towards the development of this TVET Curriculum Framework.

Advisors:i. Dasho Karma Yeshey, Secretary, Ministry of Education, Thimphuii. Karma Tshering, Director General, DSE, Ministry of Education, Thimphuiii. Kinga Dakpa, Director, Royal Education Council, Paroiv. Kinley Wangdi, Director, DHR, MoLHR, Thimphuv. Norbu Wangchuk, Director, DTE, MoLHR, Thimphuvi. Wangpo Tenzin, Curriculum Specialist, REC, Paro

Language Editor:i. Amber Rai, REC, Paro

Researchers and writers:i. Karma Dorji, Sr. Programme Officer, TPSD, MoLHR, Thimphuii. Wangchuk, Dy. Chief Programme Officer, TPSD, MoLHR, Thimphu

iii. Kinley Namgyal, Curriculum Developer I, REC, Paro.

Layout Designer:

i. Tashi Zangpo, REC, Paro

Page:iii

FOREWORD

Technical and Vocational Education and Training (TVET) aims to equip learners with knowledge, skills and competencies required in particular occupations or more broadly in the labour market of today and tomorrow. High-quality vocational education and training systems that offer a strong work-based learning opportunity facilitate young people’s easy transition to work and also contribute to reducing unemployment and supporting economic development of a nation. TVET is also a powerful means of empowering people to develop their full capabilities that enable them to seize social and employment opportunities, and increasing the productivity of both workers and enterprises.

The role of education in the social and economic progress has long been recognized. Education promotes functional and analytical ability and thereby helps in opening up opportunities for individuals and groups to achieve greater access to labour markets and better livelihoods. An educated labour force is essential if we are to meet the requirements of efficient labour force for a faster economic growth. Education is not only an instrument of enhancing efficiency but is also an effective tool of widening and augmenting participation and improving the overall quality of individual and societal life. Knowledge, skills and competencies are the engines of economic growth and social development of any country. Countries with higher and better levels of knowledge, skills and competencies respond more effectively and promptly to challenges and opportunities of the globalisation.

The outputs of a well-structured TVET system have allowed countries such as Canada, Australia, Germany, Singapore and Japan to become global leaders in every aspect of their enterprises in a short period of time. The key strategy that these countries use is the promotion and marketing of TVET as an alternative to the more traditional mode of advancement and education. This is done by integrating competency-based training with academia both at the secondary and tertiary level.

Given the importance, the Royal Government of Bhutan has initiated to impart TVET in some vocational training institutes. The private agencies are also encouraged to offer the courses. Although, some vocational courses are offered in secondary schools as optional subjects, the impact is not as desired. This has led to the need to revamp the TVET programme as an alternative pathway to education. The new approach includes sensitization programmes in the form of vocational clubs, pre-vocational orientation programmes and career guidance which are initiated right from primary level to higher secondary with proper guidelines, so as to create better awareness on TVET.

This would provide better sensitization and exposure to students and enable them to make informed decision in choosing the right vocations/trades as optional subjects in their classes IX-XII levels of education. These courses are to be offered on modular basis with the opportunity of credit transfer when they continue higher studies in vocational training institutes later. This opens up an alternative pathway to education which would provide opportunity for the students to undergo certain modules of vocational subjects in the schools and at the same time avail the opportunity to continue academic studies in the tertiary institutes. This option would produce graduates who will be more flexible, analytical, adaptable and multi skilled in terms of responding to the changing needs in the job market. This is also intended to provide sound foundation for learning TVET at primary, secondary and tertiary level and to develop required competencies as means of achieving lifelong learning.

Kinga Dakpa

Director


Page:iv

Acronyms:

ATP: Apprenticeship Training Programme

BCSEA: Bhutan Council for School Examinations and Assessment

CA: Continuous Assessment

CFA: Continuous Formative Assessment

CBC: Competency Based Curriculum

CBLM: Competency Based Learning Materials

CSA: Continuous Summative Assessment

DCRD: Department of Curriculum Research and Development

GNH: Gross National Happiness

ICT: Information and Communication Technology

IZC/CZC: Institute of Zorig Chusum/College of Zorig Chusum

MoE: Ministry of Education

MoLHR: Ministry of Labour and Human Resources

MoU: Memorandum of Understanding

NC: National Certificate (Level II and III)

NCS: National Competency Standard

PP: Pre Primary

PVOP: Pre-Vocational Orientation Programme

REC: Royal Education Council

RPL: Recognition of Prior Learning

SA: Summative Assessment

TTI: Technical Training Institute

TVE: Technical and Vocational Education

TVET: Technical and Vocational Education and Training

Page:v

Table of Contents

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION AND RATIONALE ............................................................................................ 11.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................11.2 Rationale .....................................................................................................................................................1

CHAPTER 2

GUIDING PRINCIPLES ................................................................................................................... 32.1 Developmental Appropriateness .............................................................................................................32.2 Practical Oriented Pedagogy ...................................................................................................................42.3 Knowledge, Understanding and Entrepreneurship ..............................................................................42.4 Learners and Learning ..............................................................................................................................42.5 Technical Language Learning ...................................................................................................................52.6 TVET Curriculum and GNH ...................................................................................................................52.7 Community Engagement and Local Knowledge ....................................................................................62.8 Livelihood and Employment .....................................................................................................................6

CHAPTER 3

GOALS ............................................................................................................................................... 7

CHAPTER 4

STRANDS .......................................................................................................................................... 94.1. Technical/Vocational Fundamentals (Cognitive) ..................................................................................94.2. Technical/Vocational Skills (Psychomotor) ............................................................................................94.3. Professional Practices (Affective) .............................................................................................................94.4. Entrepreneurial Competencies .................................................................................................................9

CHAPTER 5

ORGANISATION OF LEARNING STANDARDS ......................................................................... 11Key Stage 1 (Classes PP-III): Introduction...................................................................................................11Key Stage 2 (Classes IV-VI): Sampling .........................................................................................................11Key Stage 3 (Classes VII and VIII): Exploration .........................................................................................11Key Stage 4 (Classes IX to X): Specialization ...............................................................................................12Key Stage 5 (Classes XI and XII): Transition ...............................................................................................12

CHAPTER 6

LEARNING STANDARDS .............................................................................................................. 13Strand 1: Technical/Vocational Fundamentals (Cognitive) .......................................................................13Strand 2: Technical/Vocational Skills (Psychomotor) ................................................................................14Strand 3: Professional Practices (Affective) .................................................................................................15

Strand 4: Entrepreneurial Competencies .....................................................................................................16


Page:vi

CHAPTER 7

LEARNING OBJECTIVES .............................................................................................................. 19

CHAPTER 8

ASSESSMENT ................................................................................................................................. 218.1 Continuous Formative Assessment (CFA) ..........................................................................................218.2 Continuous Summative Assessment (CSA) ........................................................................................22

CHAPTER 9

ENABLING CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................ 25

ANNEXES ........................................................................................................................................ 27ANNEX I: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR FURNITURE MAKING .....................27A. FURNITURE MAKING LESSONS .........................................................................................................27B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR FURNITURE MAKING ..............................30B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX .........................................................................................30B.2. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ..........................................................................................36B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI .........................................................................................39B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII .......................................................................................42DRAWING LESSONS ...................................................................................................................................45LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX ................................................................................................46LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ..................................................................................................47LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI ................................................................................................48ANNEX II: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR PLUMBING .........................................49A. PLUMBING LESSONS ..............................................................................................................................49B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX .........................................................................................51B.2. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ..........................................................................................54B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI .........................................................................................57B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII .......................................................................................61DRAWING LESSONS ....................................................................................................................................65LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX ................................................................................................66LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ..................................................................................................67LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI ................................................................................................68ANNEX III: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR MASONRY .........................................69A. MASONRY LESSONS ...............................................................................................................................69B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR MASONRY .......................................................71B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX .........................................................................................71B.2. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ..........................................................................................76B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI .........................................................................................77B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII .......................................................................................79DRAWING LESSONS ...................................................................................................................................81CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX ...............................................................81

Page:vii

ANNEX IV: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR ELECTRICAL ....................................85A. ELECTRICAL LESSONS ..........................................................................................................................85B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR ELECTRICAL ..................................................89B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX .........................................................................................89B.2. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ..........................................................................................93B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI .........................................................................................99B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII .....................................................................................107DRAWING LESSONS ................................................................................................................................111LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII .............................................................................................111ANNEX V: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR WELDING ........................................115A. WELDING LESSONS ..............................................................................................................................115B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR WELDING ......................................................117B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX .......................................................................................117B.2. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ........................................................................................121B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI .......................................................................................122B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII .....................................................................................124DRAWING LESSONS .................................................................................................................................127LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX ..............................................................................................127LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ................................................................................................129LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI ..............................................................................................129ANNEX VI: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR AUTOMOBILE ................................131A. AUTOMOBILE LESSONS ......................................................................................................................131B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR AUTOMOBILE ..............................................136B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX .......................................................................................136B.2. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ........................................................................................143B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI .......................................................................................148B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII .....................................................................................157DRAWING LESSONS .................................................................................................................................165LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX ..............................................................................................166LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ................................................................................................167LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI ..............................................................................................168

ANNEX VII: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING ...........................................................................................................................................169A. COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING LESSONS ........................................................169

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING ............................................................................................................................................172B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX .......................................................................................172B.2. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X ........................................................................................178B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI .......................................................................................181B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII .....................................................................................186


Page:viii

ANNEX VIII: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR TSEMZO (TAILORING) .................... 193ཚམ་བཟའ་ཆས་ཚན་ར་གཞང་ག་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས།A. TSEMZO LESSONS .................................................................................................................................193B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR TSEMZO .........................................................195B.1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX ........................................................................................195B.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X .........................................................................................199B.3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI ........................................................................................202B.4 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII ......................................................................................204

ANNEX IX: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR PAINTING (SHING TSHOEN) ཤང་ཚན་ ཆས་ཚན་ར་གཞང་ག་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས། ........................................................................................................................205

A. SHING TSHOEN LESSONS ཤང་ཚན་ག་ ཆས་ཚན་ར་གཞང་ .................................................................................205B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR SHING TSHOEN(སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།) ................209B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX .......................................................................................209B.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X .........................................................................................215B.3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI ........................................................................................218B.4 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII ......................................................................................221

ANNEXES:x-xviii .......................................................................................................................... 225

Annex X: Costing for Furniture Making ...................................................................................................225Annex XI: Costing for Plumbing ...............................................................................................................230Annex XII: Costing for Masonry ...............................................................................................................235Annex XIII: Costing for Electrical ..............................................................................................................238Annex XIV: Costing for Welding ...............................................................................................................241Annex XV : Costing for Automobile .........................................................................................................245Annex XVI : Costing for Computer Hardware and Networking ...........................................................250Annex XVII: Costing for Tailoring ............................................................................................................254Annex XVIII: Costing for Painting .............................................................................................................256ASSESSMENT GUIDELINE ......................................................................................................... 2591. INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................2592. RATIONALE ..............................................................................................................................................2593. MODE OF ASSESSMENT .......................................................................................................................2594. BLUE PRINT .............................................................................................................................................2625. WEIGHTING FOR STRANDS (THEORY) .........................................................................................2656. WEIGHTING FOR STRANDS (PRACTICAL) ...................................................................................2707. RUBRICS FOR CLASS WORK (CW) AND HOME WORK (HW) ASSESSMENT .......................2728. WEIGHTING FOR CONTINUOUS ASSESSMENT (CA) ................................................................2739. RUBRICS FOR PROJECT WORK (PW) ASSESSMENT ....................................................................27310. LESSON PLAN FORMAT .....................................................................................................................27411. FORMAT FOR MARKS COMPILATION ..........................................................................................277References .......................................................................................................................................................279

Page:1

Introduction And Rationale

CHAPTER 1INTRODUCTION AND RATIONALE

This chapter provides the introduction and rationale of TVET. It highlights the importance of the subject accorded by the Ministry of Education and Royal Education Council and the support garnered from Ministry of Labour and Human Resources in introducing the subject in the schools. It also elucidates the needs of the subject and the impact it can bring about to the individuals and the nation.

1.1 Introduction

The Ministry of Education envisages an important place for the TVET curriculum in the mainstream education system as in most of the education systems of the developed world. The formal Technical and Vocational Education and Training (TVET) actually was in place in the country since 1965 at the then Don Bosco Technical School (DBTS), in Kharbandi (present Rinchending) in Phuntsholing. During the 7th Five Year Plan the Ministry of Education undertook a major school curriculum reform to enhance the relevancy of education to the Bhutanese society through diversification of Secondary Education Curriculum in the schools. This included the introduction of TVET.

The National Education Framework, developed collaboratively by the Royal Education Council (REC) and the Ministry of Education (MoE), provides a pathway on integrating technical/vocational education in the mainstream school education curriculum and as elective subjects in higher classes (NEF, 2009; page 64).

With the collaborative efforts of Ministry of Labour and Human Resources and the erstwhile Department of Curriculum Research and Development under Ministry of Education, Vocational Curriculum has been introduced in the schools with the assistance from the Technical Training Institutes (TTIs) since 2011 academic session. After the first MoU that was signed between MoE and MoLHR in 2011, second MoU was signed again in 2014, to expand technical/vocational courses in classes XI and XII. With the experiences of implementing technical/vocational courses in IX and X, the technical/vocational courses offered by the TTIs are to be adapted and redesigned for the students and the courses are to be offered in schools aligned to the ‘Bhutan Education Blue Print’ 2014-2024. The Blueprint recommends up-scaling and diversification of TVET in schools through the provision of alternative pathways in schools and in the tertiary education systems, owing to the limited access to such courses, despite the growing demand for technical skills in the country.

The resolutions of the National School Curriculum Conference 2016, also strongly emphasised the need to upscale and deepen the TVET. The TVET framework is to be developed for PP to class XII, equip schools with necessary resources, train skilled instructors and offer additional trades that are relevant as per emerging needs. It was also recommended to strengthen TVET further by developing standard guidelines for technical/vocational clubs and instituting pre-vocational orientation programmes in classes VII and VIII throughout the country.

1.2 Rationale

As the world gets more competitive, knowledge-based and technology driven,the search for sustainability and skilled human resource will only increase. For the Bhutanese youth to function, compete, and excel in this 21stcentury they require education and training opportunities that are current, engaging, and responsive to labour market needs. The TVET programme will provide students with the basic skills and competencies that will allow them to transition successfully into the workplace, apprenticeship opportunities, post-secondary education, and their daily lives.


Page:2

Our country continues to face labour shortages in the skilled trades because only a handful young people opt to take technical/vocational related careers. Therefore, TVET has the potential to address those deficiencies in the skilled trades and make our youth globally competent and encourage them to explore career options in technical/vocational fields both within and outside the country. It can also provide the students with opportunities to apply their learning using an interdisciplinary and cross-curricular approach while at the same time integrating learning from their own personal experiences.

In a nutshell, the introduction of TVET programme with proper strategy and planning will allow students to either enter the job market or pursue higher studies through certification and recognition of their prior learning through credit transfer system, thereby enhancing their employment opportunities and addressing the national demand for skilled manpower. It can also help the children to generate interests and imbibe values related to technical/vocational subjects, and thereby inculcate positive attitude.

Page:3

Guiding Principles

CHAPTER 2GUIDING PRINCIPLES

The development of the TVET curriculum framework is informed and guided by the following eight principles that transpired from a series of consultations with technical/vocational educators, professionals and other stakeholders, and also through an evaluation and analysis of global trends.

Developmental

appropriateness Practical oriented

pedagogy

Livelih

ood an

d em

ploymen

t

Com

munity

engagement and

local knowledge

TVET and GNHTechnical Language Learning

Lear

ners

and

Lear

ning

Know

ledge

Understanding &

entrepreneurship

This section takes each principle in turn and shows how the TVET Curriculum Framework is linked and guided by the following principles:

2.1 Developmental Appropriateness

The TVET Curriculum Framework emphasizes on the development of an appropriate curriculum based on the knowledge and skills about how children develop and learn. It is developed on the following theories:

i) Stage theory of development proposed by Jean Piaget

During Key Stages 1, the TVET curriculum focuses on concrete everyday experiences for younger learners through games, arts and crafts, drawing and model making. At Key Stage 2, higher technical/vocational related contents widen in terms of geometry, measurement, shapes, scientific concepts and safety practices. Similarly, the level progresses in a deeper manner, enabling the children to translate their learning to their daily living, gaining knowledge and skills required for semi-skilled and skilled manpower.


Page:4

ii) Bloom’s taxonomy of cognitive domain to inform the writing of the key learning outcomes

For example, in the lower key stages, there is more focus on learning outcomes, which require learners to be able to name, identify, recall, and describe. At higher key stages the focus changes to learning outcomes where learners are required to explain, apply, synthesize, evaluate, and create.

iii) The outcomes of the consultation meetings

At all the stages of development, key stakeholders’ views were sought to ensure that the TVET curriculum is developmentally appropriate and progressive for learners, and that it fulfills the needs of the Bhutanese society.

2.2 Practical Oriented Pedagogy

The approach to implementing the TVET curriculum is based on the theories of learning by doing, experiential learning and psychomotor focused approaches. Unlike other subjects, TVET must focus on providing learning experiences that will not only enhance knowledge but will also focus on psychomotor skills development and the right attitude to a trade. The curriculum must clearly specify the amount of time and engagement allotted to practical field works in labs and workshops in a progressive manner as students advance to the higher levels. Emphasis must be to enhance skills of creativity, innovation and problem solving through the curriculum.

Pedagogy approaches must be supported through well-facilitated classrooms, workshops with required standard tools, models, equipment and training materials. ICT must be integrated as an integral part of technical/vocational subjects as and when feasible to enhance the effectiveness of teaching and learning.

The pedagogical approaches should be inclusive and be able to cater to the needs of the differently abled students, irrespective of gender.

2.3 Knowledge, Understanding and Entrepreneurship

Every subject area of the school curriculum must contribute to the general education of the learners so that they are:

• factually well informed;

• capable of innovating and appreciating technical/vocational objects of aesthetic significance;

• endowed with rich social and cultural values;

• able to make informed decisions in choosing a career;

• motivated to learn, be innovative, creative and enterprising;

• aware of the importance of dignity of labour;

• aware of occupational health and safety.The aspiration of the TVET is to inculcate in the learners the notion of the dignity of labour, imbibe entrepreneurial skills, observe occupational health and safety, be divergent in thinking guided by the technical/vocational knowledge and skills in addressing the national challenges of the skilled manpower and developing professionalism in the technical/vocational field.

Therefore, the TVET has been developed not only to give the learners a strong foundation in different technical/vocational trades, but also to develop a love for technical/vocational trades by inculcating a sense of professionalism and embrace job opportunities available in technical/vocational fields

Page:5

Guiding Principles

2.4 Learners and Learning

Children learn from birth, and learning continues throughout their lives. They already bring an understanding of the natural world to the technical/vocational classroom. As soon as learners start to interact with the environment, they start developing personal beliefs, concepts, and skills about the world around them. Using their innate quality, past experiences and interests, children begin to unfold their potential in different areas of work. The differently abled children also display their hidden talents, if provided opportunity. Thus, every opportunity must be created to cater to their varied capabilities as per Howard Garner’s multiple intelligence, and provide avenues for them to exhibit their caliber and accordingly groom them to pursue career of their choice.

Therefore, appropriate and relevant learning environment and avenues should be provided by offering various technical/vocational trades, clubs and pre-vocational orientation programmes to the children of diverse abilities to tap their interest and potential..

2.5 Technical Language Learning

Knowledge and understanding ofscientific terminology and technical terms are vital for learners to effectively comprehend and communicate their ideas and study findings. Children should learn the technical terms focused on day-to-day technical/vocational practices through defining, describing, and explaining them and be able to interpret the drawing and design in practice.

The technical language must be considered as per developmental stages, direct use of commonly understood terms with reasoning, note taking, listening, summarizing and report writing along with the elements of grammar and vocabulary as per the key learning stages.

2.6 TVET Curriculum and GNH

TVET curriculum has been designed to seamlessly incorporatethe principles of GNH. It advocates holistic teaching and learning to address socio-economic challenges and encourage learners to acquire necessary life skills..

The curriculum, infused with GNH, enables as more meaningful education and directly addresses the four pillars of GNH in the following ways.

i. Sustainable and equitable socio-economic development

» acquire skills for employment. » use resources in a sustainable approach. » Innovate and create.

ii. Conservation of environment

» Environmental friendly practices » Green technical/vocational education and skills » Proper waste management » Use of renewable resources.

iii. Good Governance

» ethics such as integrity, commitment, dedication etc. » professionalism in delivering one’s duty prescribed to occupational standard.

» technical/vocational leadership such as leading, mentoring, coaching, supervising, managing etc.


Page:6

» participation in decision-making, consultation, teamwork, collaboration etc.

iv. Preservation and promotion of culture

» Unique traditional arts and crafts

» indigenous know-how

» community support and participation.

2.7 Community Engagement and Local Knowledge

Community engagement and local knowledge are about bringing the real life component to the teaching of TVETand leveraging on it to further motivate and encourage students to see the possibilities of livelihood and income generation.

TVET recognizes the importance of and optimizes on the local human resources. It has rooms and opportunities to incorporate local knowledge in various trades of Technical/Vocational Education and Training (TVET). The curriculum encourages collaborations witht trade-specific local experts on carpentry, electrical, tailoring, masonry and other areas to provide additional information on know-how and hands-on experience to the students.

Projects and field trips aimed at the aforementioned end goals should become integral parts of TVETteaching in schools. It must also serve to preserve and promote traditional and local cultures.

The TVETcurriculum is designed to be implemented through a networked approach based on collaboration with relevant stakeholders and sharing resources, both material and human, including industry participation.

2.8 Livelihood and Employment

Technical/vocational Education is guided by the current ground reality of mismatch between skills and demand. Therefore, priority is accorded to skilling through the TVET to address the mismatch, and enable students to be gainfully employed.TVET also has pathways for students to pursue post-secondary technical/vocational education for national certification .

The subject also incorporates entrepreneurial competencies to enable students to plan, start, and run a business. This provision can turn an employee to an employer. Provisions are also be created to those who have a passion to be technocrats, craftsman and artisans through programmes such as Apprentiship Training Programme (ATP), industrial attachment and Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL) in collaboration with relevant stakeholders. Theseplatforms are created to enable learners to climb up the career ladder and encourage lifelong learning.

Page:7

Goals

CHAPTER 3GOALS

The introduction of TVET in the school education system will:

• Provide an alternative pathway of TVET to children through diversification of subjects that facilitate students to study the subjects of their interest and aptitude and build a foundation for higher technical/vocational training courses.

• Contribute to building skilled human resources to meet the national demand.

• Empower students to recognise their potential and pursue technical/vocational courses for gainful and self-employment, acquiring employability skills for an effective transition from school to work.

• Foster innovation, entrepreneurship and nurture creativity in children to generate diverse opportunities for socio-economic development.

• Make the students understand the importance of becoming self-reliant and lifelong learner by acquiring the skills and knowledge needed in the future.

• Provide opportunities for students in understanding Bhutanese culture better through learning traditional arts and crafts through interdisciplinary approaches.

• Promote dignity of labour, work ethic and change the attitude towards technical/vocational professions, for nation’s self-reliance.

• Inculcate a sense of professionalism at work guided by the occupational health and safety standards and practices.


Page:8

Page:9

Strands

CHAPTER 4STRANDS

Four strands have been identified as the main components of study right from pre-primary to class XII. Everyday teaching and learning will contribute towards the enhancement of the strands, and as students progress to higher classes their understanding and competencies in each strand will accordingly be broadened.

4.1. Technical/Vocational Fundamentals (Cognitive)

Technical/Vocational Fundamentals are basic concepts and knowledge in both numeracy and literacy that are essential for students to learn to become an informed individual in the area of study. Students should be able to make relevant connections to cross-curricular areas, including but not limited to, sustainable development, entrepreneurship, innovation, and scientific literacy related to the subject matter.

4.2. Technical/Vocational Skills (Psychomotor)

Technical/Vocational Skills include the basic technological know-how in the field of study that will assist students to pursue post-secondary education in the subject and enhance their scope of employment in the related industries. This strand focuses on providing practical experiences that will help children to develop and hone their required skill sets necessary to pursue higher studies or to join the job market.

4.3. Professional Practices (Affective)

Professional practices include values such as occupational health and safety, the dignity of labour, respect for work etc. that are expected to be taught and inculcated in the due course of studying the subject. This strand is expected to inculcate positive attitude and appreciation towards technical/vocational professions.

4.4. Entrepreneurial Competencies

Students enhance their understanding of the professional practices related to the subject matter such as issues, the scope of employment and career possibilities through attachment, career counselling, projects and field visits so that school to workplace transition is smoothened. This will also help students make informed decisions on the career prospects and develop entrepreneurial competencies such as innovation, creativity, problem solving and planning.

Note: (Since 4.3 and 4.4 are process strands which are not vividly captured in the content, some programmes need to be carried out at different levels of classes. The entrepreneurship modules that are offered in TTI/IZC will be taught from classes IX to XII exploring various strategies)


Page:10

Page:11

Organisation Of Learning Standards

CHAPTER 5ORGANISATION OF LEARNING

STANDARDSThis chapter describes the broad learning areas and outcomes at each of the key stages and outlines the how the outcomes may be achieved. The descriptions should explain how the progression and the rigour of the curriculum have been maintained.

Key Stage 1 (Classes PP-III): Introduction

This period is best described as the “symbolic mastery.” What is important at this key stage is the opportunity to explore and to work intensively with materials that nourish the human intelligence.

Through the study of subjects like English, Dzongkha and Mathematics, the students are introduced to basic terminologies, pictures, shapes and objects, patterns, measurements, names, sketching, colouring and safety practices related to TVET. They will also explore their immediate surroundings and experience technical/vocational related activities through games, arts and crafts, drawing and model making.

Key Stage 2 (Classes IV-VI): Sampling

The children in this key stage develop a new quality of mind. They start to understand and get better perspectives on activities related to various trades. Therefore, the children are capable of thinking logically and are ready for a deeper understanding of different subject areas.

Through the study of subjects, students will learn higher technical/vocational related contents in geometry, measurement, shapes, scientific concepts, safety practices and values that are applicable to everyday occurrences and be introduced to concepts of jobs and job markets in social studies. Moreover, they will also be introduced to farming, industry and other technical/vocational opportunities.

In addition, the Technical/Vocational sampling programme can be conducted by making the students visit other clubs besides choosing one club. It will provide them with the opportunity to support sampling and improve their awareness and understanding of the scope of technical/vocational education. Through the implementation of guidelines for the technical/vocational clubs (at least one club), students will get a basic hands-on experience about few trades.

Key Stage 3 (Classes VII and VIII): Exploration

In the adolescent years, there are significant developments, mainly the movement towards abstract thinking, dealing logically with multifaceted situations and the development of meta cognitive abilities.

Through the study of various subjects, understanding of technical/vocational concepts will widen and relations can be drawn across different fields. Students will continue to associate their learning to the various concepts pertaining to technical/vocational education in a deeper manner and be able to translate their learning to their daily living.

The Pre-Vocational Orientation Programme (PVOP) will be organized (at least twice a year) in the form of talks by guest speakers, presentations, exhibitions, field visits etc. It is aimed at enhancing students understanding on technical/vocational education with focus on various trades like plumbing, masonry, carpentry, electrical, arts and crafts etc. The institution of pre-vocational orientation


Page:12

program at this stage is aimed at allowing them to further explore their interests in various technical/vocational areas and make informed decisions that may lead to pursuing higher education in certain technical/vocational trades. It will be followed by technical/vocational club formation in the areas of their interest. The students after joining technical/vocational clubs will be taught basic concepts with a marked difference of practical learning/hands-on learning experiences. In addition, the students can be equipped better to choose the technical/vocational subjects through career counselling.

Key Stage 4 (Classes IX to X): Specialization

At this key stage, learners demonstrate significant developments in terms of logical and abstract thinking and are able to comprehend complex situations. For older children, education is for understanding, for mastering disciplines and for apprenticeship.

At this stage, students will be allowed to opt for a technical/vocational trade of their choice and interest as an elective subject for specialization, through proper career guidance and counselling. These students will start to study the subject in a deeper manner, utilizing the allotted time round the year for two years to enhance knowledge, skills and professional competencies, which are expected to make them semi-skilled and job ready, if they choose to join the job market. The curriculum will be offered on a modular basis with the provision for credit transfer, should the students choose to continue their education in technical/vocational institutes and others.

The focus will be more on skilling through more of practical classes. When they complete the course, students are expected to be competent to carry out basic skill work in their field of study. The common competencies can be further enhanced through career counselling, professional practices, occupational health and safety, innovation, creativity, entrepreneurial skills and related values which will be covered in the modules.

Key Stage 5 (Classes XI and XII): Transition

At this key stage, the learners have well developed meta cognitive abilities and an understanding of the natural world around them. Children with young and maturing minds are moving towards making critical and informed decisions about career and becoming a productive member of the society.

At this stage, students will continue to study additional modules on the trade they chose in stage 4 to specialize and develop skills to facilitate transition to the workplace or tertiary education programme. Similar to stage 4, students can transfer their modular credits for lateral entry to technical/vocational institutes and others, which would facilitate them to become skilled. This is allowed with the aim to reduce waste of time and resources for both the individual and the government, besides recognising their prior learning.

In addition, career counselling, professional practices, occupational health and safety, innovation, creativity, entrepreneurial skills and related values incorporated in the modules can enable the graduates to further enhance their skills needed for the higher level of proficiency.

Page:13

Learning Standards

CHAPTER 6LEARNING STANDARDS

The expected key learning standards of each strand for different key stages are mentioned below:

Strand 1: Technical/Vocational Fundamentals (Cognitive)

By the end of Key Stage 2 (Classes IV-VI) students should be able to:

• understand what technical/vocational education is.

• identify different types of technical/vocational trades.

• identify basic tools and equipment

• understand the uses/functions of different types of tools and equipment.

• understand the fundamental terminologies, pictures, shapes and objects, patterns, measurements, names and sketching related to trades.

By the end of Key Stage 3 (Classes VII-VIII) students should be able to:

• understand the nature of the work of different technical/vocational occupations.

• understand the fundamental technical concepts involved in the particular trades.

• discover one’s potential required in different trades.

By the end of Key Stage 4 (Classes IX-X) students should be able to:

• know the fundamentals of particular trades that they have opted to study.

• identify different types of tools, equipment and materials required for specific trades.

• state the functions and working principles of tools, equipment and other trade related resources.

• understand basic occupational health and safety rules.

• learn about Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).

• know the computation and conversion of measurement scales.

• interpret engineering drawings and symbols.

• know basic calculations and estimations for particular task.

By the end of Key Stage 5(Classes XI-XII) students should be able to:

• know in depth theories of particular trade that they have opted to study.

• identify additional tools, equipment and materials required for specific trades.

• explain the functions and working principles of additional tools, equipment and other trade related resources.

• understand occupational health and safety rules.


Page:14

• explain computation and conversion of measurement scales.

• know calculations and estimations for any given job.

• interpret basic engineering drawings and symbols.

Strand 2: Technical/Vocational Skills (Psychomotor)

By the end of Key Stage 2 (Classes IV-VI) students should be able to:

• experience different technical/vocational trades through clubs.

• get hands on experience of basic tools related to different trades.

• develop basic models/products.

• follow safety rules to carry out activities.

• carry out measurement.

• draw sketches.

• explore their immediate surroundings and experience skill-based activities through games, arts and crafts, drawing and model making, colouring, etc.

By the end of Key Stage 3(Classes VII-VIII) students should be able to:

• get hands- on experience of different technical/vocational trades through PVOP and club activities.

• get hands- on experience of additional tools used for different trades.

• use safety rules to carry out activities.

• carry out measurement and conversion.

• draw basic technical symbols and drawings.

• demonstrate and produce additional products


• translate theoretical or scientific concept to real world applications.

• perform semi-skilled work in opted trades as per the national competency standard (NCS).

• make proper use of tools and equipment and carry out their maintenance.

• observe occupational health and safety and use PPE.

• carry out drawing and estimation of a particular task.

• draw basic engineering drawing.

• acquire competencies as per prescribed modules to fulfill all specified element of competencies as per NCS.

Page:15

Learning Standards

By the end of Key Stage 5 (Classes XI-XII) students should be able to:

• translate theoretical or scientific concept to real world applications for additional modules.

• perform semiskilled work in opted trades as per the national competency standard (NCS) for additional modules.

• make use of the tools and equipment professionally and carry out their maintenance.

• apply occupational health and safety and use PPE.

• carry out drawing and estimation of a particular job.

• draw engineering drawing.

• acquire competencies in additional prescribed modules to fulfill all specified element of competencies as per NCS.

Strand 3: Professional Practices (Affective)

By the end of Key Stage 2(Classes IV-VI) students should be able to:

• realize that there are different kinds of technical/vocational occupations.

• appreciate the importance/aesthetic values of different technical/vocational occupations.

• generate interest and enthusiasm in vocational trades.

• respect technical/vocational professions.

• enjoy learning by doing.

By the end of Key Stage 3 (Classes VII-VIII) students should be able to:

• realize that there are more employment opportunities in technical/vocational fields.

• appreciate the importance and aesthetic value of different technical/vocational occupations.

• respect, love and develop a positive attitude towards technical/vocational professions.

• develop interest for technical/vocational knowledge and skills.

• abide by safety rules.

• create and innovate designs and products.

• understand and explain the values and importance of technical and vocational education.


• realize that technical/vocational education could open up employment and livelihood opportunities.

• appreciate the values of technical/vocational skills and traditional arts and crafts.

• value technical/vocational education as an alternative pathway for self-employment and meaningful economic activity.


Page:16

• appreciate the roles of technical/vocational professions for the community and nation as a whole.

• develop a commitment to quality, integrity, enterprise and dignity of labour.

• comply strictly to occupational health and safety.


• realize that technical/vocational education could open up employment and livelihood opportunities and prepare mentally to transit to technical/vocational training institutes or workplace through lateral entry.

• appreciate the values of technical/vocational skills and traditional arts and crafts in preserving and promoting GNH and national goals.

• aspire to be become self-reliant and contribute towards fulfilling the national goal of self-reliance in a skilled workforce.

• value technical/vocational education as an alternative pathway for self-employment and meaningful economic activity for national prosperity.

• appreciate the contributions of the technical/vocational profession for the community and nation as a whole.

• develop a greater commitment to quality, integrity, enterprise and dignity of labour.

• comply strictly with occupational health and safety and be aware of the labour act.

Strand 4: Entrepreneurial CompetenciesBy the end of Key Stage 2 (Classes IV-VI) students should be able to:

• become aware of opportunities in different technical/vocational trades and work environment.

• nurture innovation and creativity through learning by doing.

By the end of Key Stage 3(Classes VII-VIII) students should be able to:

• be acquainted with opportunities in different technical/vocational trades.

• understand the requirements to become technical/vocational professionals.

• understand the work environment.

• demonstrate innovation and creativity through learning by doing.


• make an informed choice of the technical/vocational subject through career guidance and counselling.

• apply innovation and creativity in the technical/vocational field to carry out project work.

• gain experience of working in real time environment for the particular trade.

• experiment problem solving through innovation and creativity in fixing minor issues related to their trade.

Page:17

Learning Standards

• explore work opportunities available in the locality for short term or long term engagement.

• understand the importance of teamwork and collaboration.

• realize that through innovation and creativity, technical/vocational education can lead to individual and collective economic success.

• Develop entrepreneurial competencies and generate business idea


• prepare themselves for national certifications and lifelong learning for career progression.

• make an informed choice of the technical/vocational subject through internship and work experience.

• apply problem solving through innovation and creativity in a real work situation.

• work in real time environment for the particular trade.

• collaborate with others and work in a team.

• explain that through innovation and creativity, technical/vocational education can lead to greater individual and collective economic success.

• Generate business idea and formulate business plan.

• capitalize on entrepreneurial knowledge and skills to start a business.


Page:18

Page:19

Learning Objectives

CHAPTER 7LEARNING OBJECTIVES

The learning objectives for each class are specified for different chapters as per the trades that are offered. Since the objectives differ from trade to trade, they are mentioned differently as annexure. Based on the set standards, the learning objectives can be accordingly developed for new trades as per need.

Annex 1: Furniture Making

Annex 2: Plumbing

Annex 3: Masonry

Annex 4: Electrical (House Wiring)

Annex 5: Weldering

Annex 6: Automobile

Annex 7: Computer Hardware and Networking

Annex 8: Tailoring (Tsemzo)

Annex 9: Painting (Shing Tshoen)


Page:20

Page:21

Assessment

CHAPTER 8ASSESSMENT

Educational assessment is the process of documenting, usually in measurable terms, outcomes of knowledge, skills, attitudes and beliefs of the learners. This includes the processes of gathering and interpreting information about the progress of learning. In order for the assessment to be valuable to individuals and organizations, the assessment must be accurate and objective. The learners should be well informed about what will be assessed and how it will be assessed. This makes the teacher’s expectations clear to the learners to set appropriate learning outcomes. The teachers play an important role in the learners’ achievement by effectively monitoring their learning and giving them constructive feedback on how they can improve, and providing the necessary scaffolding for the needy learners as identified through the reliable and valid assessment techniques and tools. Evidence based online assessment system can be initiated wherever possible for transparency and proper record.

Assessment is an integral part of the teaching and learning process because it:

• helps improve the learners’ learning through the provision of constructive feedback and comments by teachers.

• enables the teachers to incorporate varied teaching and learning strategies and resources to ensure quality learning in the learners.

• empowers the learners to be self-reflective who monitors and evaluates their own progress.

• assesses the strengths and weaknesses of the learners.

• helps to diagnose the special needs of the learners.

• provides evidence to grade and promote the learners to a higher level.

• helps to inform parents and other stakeholders about the achievements of the learners.

The achievements and performances of the learners in TVET are assessed on the following three domains:

Technical/vocational knowledge

Technical/vocational skills

Technical/vocational values, attitude, and entrepreneurial competencies

These are assessed through the following schemes of assessment:

8.1 Continuous Formative Assessment (CFA)

Formative assessment is used to provide feedback to teachers and learners, so that teaching and learning can be improved through the provision of regular feedback and remedial learning opportunities for the learners when needed. It also enables the teachers to understand what teaching methods and materials work best.

CFA facilitates the teachers to diagnose the learning needs of the learners and recognize the individual differences in learning. Through the constructive feedback, the learners are able to understand their strengths and weaknesses. It also empowers them to be self-reflective to monitor and evaluate their own progress.


Page:22

CFA should happen daily throughout the teaching-learning processes of the academic year. It is NOT graded.

The suggested techniques for CFA for the three domains are:

• Technical/vocational knowledge: Class work, home work, written tests without grades, observations, face-to-face interactions with the students, etc.

• Technical/vocational skills: Demonstrations, model making, practical observation, Question and answer, homework, class work, etc.

• Technical/vocational values, attitude, and entrepreneurial competencies: Viva, Observations of students’ behaviour and work, conduct, sense of responsibility and ownership.

The tools identified for CFA are checklists and anecdotal records.

8.2 Continuous Summative Assessment (CSA)

Continuous Summative Assessment is another form of assessment. It helps in determining the learner’s performance and the effectiveness of instructions. This assessment helps to improve the learners learning and mandates the teachers to incorporate varied teaching strategies and resources to ensure quality teaching and learning. It empowers learners to be self-reflective learners to monitor and evaluate their own progress.

In CSA, the learner’s performances and achievement are graded. This ensures active participation of learners in the teaching and learning processes.

The suggested techniques for CSA for the three domains are:

• Technical/vocational knowledge: Project work, homework, case study, viva and written tests.

• Technical/vocational skills: Project work, homework, skill test, observation, modular assessment.

• Technical/vocational values, attitudes and entrepreneurial competencies: Observation of the learners’ conduct, performance in the viva, assessment of students’ behaviour, work and conduct, assessment of sense of responsibility and ownership.

The main tools for CSA are rubrics and paper pencil tests.

8.3 Summative AssessmentSummative assessment consists of written exams, practical exams and CSA all of which are carried out during both the terms.

Summative assessment (SA) marks are summed up atat the end of the year to determine the level of learning outcomes achieved by individual learners. The teachers use information gathered to grade the learners for promotion, to report to parents and other stakeholders.

The questions for the writtenexaminations should cover all three domains of the curriculum, keeping in mind the learning objectives. Bloom’s taxonomy should be referred when designing test items to ensure proportiotnate distribution of questions across all levels of the cognitive domain..

Relevant and appropriate rubrics will have to be developed for assessing class work, homework and

Page:23

Assessment

project work for authentic assessment of all the strands.

Weighting for summative assessment (IX to XII)

Sl. No Type Weighting

1 Term I 40%A. Written exam 10% B. Practical exam 20% C. CA 10%

2 Term II 60%A. Written exam 20%B. Practical exam 30% C. CA 10%

Total 100% A+B+C

1. Written = 302. Practical = 503. CA = 20

C. Details of CA

Continuous Assessment (10%)Continuous Assessment for the term I /II (10%) Weighting

1. Class Work 3 2. Homework 3 3. Project Work 4

NB: BCSEA or the external examiner will administer the written and practical exams for terminal classes (X and XII) and internal CA marks (20 %) will be submitted by the school.

Weighting for strands

I. Examinations Strand 1

(Concepts)Strand 2 (Skills)

Strand 3 &4

(Values, attitudes and entrepreneurial competencies)

Total

1. Written exam 80% 10% 10% 1002. Practical exam 10% 60% 30% 100

Average 45% 35% 20% 100

II. Continuous Assessment

Strand 1

(Concepts)

Strand 2 (Skills)

Strand 3 &4


Total

Theory 60% 20% 20% 1001. Class participation2. Assignments (class /

homework)3. Project /field trips

(write up)Practice 20% 60% 20% 100

1. Class 2. Project

Average 40% 40% 20% 100Refer assessment guidelines (annexure XIX) for detailed information.


Page:24

Page:25

Enabling Conditions

CHAPTER 9ENABLING CONDITIONS

A conducive learning environment is a prerequisite in any educational institution. Therefore, the school, supported by relevant agencies, has to create an enabling environment that facilitates learning and the achievement of the TVET objectives.. A conducive learning environment, with inspiring teachers,textbooks and other resources will ensure the successful implementation of the curriculum andthe achievement of the learning outcomes by the students.

The context for the change will need the following:

• School leadership that understands and believes in the importance of equiping the students with knowledge, skills and abilities. The leadership that provides the time, scope and resources necessary for providing the required learning experience of problem solving.

• Learning environment built around a student in the constructivist approach that complements the textbooks and includes the infrastructure, workshop, tools, equipment and training materials that are required to practice the knowledge and skills. The minimum resources required for each trade are worked out in annexures X-XVIII.

• Recruitment of trained instructors/trainers and provisions for their capacity building continually.

• Assessment and evaluation that are designed to capture the learning outcomes in their various domains of learning, and inform the learner and facilitators in real time to take remedial actions.

• An inclusive environment that encourages equity in diversity in all aspects including gender, ability, culture etc.

• Partnerships of stakeholders, especially practitioners to enrich the learning experiences where trainer/instructor might not have all the knowledge and experiences.

• Student leadership for engagement as active learners.


Page:26

Page:27

Annexes

ANNEXES

ANNEX I: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR FURNITURE MAKING

A. FURNITURE MAKING LESSONS

Class Module Chapter Lessons Theory ( Hrs)

Practical (Hrs)

Total Duration

(Hrs)

IX

Module 1

Performing manual woodwork

Chapter 1

Practicing Occupational Health and Safety (OHS)

1.1 Applying Principles of 5s 1 2.5

18

1.2 Applying OHS Practices 0.5 21.3 Using personal Protective

equipment(PPE)0.5 2.5

1.4 Maintaining work place and personal safety

0.5 3

1.5 Maintaining tools and equipment safety

0.5 2.5

1.6 Using fire extinguisher 0.5 2

Chapter 2

Maintaining hand tools and portable power tools

2.1 Sharpening plane and chisel blades

2 8

50

2.2 Sharpening saw blade 1 162.3 Grinding hand tools 1 22.4 Making handle 1 32.5 Sharpening augur bit 1 22.6 Sharpening knife 1 12.7 Changing portable planner blade 1 22.8 Changing circular saw blade 1 22.9 Replacing jigsaw blade 0.5 22.10 Replacing router bit 0.5 2

Chapter 3

Carrying out basic woodwork

3.1 Performing cross cut 2 5

74

3.2 Performing rip cut 1.5 43.3 Planing work piece 4 28.53.4 Chiseling work piece 3 173.5 Drilling hole 2 1.53.6 Sanding work piece 2 3.5

Engineering Drawing 6.5 27.5Total 34.5 141.5 176

Hours


Page:28


Practical (Hrs)

Total Duration

(Hrs)

X

Module 1

Performing manual wood work

Chapter 3Carrying out basic woodwork

3.7 Cutting glass 1 7.5313.7 Performing timber seasoning

5.5 17

Chapter 4Performing wood joints

4.1 Making butt joint 2 3.5

111

4.2 Making half lap joint 2 64.3 Making ‘T’ lap joint 1 54.4 Making mortise and tenon joint 2 84.5 Making miter joint 2 94.6 Making finger joint 1 104.7 Making dovetail joint 2 114.8 Performing sash joint 1 114.9 Making haunch joint 1 104.10 Making dowel joint 2 5.54.11 Performing basic estimation of

materials 6 10

Engineering Drawing7 27

34176

Total Hours 35.5 140.5


Practical (Hrs)

Total Duration

(Hrs)

XI

Module 2Making table and chairs

Chapter 1 Making table

1.1 Preparing table components 4 12

731.2 Making table joints 2.5 181.3 Assembling table component 4 12.51.4 Performing finishing work 4 16

Chapter 2Making chair

2.1 Preparing chair components 6 19732.2 Making chair joint 4.5 24

2.3 Assembling chair component parts 4 14.5

Chapter 3Making Divan

3.1 Preparing divan components 3 10

743.2 Making divan joints 6.5 223.3 Making drawer 3 143.4 Assembling drawer component 2 13.5

Engineering Drawing 7 29 36

Page:29

Annexes

Total Hours 50.5 205.5 25636

256


Practical (Hrs)

Total Duration

(Hrs)

Module 3 Making bed and Sofa frames

Chapter 1Making bed

1.1 Preparing bed components 6 18771.2 Making bed joints 3 22

1.3 Assembling bed components 6 22Chapter 2Making sofa frame

2.1 Preparing sofa components 6 12672.2 Preparing sofa joints 6 16

2.3 Assembling sofa components 1 26

XII

Module 4Making Storage Cabinet

Chapter 1Preparing cabinet

1.1 Preparing cabinet components 4 12

531.2 Making cabinet joints 4 121.3 Assembling cabinet components 2.5 18.5

Chapter 2Making shutter joints and assemble parts

2.1 Preparing shutter components 4 12

592.3 Making shutter joints 3.5 17.52.4 Assembling shutter 4 18

Total Hours 50 206 256Grand Total Hours 170.5 693.5 864

Hours


Page:30

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR FURNITURE MAKING

B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IXMODULE 1: PERFORMING MANUAL WOOD WORK

Chapter 1: Practicing Occupational Health and safety (OHS) Equipment (PPE)By the end of class IX chapter 1, students should be able to:

1.1 Apply principle of 5S

1.1.1 Define 5S.

1.1.2 State the purposes of 5S

1.1.3 Explain the principle of 5S

1.1.4 Define OHS

1.1.5 State the importance of OHS.

1.1.6 Explain the rights of employee

1.1.7 State the main causes of accidents

1.1.8 State the safety rules.

1.2 Use PPE

1.2.1 Define PPE.

1.2.2 State the importance of PPE.

1.2.3 List the categories of PPE.

1.2.4 Ensure to use appropriate PPE.

1.2.5 Ensure safe disposal of damage PPE.

1.2.6 Ensure not to use defective and damaged PPE.

1.3 Maintain work place safety

1.3.1 Define safety precaution.

1.3.2 List the different types of safety.

1.3.3 Explain workshop and personal safety.

1.3.4 State the importance of maintaining workplace and personal safety.

1.3.5 Explain the importance of safety signs and symbols.

1.3.6 Explain the emergency exit.

1.3.7 Describe the layout of the workshop.

1.3.8 Ensure to follow OHS procedures.

1.3.9 Ensure to keep the workshop clean.

1.3.10 Ensure to ring the alarm bell before the accident spreads over.

Page:31

Annexes

1.3.11 Ensure to display safety sings and symbols.

1.3.12 Ensure to use appropriate PPE in workplace.

1.3.13 Ensure to avoid horseplay at work place.

1.3.14 Ensure to avoid smoking and eating inside the workshop.

1.3.15 Ensure to avoid working under influence of alcohol.

1.4 Maintain tools and equipment safety

1.4.1 Explain tools and equipment safety.

1.4.2 State the importance of maintaining tools and equipment safety.

1.4.3 List do’s and don’ts of tools and equipment.

1.4.4 Ensure all the tools are in workable condition

1.4.5 Ensure to keep tools clean and dry, and tore them properly after use.

1.4.6 Ensure to operate the machine when instructed.

1.4.7 Ensure to refer manual prior to operation of tools and equipment

1.5 Use fire extinguisher

1.5.1 Define fire extinguisher.

1.5.2 Label the parts of fire extinguisher.

1.5.3 Explain the types of fire.

1.5.4 List types of fire extinguishers.

1.5.5 State the method of combating/extinguishing fires.

1.5.6 Ensure to read the instructions provided on the fire extinguisher.

1.5.7 Ensure appropriate use PPE.

Chapter 2: Maintaining hand tools and portable power toolsBy the end of class IX chapter 2, students should be able to:

2.1 Sharpen plane/chisel blade

2.1.1 Define blade.

2.1.2 List the types of plane.

2.1.3 Identify the parts of plane.

2.1.4 Identify the types of plane blade.

2.1.5 State the function of the plane and its parts.

2.1.6 Explain the purpose of soaking oil stone in water.

2.1.7 State the purpose of maintaining sharpening angle range.

2.1.8 State the purpose of applying oil on the blade.


Page:32

2.1.9 State the purpose of setting plane blade.

2.1.10 Ensure safe while checking the sharpness of the blade.

2.2 Sharpen saw blade

2.2.1 State the function of saw.

2.2.2 List the types of saw.

2.2.3 List types of saw setting tools.

2.2.4 Explain the method of sharpening and setting saw teeth.

2.2.5 Ensure safe handling of saw.

2.2.6 Ensure appropriate use of PPE.

2.3 Grind hand tools

2.3.1 State the function of a grinding machine.

2.3.2 List the safety precaution.

2.3.3 State the function of safety guard.

2.3.4 Explain the working principle of grinding machine.

2.3.5 Ensure to follow safety precautions.

2.3.6 Use to maintain cutting edge at an angle of 25° approximately.

2.3.7 Ensure to appropriate use of PPE.

2.4 Make handle

2.4.1 Identify the materials used for handle.

2.4.2 State the purpose of handle.

2.4.3 Explain the method of fitting handle.

2.4.4 Ensure proper disposal of waste.

2.4.5 Ensure safe handling to tools.

2.5 Sharpen augur bit

2.5.1 Define augur bit.2.5.2 Identify the size of auger bit.2.5.3 Label the parts of auger bit.2.5.4 State the function of auger bit. 2.5.5 Ensure not to change the angle of the bevel from the originally sharpened bit.2.5.6 Ensure to avoid lifting the brace end to prevent the damaging of bevel edge.

2.5.7 Ensure safe handling of sharpen bits.


Page:33

Annexes

2.6 Sharpen knife

2.6.1 Define knife.

2.6.2 Identify the types of knives.

2.6.3 Ensure safe handling of knife.

2.7 Change portable planner blade

2.7.1 State the portable planer safety precaution.

2.7.2 State the function of portable planer.

2.7.3 Operate portable planer machine.


2.7.5 Ensure safe handling of power tools.


2.7.7 Ensure the blade is aligned with the notch of the cutter block.

2.8 Change circular saw blade

2.8.1 State the function of circular saw machine.

2.8.2 List the parts of circular saw machine.

2.8.3 State the type of saw blades.

2.8.4 Operate circular saw.


2.8.6 Ensure that the stock is well supported to prevent getting the kerf close, binding the blade, and causing a kickback.

2.8.7 Ensure to support thin materials near the cut.

2.8.8 Ensure to adjust the depth of cut, so that the ends of three teeth are extended to ¼” (6 mm)

2.8.9 Ensure to check the base and angle adjustments are tightened before using a saw.

2.8.10 Ensure to let the blade touch the work piece only after the machine is switched on.

2.8.11 Ensure to hold the machine by both hands if two handles are provided.

2.8.12 Ensure the saw blade has stopped running before resting it on the workbench.

2.8.13 Ensure to unplug the power cable while making adjustment or to changing blade.

2.8.14 Ensure to use sharp blades and keep the blade guard functional.

2.8.15 Ensure to avoid overextending or over reaching and losing balance while using the portable circular saw.


Page:34

2.9 Replace jigsaw blade

2.91 State the function of jig saw machine.

2.9.2 Label the parts of jigsaw machine.

2.9.3 Operate jigsaw machine.

2.9.4 Ensure to cut the work piece at normal speed.



2.10 Replace router bit

2.10.1 State the function of router machine.

2.10.2 State the types of router bit.

2.10.3 Use router machine.

2.10.4 Ensure to cut the work piece at normal speed.


2.10.6 Ensure to use PPE.

Chapter 3: Carrying out basic wood workBy the end of class IX chapter 3, students should be able to:

3.1 Perform cross-cut

3.1.1 Define crosscut saw.

3.1.2 State the application of sawing.

3.1.3 State the purpose of cross cutting.

3.1.4 Ensure safe handling of tools.

3.1.5 Ensure safe use of hand saw.


3.2 Perform rip cutting

3.2.1 State the function of rip cut saw.

3.2.2 State the application of rip cut saw.


3.2.4 Ensure safe use of hand saw.


Page:35

Annexes

3.3 Plane work piece

3.3.1 Define plane.

3.3.2 List the types of marking tools.

3.3.3 State the preventive measure for distortion of work piece.

3.3.4 Explain the grains and textures of wood.

3.3.5 Ensure safe handling of planes.

3.3.6 Ensure to place the plane side wise.


3.4 Chisel work piece

3.4.1 State the functions of chisel.

3.4.2 Identify the different types of chisel.

3.4.3 Ensure safe handling of chisel.


3.5 Drill hole

3.5.1 Define drilling bit.

3.5.2 List the sizes of drill bit.

3.5.3 State the purpose of drilling.

3.5.4 Explain the types of boring tools.

3.5.5 Ensure safe handling of tools and equipment.


3.6 Sand work piece

3.6.1 Define sanding.

3.6.2 State the purposes of sanding.

3.6.3 Explain types of sand paper.

3.6.4 Explain the types of sand paper grits.

3.6.5 State the methods of sanding.

3.6.6 State the function of portable power sanding machine.

3.6.7 Use portable power sanding machine.





Page:36

B.2. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X

Chapter 3: Carrying out basic wood work

By the end of class X chapter 3, students should be able to:

3.7 Cut glass

3.7.1 Define glass.

3.7.2 State the function of glass cutter.

3.7.3 State the types of glass.

3.7.4 Ensure proper handling of glass.

3.7.5 Ensure proper disposal of waste glasses.


3.7.7 Ensure to cut glass without breaking any edges.

3.8 Perform timber seasoning

3.8.1 Define wood.

3.8.2 Classify types of woods.

3.8.3 State the characteristics of wood.

3.8.4 Explain the spices of trees in Bhutan.

3.8.5 State the properties of wood.

3.8.6 Explain cross section of timber.

3.8.7 Explain conversion of timber.

3.8.8 Explain preservation of timber.

3.8.9 Explain timber defects.

3.8.10 Define timber seasoning.

3.8.11 Explain purpose of seasoning.

3.8.12 State the types of seasoning.

3.8.13 Explain the methods of seasoning.

3.8.14 Explain moisture content in the timber.

3.8.15 Ensure proper staking of timber.

3.8.16 Ensure to work in team.


Page:37

Annexes

Chapter 4: Performing wood jointsBy the end of class X chapter 4, students should be able to:

4.1 Make butt joint

4.1.1 Define wood joints.

4.1.2 Explain the purpose of butt joint.

4.1.3 State the application of butt joint.

4.1.4 State the requirement of wood joint.

4.1.5 Explain the types of butt joint.

4.1.6 Ensure safe handling of hand tools.


4.2 Make half lap joint

4.2.1 Define half lap joint.

4.2.2 State the purpose of half-lap joint.

4.2.3 State the types of half lap joints.



4.3 Perform “T” Joint

4.3.1 Define “T” joints.

4.3.2 State the application of “T” joint.

4.3.3 State the types of “T” joint.



4.4 Perform mortise and tenon joint

4.4.1 Define mortise and tenon joint.

4.4.2 State the application of mortise and tenon joint.

4.4.3 State the types of mortise and tenon joint.



4.5 Make miter joint

4.5.1 Define miter joint.

4.5.2 State the application of miter joint.


Page:38

4.5.3 Explain the types of miter joint.

4.5.4 Explain the characteristics of miter joint.



4.6 Make finger joint

4.6.1 Define finger joint.

4.6.2 List types of finger joints.

4.6.3 State the application of finger joint.



4.7 Perform dovetail joint

4.7.1 Define dovetail joint.

4.7.2 Explain the characteristics of dovetail joint.

4.7.3 List the types of dovetail joint.

4.7.4 List the application of dovetail joint.



4.8 Perform sash joint

4.8.1 Define sash joint.

4.8.2 Explain the purpose of sash joint.

4.8.3 State the characteristics of sash joint.

4.8.4 State the application of sash joint.



4.9 Make haunch joint

4.9.1 State the purpose of haunch joint.

4.9.2 State the application of haunch joint.



Page:39

Annexes

4.10 Make dowel joint

4.10.1 Define dowel joint.

4.10.2 State the application of dowel joint.

4.10.3 State the purpose of dowel plate.



4.11 Perform basic Estimation of materials

4.11.1 Define estimation and costing.

4.11.2 Sate the types of estimation and costing.

4.11.3 Explain the purpose of estimation through Bhutan schedule of Rate (BSR).

4.11.4 Estimate basic cost of wooden component product.

4.11.5 Ensure correct dimensions are extracted from the drawings.

4.11.6 Ensure correct code and estimation are executed.

B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XIMODULE 2: MAKING TABLES AND CHAIRS

Chapter 1: Making tableBy the end of class XI chapter 1, students should be able to:

1.1 Prepare table components

1.1.1 Define table

1.1.2 State the components of table.

1.1.3 State the function of circular saw machine.

1.1.4 Label the parts of circular saw machine.

1.1.5 State the purpose of surface planer machine.

1.1.6 Label the parts of surface planer machine.

1.1.7 State the functions of thicknesser machine.

1.1.8 Label the parts of thicknesser machine.

1.1.9 Use circular saw machine.

1.1.10 Use surface planer machine.

1.1.11 Use thicknesser machine.

1.1.12 Ensure safe handling of machines.



Page:40

1.2 Make table joints

1.2.1 State the types of joint.

1.2.2 State the purpose of pedestal drill machine.

1.2.3 Label the parts of pedestal drilling machine.

1.2.4 State the function of mortise machine.

1.2.5 Label the parts of mortise machine.

1.2.6 Use pedestal drilling machine.

1.2.7 Use mortise machine.

1.2.8 Ensure proper handling of machines.


1.3 Assemble table components

1.3.1 State the purpose of nails and screws.

1.3.2 State the types of nails.

1.3.3 State the types of screws.

1.3.4 State the types of clamps.

1.3.5 State the purpose of clamps.

1.3.6 State the purpose of glues

1.3.7 State the types of adhesive.

1.3.8 State the importance of pre-assembling.

1.3.9 Interpret design drawing

1.3.10 Ensure proper handling of clamps.

1.3.11 Ensure the safety while using clamps.


1.4 Perform finishing work

1.4.1 State the function of sanding machine.

1.4.2 State the types of sanding machine.

1.4.3 State the purpose of wood filler.

1.4.4 State the purpose of polish.

1.4.5 State the types of polish

1.4.6 Use sanding machine.

1.4.7 Ensure proper handling of machine.


Page:41

Annexes

Chapter 2: Making chairBy the end of class XI chapter 1, students should be able to:

2.1 Prepare chair components

2.1.1 Define chair.

2.1.2 State the types of chair.

2.1.3 Label the components of chair.

2.1.4 Ensure proper handling of machines

2.1.5 Ensure to follow safety precautions while operating the machine

2.1.6 Ensure to use PPE

2.2 Make chair joint

2.2.1 State the types of joint.



2.3 Assemble chair component parts

2.3.1 Interpret design drawing

2.3.2 Ensure proper handling of clamps

2.3.3 Ensure the safety while using clamps


Chapter 3: Making divanBy the end of class XI chapter 3, students should be able to:

3.1 Prepare divan components

3.1.1 Define divan.

3.1.2 Label the components of divan.


3.1.4 Ensure to follow safety precautions while operating the machine.


3.2 Make divan joints

3.2.1 State the types of joints.

3.2.2 Define spindle moulder machine.

3.2.3 State the function of spindle moulder machine.

3.2.4 Label the parts of machine.


Page:42

3.2.5 Use spindle moulder machine.

3.2.6 Ensure safe handling of hand tools and machines.


3.3 Make drawer

3.3.1 Define drawer.

3.3.2 State the purpose of drawer.


3.3.4 Ensure safe handling of hand tools machines.


3.4 Assemble drawer components

3.4.1 Interpret design drawing.

3.4.2 Ensure proper handling of clamps.

3.4.3 Ensure the safety while using clamps.


B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XIIMODULE 3: MAKING BED AND SOFA FRAMES

Chapter 1: Making bedBy the end of class XII chapter 1, students should be able to:

1.1 Prepare bed components

1.1.1 Define bed.

1.1.2 State the types of beds.

.1.3 Label the components of bed.

1.1.4 State the size of bed.



1.2 Make bed joints


1.2.2 Ensure safe handling of hand tools and machines.


Page:43

Annexes

1.3 Assemble components of bed

1.3.1 Define ironmongery.

1.3.2 State the types of hardware fittings for bed.

1.3.3 State the importance of diagonal checking.

1.3.4 Ensure proper handling of clamp.


Chapter 2: Making sofa frameBy the end of class XII chapter 2, students should be able to:

2.1 Prepare sofa components

2.1.1 Define sofa

2.1.2 State the types of sofa.

2.1.3 Label the components of sofa.

2.1.4 State the function of wood turning lathe machine.

2.1.5 Label the parts of wood turning lathe machine.

2.1.6 Use wood turning lathe machine.

2.1.7 Ensure proper handling of machine.


2.2 Prepare sofa joints


2.2.2 State the function of band saw machine.

2.2.3 Label the parts of band saw machine.

2.2.4 State the function of jigs and fixture.

2.2.5 Use band sawing machine.

2.2.6 Ensure proper handling of tools

2.2.7 Ensure appropriate use of PPE

2.3 Assemble sofa components


2.3.2 State the importance of alignment.

2.3.3 State the purpose of furniture stability.




Page:44

MODULE 4: MAKING STORAGE CABINET

Chapter 1: Preparing cabinetBy the end of class XII chapter 1, students should be able to:

1.1 Prepare cabinet components

1.1.1 Define cabinet.

1.1.2 State the types of cabinet.

1.1.3 Label the components of cabinet.

1.1.4 Ensure safe use of machines.


1.2 Make cabinet joints




1.3 Assemble cabinet components




Chapter 2: Making shutter joints and assemble parts2.1 Prepare shutter components

2.1.1 Define shutter.

2.1.2 State the types of shutter.

2.1.3 Label the components of shutter.



2.2 Make shutter joints

2.2.1 Sate the types of shutter joints.



Page:45

Annexes

2.3 Assemble shutter


2.3.2 State the types of shutter hardware fittings.

2.3.3 State the application of shutter hardware fittings.

2.3.4 Fix hardware fitting on shutter.



INTERPRETING ENGINEERING DRAWING DRAWING LESSONS

Class Module Chapter LessonsTheory(Hrs)

Practical (Hrs)

Total Duration

(Hrs)

IX

Module 1

Interpreting Engineering

Drawing

Chapter 1

Interpreting Basic

Engineering Drawing

1.1 Using the drawing instrument 3 2

34 hrs.

1.2 Laying out drawing sheet 1 11.3 Drawing engineering signs,

symbols, and abbreviations2 6

1.4 Drawing types of lines 2 61.5 Drawing a letter and number 2 61.6 Providing dimension 2 3.5

X

Chapter 2

Drawing Isometric

projections

1.1 Converting Scale for drawing 1 7

34 hrs1.2 Draw isometric blocks 1 10

1.3 Drawing an orthographic Projections

2 10

XI

Chapter :3

Interpreting technical drawing

3.1 Drawing stool 1.5 1036 hrs

3.2 Drawing chair 1.5 11

3.3 Drawing table 1.5 11

Total 20.5 83.5 104 hrs


Page:46

MODULE: INTERPRETING ENGINEERING DRAWING

LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX

Chapter: 1 Interpreting Basic Engineering DrawingBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

1.1 Use drawing instrument

1.1.1 Define engineering drawing.

1.1.2 State the purposes of engineering drawing.

1.1.3 List the types and uses of drawing instruments.

1.1.4 List the sizes of drawing papers

1.1.5 Ensure clean and neatness of drawing

1.1.6 Ensure proper handling of drawing instruments

1.2 Lay out drawing sheet

1.2.1 Define the layout of a drawing sheet.

1.2.2 Define the title block.


1.2.4 Ensure Proper handling of drawing instruments

1.3 Draw engineering signs, symbols, and abbreviations

1.3.1 Define signs and symbols.

1.3.2 Define abbreviation.

1.3.3 Ensure clean and neatness of drawing.

1.3.4 Ensure Proper handling of drawing instruments.

1.4 Drawing types of lines

1.4.1 Define line.

1.4.2 State the types of line and its application.



1.5 Draw a letter and number

1.5.1 Define lettering and numbering.

1.5.2 Classify the styles of letters.

1.5.3 List the types of letters.

Page:47

Annexes

1.5.4 Define freehand lettering.

1.5.5 List the sizes of letters.

1.5.6 State the rules for lettering and numbering.



1.6 Provide dimension

1.6.1 Define dimension.

1.6.2 State the types of dimensions.

1.6.3 Explain the system of dimensions.

1.6.4 State the terminologies of dimensions.

1.6.5 State the rules for dimensioning.



LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X

Chapter 2: Drawing isometric projections By the end of class X students should be able to:

2.1 Convert scale for drawing

2.1.1 Define drawing scale.

2.1.2 List the types of scale.



2.2 Draw isometric blocks

2.2.1 Define isometric drawing.

2.2.2 State the isometric terminologies

2.2.3 Carry out free hand sketching.




Page:48

2.3 Draw an orthographic Projections

2.3.1 Define orthographic projections.

2.3.2 Draw six principle views.

2.3.3 Explain the method of obtaining six principle views.

2.3.4 Explain four quadrants with the help of diagrams.

2.3.5 Differentiate between first and third angle projections.



LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI

Chapter 3: Interpreting technical drawingBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

3.1 Draw stool

3.1.1 Define elevations (front, right, left, rear).

3.1.2 Define sections.

3.1.3 Draw elevations.

3.1.4 Draw sections.



3.2 Draw chair

3.2.1 Draw chair elevations.

3.2.2 Draw chair sections.


3.2.4 Ensure proper handling of drawing instruments.

3.3 Draw table

3.3.1 Draw elevations.

3.3.2 Draw sections.



Page:49

Annexes

ANNEX II: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR PLUMBING

A. PLUMBING LESSONS

Class Module Chapters Lessons Theory (hrs)

Practical (hrs)

Total (Hrs)

IX

Module 1Carrying out installation of internal domestic water supply system

Chapter1Practicing occupational health and safety (OHS)

1.1 Applying Principle of 5s 1 3

18

1.2 Using Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 1 2

1.3 Maintaining workshop and personal safety 1.5 2.5

1.4 Maintaining tools and equipment safety 0.5 2.5

1.5 Using fire extinguisher 1 3

Chapter 2Installing pipes and fittings

2.1 Identifying water pipes and fittings 5 10

762.2 Identifying tools and equipment 5 102.3 Estimating material 4 122.4 Cutting pipes 6 24Engineering Drawing 82

Total hours 176


2.5 Reaming pipe 2 6

128

2.6 Threading pipe manually 6 182.7 Threading pipe mechanically 5 12

2.8 Performing GI pipe jointing 5 122.9 Performing CPVC pipe jointing 3 72.10 Performing PP-R pipe jointing 4 102.11 Performing Copper pipe jointing 4 0102.12 Performing HDPE pipe jointing 6 18Engineering Drawing 48

Total hours 176

XI

Module CLASS XI


2.13 Preparing layout 4 18

128hrs

2.14 Cutting channel 3 122.15 Laying water pipe lines 4 262.16 Fixing Clamps 4 142.17 Conducting Leakage test 5 142.18 Performing pipe insulation 6 18

Chapter 3Carrying out basic masonry works

3.1 Identifying masonry materials, tools, and equipment

1 7

98hrs

3.2 Preparing layout 2 14

3.3 Mixing mortar 4 153.4 Mixing concrete 2 8

3.5 Laying stretcher bond 4 93.6 Laying Header bond 2 8

3.7 Laying English bond 3 11


Page:50

3.8 Laying stone wall 2 6Engineering Drawing 11 19 30

Total hours 57 199 256

XII

CLASS XII

Module 1Carrying out installation of internal domestic water supply system

Chapter 3 Carrying out

basic mansonry work

3.9 Performing plastering 5 25 60

3.10 Performing basic RCC work 7 23

Chapter 4Installing water storage Tank

4.1 Interpreting storage tank drawing 2 9

664.2 Studying site location 2 64.3 Preparing bedding 3 144.4 Fixing tank components 4 174.5 Mounting storage tank 2 7

Chapter 5Installing water pumps

5.1 Interpreting pump drawing 2 7

665.2 Preparing pump layout 3 7

5.3 Constructing pump base 3 155.4 Assembling pump component 3 155.5 Testing pump 2 9

Chapter 6Maintaining internal domestic water supply system

6.1 Locating fault 4 11

64

6.2 Preparing estimation and costing of maintenance

4 14

6.3 Clearing pipe blockage 2 116.4 Repairing defective pipes and fitting (CP fittings)

4 14

Total hours 52 204 256Total hours 864

Page:51

Annexes

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR PLUMBING

B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX

Chapter 1: Applying occupational health and safety (OHS) By the end of class IX, students should be able to:

1.1 Apply Principle of 5S

1.1.1 Define 5S.

1.1.2 State the purposes of 5S.

1.1.3 Explain the principle of 5S.

1.1.4 Define OHS.


1.1.6 Explain the rights of employee.

1.1.7 State the main causes of accidents.


1.2 Use PPE

1.2.1 Define PPE.






1.3 Maintain workshop and personal safety













Page:52








1.4.3 List do’s and don’ts of tools and equipment.




1.4.7 Ensure to refer manual prior to operation of tools and equipment









Chapter 2: Installing pipes and fittingsBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

2.1 Identify water pipes and fittings

2.1.1 Define pipe.

2.1.2 Explain the types of internal pipes and their uses.

2.1.3 Explain the types of internal fittings and their uses.

2.1.4 State the advantages and disadvantages of different pipe.

2.1.5 Ensure proper handling of pipes and fittings.

2.1.6 Ensure good housekeeping.

2.1.7 Ensure use hand gloves and apron.

2.1.8 Be patient while identify water pipes and fitting.

2.2 Identify tools and equipment

Page:53

Annexes

2.2.1 Define tools and equipment.

2.2.2 Explain the types of tools and their uses.

2.2.3 Explain the types of equipment and their uses.

2.2.4 Ensure proper handling of tools and equipment.

2.2.5 Ensure good housekeeping.


2.3 Estimate materials

2.3.1 Define estimation and costing.

2.3.2 Explain the importance of estimation and costing.

2.3.3 Explain different methods of estimation.

2.3.4 List the data required for estimation.

2.3.5 Ensure to use current BSR.

2.3.6 Ensure correct interpretation of drawing.

2.3.7 Ensure to enter BSR codes, nomenclatures, sizes and rates

2.3.8 Ensure correct calculation of quantities amount.


2.4 Cut pipe

2.4.1 Define marking tool.

2.4.2 Explain the purpose of marking tools.

2.4.3 Identify types of marking tools.

2.4.4 Define cutting tool.

2.4.5 Explain types of cutting tools and their function.

2.4.6 Explain the importance of body position while cutting pipe.

2.4.7 Differentiate between pipe cutter and hacksaw.

2.4.8 Set hacksaw blade in forward direction for proper cutting.

2.4.9 Label the parts of cutting tools.

2.4.10 Explain the purposes of applying lubricant.

2.4.11 List the types of vice and their usage.

2.4.12 Use hacksaw.

2.4.13 Use pipe cutter.

2.4.14 Ensure safe handling of tools and materials.

2.4.15 Ensure good housekeeping practices.


2.4.17 Ensure proper disposal of waste product.


Page:54


Chapter 2: Installing pipes and fittings

2.5 Ream pipe

2.5.1 Define pipe reamer.

2.5.2 List the types of pipe reamers.

2.5.3 Label the parts of reamer.

2.5.4 Explain the importance of checking thickness of the pipe edge after reaming.

2.5.5 List the different types of files.

2.5.6 Explain the purpose of file.

2.5.7 Use spiral ratchet reamer.

2.5.8 File pipe.

2.5.9 Ensure safe handling of pipe reamer.



2.6 Thread pipe manually

2.6.1 Define threading.

2.6.2 Explain the types of manual threading tools.

2.6.3 Label the parts of the diestock.

2.6.4 Differentiate between Indian diestock and ratchet diestock.

2.6.5 Explain the causes of defective thread.

2.6.6 State the purpose of lubricant.

2.6.7 Use Die & stock.

2.6.8 Use Ratchet die stock.

2.6.9 Ensure proper handling of die & stock and ratchet die.



2.7 Thread pipe mechanically

2.7.1 Define electric threading.

2.7.2 Explain the types of electric threading machine and their features.

2.7.3 State the advantages and disadvantages of electric threading machine.

2.7.4 Label the parts of the threading machine.

2.7.5 Set universal threading machine.

Page:55

Annexes


2.7.7 Ensure proper handling of universal threading machine.


2.7.9 Ensure to be patient while threading.

2.8 Perform Galvanize Iron (GI) pipe joint

2.8.1 Define GI pipe.

2.8.2 Explain the classification of GI pipe.

2.8.3 Explain the characteristics and properties of GI pipe and fittings.

2.8.4 Identify the types of jointing compound and its application.

2.8.5 Explain the purpose of applying jointing compound.

2.8.6 State the advantages and disadvantages of GI pipe and fittings.

2.8.7 Define Z-Dimensions.

2.8.8 Calculate Z-dimension.

2.8.9 Wrap jute.


2.8.11 Ensure economic use of materials.



2.8.14 Ensure the proper wrapping of jute

2.8.15 Ensure to use of correct jointing compound.

2.9 Perform Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe joint

2.9.1 Define CPVC pipe.

2.9.2 Explain the characteristics and properties of CPVC pipes and fittings.

2.9.3 List the available sizes of pipe.

2.9.4 State the jointing compound used for CPVC pipes.

2.9.5 State the purpose of using jointing compound.

2.9.6 List the advantages and disadvantages of CPVC pipe and fittings.

2.9.7 State the importance of trial fitting.

2.9.8 Ensure proper handling of pipe wrench.




2.9.12 Ensure to use correct quantity of glue.


Page:56

2.10 Perform Poly Propylene - Random (PP-R) pipe joint

2.10.1 Define PP-R pipe.

2.10.2 Explain the advantages and disadvantages of PP-R pipes and fittings.

2.10.3 State the characteristics and properties of PP-R pipe and fittings.

2.10.4 State the application of PP-R pipe.

2.10.5 Explain the importance of maintaining correct temperature of PP-R welding machine.

2.10.6 State the standard dimension ratio (SDR) of PP-R pipe.

2.10.7 Explain the condition of PP-R pipe jointing.

2.10.8 Ensure proper handling of PP-R Bud welding machine.


2.10.10 Ensure to follow OHS.


2.11 Perform copper pipe jointing

2.11.1 Define copper pipe.

2.11.2 State the types of copper pipes.

2.11.3 State the dimension of copper pipe.

2.11.4 Explain the advantages and disadvantages of copper pipe.

2.11.5 Explain the types of copper pipe jointing methods.

2.11.6 State the application of copper pipe.




2.12 Perform High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe joint

2.12.1 Define HDPE pipe.

2.12.2 State the advantages and disadvantages of HDPE pipe.

2.12.3 Explain the characteristic of HDPE pipe.

2.12.4 Explain the types of HDPE pipe joining methods.

2.12.5 Explain the importance of maintaining correct temperature.

2.12.6 Explain the dimension and maximum operating pressure of HDPE pipe.

2.12.7 State the application of HDPE pipe.

2.12.8 Use manual heating plate.

2.12.9 Use Electric butt-welding machine.

2.12.10 Ensure proper handling of Electric Butt-welding machine.



Page:57

Annexes

B.3. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI

Chapter 2: Installing pipes and fittingsBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

2.13 Prepare layout

2.13.1 Define layout

2.13.2 Explain the importance of checking alignment

2.13.3 List the types of marking tools and materials

2.13.4 List the measuring tools

2.13.5 State the types of layout and its importance

2.13.6 Ensure correct interpretation of drawing

2.13.7 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves and apron

2.13.8 Ensure proper handling of layout tools

2.13.9 Work in team

2.14 Cut channel

2.14.1 Explain Purpose of channelling

2.14.2 Explain method of cutting channel

2.14.3 Explain consequences of irregular cutting

2.14.4 List types of channel cutting tools and equipment

2.14.5 Ensure proper handling of tile cutting machine

2.14.6 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves, dust mask, ear plug, goggles and apron

2.14.7 Ensure proper disposal of waste product

2.15 Lay water pipeline

2.15.1 Explain types of pipe laying and importance of trial fitting

2.15.2 Explain the importance of laying hot and cold-water pipeline in parallel

2.15.3 Explain the consequences of improper laying of pipe

2.15.4 Calculate the loading values and dimensioning

2.15.5 Work in team



Page:58

2.16 Fix clamps

2.16.1 Define clamp and dowel

2.16.2 List the types of clamp and dowel

2.16.3 Explain the purpose of fixing clamp

2.16.4 State the standard spacing between clamps

2.16.5 Use drilling machine

2.16.6 Ensure proper handling of drilling machine

2.16.7 Ensure economic use of materials

2.16.8 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves, ear plug and goggle

2.17 Conduct leakage test

2.17.1 Explain the working principle of pressure testing equipment

2.17.2 State the types of pressure testing equipment

2.17.3 Explain the methods of checking leakage

2.17.4 State the importance of removing air

2.17.5 Use hydraulic test machine

2.17.6 Ensure proper handling of pressure testing device

2.17.7 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves

2.18 Perform pipe insulation

2.18.1 Define insulation

2.18.2 Explain the types of insulation

2.18.3 Explain the purpose of pipe insulation

2.18.4 List the types of binding materials

2.18.5 Ensure proper handling of insulating materials

2.18.6 Ensure proper disposal of waste product

2.18.7 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves, goggles and dust mask

Chapter 3: Carrying out basic masonry worksBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

3.1 Identify tools and equipment

3.1.1 State the types of tools and their uses

3.1.2 State the types of materials and their uses

3.1.3 State the types of equipment and their uses

Page:59

Annexes

3.1.4 Describe the importance of selecting appropriate tools, material and equipment

3.1.5 Explain the storage of materials

3.1.6 Identify tools, equipment and materials

3.1.7 Ensure proper handling of tools and equipment

3.1.8 Ensure good housekeeping


3.2 Prepare layout

3.2.1 Define layout and describe its purpose.

3.2.2 List the methods of layout.

3.2.3 List the tools & materials required for laying foundation.

3.2.4 Apply Pthagoras theorem to derive 3,4,5 method.

3.2.5 State the terminology used in layout.

3.2.6 Use water level pipe.

3.2.7 Carryout foundation layout.

3.2.8 Work in team

3.2.9 Ensure correct interpretation of drawing

3.3 Mixing mortar

3.3.1 State the different types of cement

3.3.2 State different types of mix ration

3.3.3 Explain setting time of cement

3.3.4 List the method of measuring the ingredients

3.3.5 Define mortar.

3.3.6 State the function of mortar.

3.3.7 List the uses of mortar.

3.3.8 State the types of mortar.

3.3.9 Identify the tools required for preparing the surface.

3.3.10 Describe the requirement of mixing platform.

3.3.11 List the tools required for mixing.

3.3.12 Calculate the total quantity of mortar.

3.3.13 Ensure proper handling of tools and materials.

3.3.14 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves, goggles, apron and helmet.


Page:60

3.4 Mixing concrete

3.4.1 Define concrete.

3.4.2 Types of concrete mixing.

3.4.3 Method of transportation of concrete.

3.4.4 Method of curing concrete.

3.4.5 Ensure proper handling of mixer machine.

3.4.6 Ensure to use hand gloves, ear muff.

3.5 Laying stretcher bond

3.5.1 List the types of bond.

3.5.2 Differentiate between the bonded and un-bonded wall.

3.5.3 Describe the orientation of bricks.

3.5.4 Define the stretcher bond.

3.5.5 State the application of stretcher bond.

3.5.6 Explain the technical terms for brick masonry.

3.5.7 Calculate the quantity of bricks

3.6 Laying Header bond

3.6.1 Define header bond.

3.6.2 State the application of header bond.

3.6.3 Define Flemish bond.

3.6.4 State the application of Flemish bond.

3.6.5 Differentiate English and Flemish bond wall.

3.7 Laying English bond

3.7.1 Define English bond.

3.7.2 State the advantages of English bond.

3.7.3 State the application of English bond.

3.8 Laying stone wall

3.8.1 Define stone masonry

3.8.2 Define stone dressing

3.8.3 State the techinical term used in stone masonry

3.8.4 List the tools used for stone dressing

3.8.5 Explain the pupose of stone dressing

Page:61

Annexes

3.8.6 State the use of stone masonry

3.8.7 List the types of stones used in building construction

3.8.8 Describe the types of stone mansory

3.8.9 Describe the quality and selection of stones

3.8.10 Apply basic estimation

3.8.11 Ensure approriate use of gloves, apron and helmet

B.4. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII

Chapter 3: Carry out basic masonry workBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

3.9 Perform plastering

3.9.1 Define plastering

3.9.2 State types of plastering

3.9.3 Explain the purpose of patches

3.9.4 State types of defects in plastering

3.9.5 Explain the purpose of curing

3.9.6 Ensure proper handling of tools and material

3.9.7 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves, apron and helmet

3.10 Perform basic Reinforced Cement Concrete (RCC) work

3.10.1 Define re-bar

3.10.2 Explain the types of re-bar

3.10.3 State the size of re-bar and its unit weight

3.10.4 Differentiate between RCC and Plain Cement Concrete (PCC)

3.10.5 State the purpose of reinforcement bar

3.10.6 Explain the purpose of formwork

3.10.7 Ensure proper handling of Die and bending hook



Page:62

Chapter 4: Install water storageBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

4.1 Interpret drawing of storage tank

4.1.1 Explain the sign and symbol for storage tank and its components.

4.1.2 Explain the drawing of storage tank.


4.2 Study site location

4.2.1 Explain the importance of studying site location.

4.2.2 State the types of report writing.

4.2.3 Describe the importance of report writing.

4.2.4 State the purpose of report writing.

4.2.5 Exhibit honesty.

4.2.6 Work in team.

4.3 Prepare tank bedding

4.3.1 State the functions of bedding.

4.3.2 Explain the types of bedding.

4.3.3 Work in team.


4.3.5 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves and apron.

4.4 Fix plastic tank components

4.4.1 Define storage tank.

4.4.2 List the components of storage tank and their functions.

4.4.3 Explain working principal of float valve.

4.4.4 List the types of storage tank capacity.

4.4.5 Explain the types of storage tank.

4.4.6 State the advantages and disadvantages of storage tank.

4.4.7 Calculate water tank capacity

4.4.8 Ensure proper handling of drilling machine, pipe wrench, adjustable and screw driver.


4.4.10 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves and helmet.

Page:63

Annexes

4.5 Mount storage tank

4.5.1 List the types of valve and their application.

4.5.2 Explain the function of union.

4.5.3 Explain the purpose of using vent pipe.

4.5.4 Explain the importance of checking leakage.

4.5.5 Explain the importance of checking flow direction of gate valve.

4.5.6 Ensure proper handling of storage tank.

4.5.7 Ensure appropriate use of helmet, hand glove, apron and safety belt.

Chapter 5: Install water pumpBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

5.1 Interpret pump drawing

5.1.1 Interprete standard and types of sign and symbol.

5.1.2 Explain the importance of referring drawing.

5.1.3 Ensure good housekeeping practices.


5.1.5 Ensure safe handling of drawing.

5.2 Prepare pump layout

5.2.1 Explain the Pythagoras theorem.

5.2.2 Explain the method of layout.

5.2.3 Ensure proper handling of tools and material.

5.2.4 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves.

5.3 Construct pump base

5.3.1 Explain the different types of foundation.

5.3.2 State the purpose of soling.

5.3.3 Perform stone soiling.

5.3.4 Perform concreting.

5.3.5 Proper handling of tools and equipment.

5.3.6 Ensure appropriate use of BSR and BOQ.

5.3.7 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves, helmet and apron.


Page:64

5.4 Assemble pump accessories

5.4.1 Define water pump.

5.4.2 List the types of water pump and their specifications.

5.4.3 Explain the function of water pump.

5.4.4 Label the parts of the water pump.

5.4.5 State the working principle of water pump.

5.4.6 List the advantages and disadvantages of pumps.

5.4.7 Explain the purpose of using check/foot valve.


5.4.9 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves, helmet and safety belt.

5.5 Test pump

5.5.1 Define priming and state its importance.

5.5.2 Explain do’s and don’ts for installing pump.

5.5.3 Calculate head pump.

5.5.4 State the cause and remedies of defect in waster pump.

5.5.4 Calculate head discharge.

5.5.5 State the causes of problem in water pump.

5.5.6 Prime the pump.


Chapter 6: Maintain internal domestic water supply systemBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

6.1 Locate fault in pipe lines

6.1.1 Explain the causes and remedies of pipe line faults.

6.1.2 List the different types of fault.


6.1.4 Work in team.

6.1.5 Ensure appropriate use of hand gloves, helmet, apron and safety belt.

6.2 Prepare estimation and costing of maintenance

6.2.1 Explain the purpose of maintenance.

6.2.2 List the types of material required for maintenance.

6.2.3 State the types of maintenance service schedule.

Page:65

Annexes

6.2.4 Ensure proper handling tools, materials and equipment.


6.3 Clear pipe blockage

6.3.1 Explain the causes of pipe blockage.

6.3.2 List the types of clearing tool.

6.3.3 Ensure proper handling tools, materials and equipment


6.4 Repair defective pipes and fitting

6.4.1 Explain the causes and remedies of defective pipelines

6.4.2 Explain the causes and remedies of defectives fittings

6.4.3 Ensure proper handling tools, materials and equipment


INTERPRETING ENGINEERING DRAWING

DRAWING LESSONS


Practical (hrs)

Total (hrs)

IX

Module 1 Interpreting engineering

drawing

Chapter 1

Interpreting basic

engineering drawing

1.7 Using drawing instruments 3 35

40

1.8 Laying out drawing sheet 2 3 1.9 Interpreting Engineering Signs,

symbols and abbreviation 2 4

1.10 Drawing different types of lines 2 3

1.11 Draw letters and numbers 1 81.12 Provide dimensioning 1 6

Total Hours 40

X


drawing

Chapter 2

Interpreting Isometric,

orthographic and trade drawing

2.2 Drawing of Isometric blocks 6 14

24

Total Hours 24


Page:66

XI Module 1 Interpreting engineering

drawing

Chapter 2



2.3 Drawing Orthographic Projection 2 33.5

79

2.4 Drawing a simple building plan

2 41.5

Total Hours 79



Chapter 1: Interpreting Basic Engineering DrawingBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

1.1 Use drawing instruments

1.1.1 Define Engineering Drawing.



1.1.4 List the sizes of drawing papers.



1.2 Layout drawing sheet

1.2.1 Define layout of drawing sheet.

1.2.2 Define title block.

1.2.3 Ensure to maintain cleanliness and neatness of drawing.


1.2.5 Ensure that the sheet edges are not damaged while handling the drawing.

1.3 Interpret Engineering Sign, symbols and abbreviation

1.3.1 Define sign and symbol.




Page:67

Annexes

1.4 Draw different types of lines

1.4.1 Define line.


1.4.3 Ensure proper handling of drawing instrument.


1.5 Draw letters and numbers








1.6.1 Define dimensioning.

1.6.2 State the types of dimensioning.

1.6.3 Explain the system of dimensioning.






Chapter 2: Interpreting Isometric, orthographic and trade drawingBy the end of class X, students should be able to:

2.2 Draw Isometric blocks


2.2.2 State isometric terminologies.

2.2.3 Ensure handling of set squares.


Page:68


Chapter 2: Interpreting Isometric, orthographic and trade projectionsBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

2.3 Draw Orthographic projection

2.3.1 Define orthographic drawing.

2.3.2 List the four quadrants.

2.3.3 Name the different ways of drawing orthographic projections.

2.3.4 Differentiate between first and third angle projection.



2.4 Draw a simple building plan

2.4.1 Define building drawing.

2.4.2 List the types of building drawing.

2.4.3 Define the scale for drawing.


2.4.5 Develop creativity through their own simple drawing plan.



Page:69

Annexes

ANNEX III: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR MASONRY

A. MASONRY LESSONS

Class Module Chapters Lessons Theory(hrs) Practical (hrs)

Total (hrs)

IX

Module 1: Performing brick/block, stone masonry and plastering work

Chapter1


1.1 Applying Principle of 5S 1 3

18

1.2 Using PPE 1 21.3 Maintaining workplace and

personal safety 2 2.5

1.4 Maintaining tools and equipment safety .5 2.5

1.5 Using fire extinguisher 1.5 2Chapter 2

Preparing for Masonry Work

2.1 Selecting masonry tools, equipment and materials 3 4

282.2 Identifying Building

Components 1.5 2.5

2.3 Estimating materials 2 15

Chapter3

Preparing mortar mix

3.1 Conducting Silt content test 1 3

253.2 Preparing surface 1 2 3.3 Mixing mortar manually 2 5 3.4 Mixing mortar

mechanically 1 10

Chapter 4

Performing brick/blocks masonry work

4.1 Carrying out foundation layout 3 20

644.2 Conducting compressive

test for bricks 3 5

4.3 Cutting bricks 1 5 4.4 Laying of stretcher bond 2 25

Engineering Drawing 41

Total Hours 176

X

Module 1

Performing brick/block, stone masonry and plastering work

Chapter 4


4.5 Laying English bond wall 1 60

1524.6 Laying header/Flemish

bond1 30

4.7 Setting the dumpy level 2 10

4.8 Preparing stabilized earth block

2 20

4.9 Laying stabilized earth block wall

1 25

Engineering Drawing 24Total Hours 176

XI Module 1


Chapter 4


4.10 Providing seismic bands 2 24

177

4.11 Laying confined/ load bearing masonry wall

2 59

4.12 Providing pointing 2 29.5


Page:70

Chapter 5

Performing stone masonry

5.1 Dressing stones manually 4 23

5.2 Dressing stone using a cutting machine

0.5 31


Total Hours 14.5 241.5 256

XII Module 1


Chapter 5

Performing stone masonry

5.3 Laying RRM wall 2 60

256

5.4 Laying DRM wall 1 225.5 Laying ashlar wall 2 70 5.6 Laying retaining wall 2 76 5.7 Repairing brick, block and stone masonry works

1 20

Total 8 248 256 hrs

Engineering drawing 143 hrs

Grand total 864 hrs

Page:71

Annexes

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR MASONRY


Chapter 1: Practicing Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) By the end of class IX, students should be able to:


1.2.1 Define 5S.



1.2.4 Define OHS.


1.2.6 Explain the rights for employee.




1.2.10 Ensure to refer OHS manual.

1.3 Use PPE

1.3.1 Define PPE.



1.3.4 Ensure good care of PPE.

1.3.5 Ensure to ware appropriate PPE.

1.3.6 Ensure not to defective and damaged PPE.

1.4 Maintain workplace and personal safety


1.4.2 List the different types of safety


1.4.4 State the importance of maintaining a workplace and personal safety.


1.4.6 Explain the Emergency exit.





Page:72








1.5.1 Explain tool and equipment safety.

1.5.2 State the importance of maintaining tool and equipment safety.

1.5.3 List the do’s and don’ts for tool and equipment safety.


1.5.5 Ensure to keep tools clean and dry, and store them properly after use.


1.5.7 Ensure to refer manual prior to operation of tools and equipment.




1.6.3 Explain the types of fires.

1.6.4 Explain the types of fire extinguishers.

1.6.5 State the methods of combating/extinguishing fires.



Chapter 2: Preparing for Masonry WorkBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

2.1 Select masonry tools, equipment and materials

2.1.1 State the types of tools and their uses.

2.1.2 State the types of materials and their uses.

2.1.3 State the types of equipment and their uses.

2.1.4 Describe the importance of selecting appropriate tools, material and equipment.

2.1.5 Explain the storage of materials.


Page:73

Annexes

2.2 Identify building components

2.2.1 List the different classification of buildings.

2.2.2 Label the parts of building components.

2.2.3 List the utilities and facilities provided in the building.



2.3.1 Define estimating and costing.

2.3.2 State the purposes of estimation.

2.3.3 Name the types of estimation.

2.3.4 Explain two stages of detailed estimate.

2.3.5 Define Bhutan Schedule of Rate and state its uses.

2.3.6 Describe unit measurement of work.

2.3.7 Explain the unit conversion of measurement.

2.3.8 Ensure to interpret drawing and tis specification.

2.3.9 Ensure to use correct format.

2.3.10 Ensure to use BSR as a reference.

Chapter 3: Preparing mortar mixBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

3.1 Conduct silt content test

3.1.1 Define sand.

3.1.2 List the types of sand.

3.1.3 State the purpose of testing.

3.1.4 Describe the effect of silt content in the sand.

3.1.5 State the reason for using salt solution.

3.1.6 Discuss the methods of reducing silt content.

3.1.7 Ensure to mix sand and water thoroughly.

3.1.8 Ensure proper handling of jar/glass/cylinder.

3.1.9 Ensure to add salt in solution.

3.2 Prepare the surface

3.2.1 Define mortar.

3.2.2 State the function of mortar.

3.2.3 List the uses of mortar.


Page:74

3.2. 4 State the types of mortar.

3.2.5 Identify the tools required for preparing the surface.

3.2.6 State the requirement of mixing platform.


3.2.8 Ensure platform is prepared on the level ground.

3.3 Mix mortar manually

3.3.1 State the different types of cement.

3.3.2 State the different types of mix ratio.

3.3.3 Explain the setting time of cement.

3.3.4 List the method of measuring the ingredients.

3.3.5 List the tools required for mixing.

3.3.6 Calculate the total quantity of mortar.


3.4 Mix mortar mechanically

3.4.1 Define mixture machine.

3.4.2 State the function of mixture machine.

3.4.3 Label the parts of the mixture machine.

3.4.4 Identify the types of mixture machine.

3.4.5 Operate mixture machine.

3.4.6 Ensure proper operation of mixture machine.


Chapter 4: Performing brick/blocks masonry workBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

4.1 Carry out foundation layout

4.1.1 Define foundation.

4.1.2 State the purpose of a foundation.

4.1.3 Name the different types of foundation.

4.1.4 State the requirement of the foundation.

4.1.5 Define layout and describe its purpose.

4.1.6 List the methods of layout.

4.1.7 Calculate using Pythagoras theorem to derive the 3,4,5 method.

4.1.8 State the terminologies used in a layout.

4.1.9 Explain the 3,4,5 method of foundation layout.

Page:75

Annexes

4.1.10 Use water level pipe.


4.1.12 Ensure proper handling of water level pipe.

4.2 Conduct compressive test for bricks

4.2.1 Define brick masonry.

4.2.2 State the types of brick.

4.2.3 Classify different classes of bricks.

4.2.4 Label the Parts of brick.

4.2.5 State the properties of brick.

4.2.6 State the importance of soaking the bricks.

4.2.7 Explain the different types of field test for brick.

4.2.8 State the purpose of compressive strength test.

4.2.9 Operate compressive testing machine.

4.2.10 Ensure proper handling of the machine.


4.2.12 Ensure to use 2 mm plywood.

4.3 Cut brick

4.3.1 List the types of bats/closure.

4.3.2 Explain the importance of soaking the brick before cutting.

4.3.3 Describe the methods of cutting the bricks.


4.3.5 Ensure proper handling of cutting tools.

4.4 Lay stretcher bond

4.4.1 List the types of brick bond.

4.4.2 Differentiate between the bonded and unbounded wall.

4.4.3 Describe the orientation of bricks.

4.4.4 Define stretcher bond.

4.4.5 State the application of stretcher bond.

4.4.6 Explain the technical terms for brick masonry.

4.4.7 Calculate the quantity of bricks.


4.4.9 Ensure proper handling of cutting tools.


Page:76


Chapter 4: Performing brick/blocks masonry workBy the end of class X, students should be able to:

4.5 Lay English bond

4.5.1 Define English bond.

4.5.2 State the advantage of English bond.

4.5.3 State the application of English bond.

4.5.4 Ensure proper handling of hand tools.


4.6 Lay header and Flemish bond

4.6.1 Define the header bond.

4.6.2 State the application of header bond.

4.6.3 Define Flemish bond.

4.6.4 State the application of Flemish bond.

4.6.5 Differentiate between English and Flemish bond wall.



4.6.8 Ensure to maintain cleanliness at workplace.

4.6.9 Ensure to use materials economically.

4.6.10 Ensure proper storage of surplus materials.

4.7 Set dumpy level

4.7.1 Define dumpy level.

4.7.2 Label the parts and state its function.

4.7.3 Define levelling staff.

4.7.4 State the precaution while using the dumpy level.

4.7.5 Ensure proper handling of dumpy level.

4.7.6 Ensure to record the reading.

4.8 Prepare stabilized earth block

4.8.1 Define block masonry.

4.8.2 List the types of blocks.

4.8.3 Define stabilized earth block.

4.8.4 List the different sizes of stabilized earth block.

Page:77

Annexes

4.8.5 State the advantages and disadvantages of stabilized earth block.

4.8.6 Explain the mix proportion.

4.8.7 Describe different field test for soil.

4.8.8 Ensure to use right amount of water.

4.8.9 Ensure to lubricate inside of the mould.


4.8.11 Ensure to remove blocks without damaging

4.9 Lay stabilized earth block wall

4.9.1 State the application of earth block.

4.9.2 Explain the grouting.

4.9.3 Explain the use reinforcement bar.

4.9.4 Explain the finishing work for block wall.

4.9.5 Ensure to grout the cores every after 1 m.



Chapter 4: Performing brick/blocks masonry workBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

4.10 Provide seismic bands

4.10.1 Define seismic band.

4.10.2 List the types of seismic band.

4.10.3 State the purpose of seismic bands.

4.10.4 State the advantages and disadvantages of bands.

4.10.5 Explain the use of reinforcement concrete bands.

4.10.6 Explain the use of wooden bands.

4.10.7 Define concerte

4.10.8 Define formwork

4.10.9 Define reinforcement bar

4.10.10 Ensure appropriate use hand gloves, helmet, apron and goggles.

4.10.11 Ensure the proper handling of tools.

4.10.12 Ensure cleanliness at a workplace.



Page:78

4.11 Lay confined/ load bearing masonry wall

4.11.1 Define confined masonry.

4.11.2 State the purpose of confined masonry.

4.11.3 Describe the structural components of a confined masonry building.

4.11.4 State the advantages and disadvantages of confined masonry.

4.11.5 Explain the standard practices for confined masonry construction

4.11.6 State the difference between confined mansory and RC frame structure

4.11.7 Ensure appropriate use gloves, helmet, apron and goggles.

4.11.8 Ensure the proper handling of tools.



4.11.11 Exhibit teamwork.


4.12 Provide pointing

4.12.1 Define pointing.

4.12.2 List the types of tools and materials.

4.12.3 State the types of pointing and their function.

4.12.4 State the advantages of pointing over plastering.

4.12.5 Define curing.

4.12.6 State the purpose of curing.

4.12.7 State the methods of curing.

4.12.8 Describe the duration of curing.

4.12.9 Explain the effects of poor curing.

4.12.10 Ensure proper use of pointing tools.

4.12.11 Ensure appropriate use gloves, apron and mask.

Chapter 5: Performing stone masonry work 5.1 Dress stones manually

5.1.1 Define stone masonry.

5.1.2 State the uses of stone masonry.

5.1.3 State the classification of rock.

5.1.4 Describe the types of stone used in building construction.

Page:79

Annexes

5.1.5 Describe the quality and selection of stone.

5.1.6 Explain the purpose of stone dressing.

5.1.7 List the tools used for stone dressing.

5.1.8 Ensure proper handling of dressing tools.


5.1.10 Ensure appropriate use gloves, apron, goggles and mask.

5.2 Dress stone using a cutting machine

5.2.1 Label the parts of the stone cutting machine.

5.2.2 State the importance of pouring water while using a cutting machine.

5.2.3 Compare between manual and mechanical dressing.

5.2.4 Operate cutting machine.

5.2.5 Ensure the proper handling of cutting machine.




Chapter 5: Performing stone masonry workBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

5.3 Lay Random Rubble Masonry (RRM) wall

5.3.1 State the technical terms used in stone masonry.

5.3.2 Describe the types of stone masonry.

5.3.3 Define RRM.

5.3.4 State the applications of RRM wall.

5.3.5 State the reasons for providing through stones.

5.3.6 Differentiate between RRM wall & brick wall.

5.3.7 Estimate materials for RRM wall.

5.3.8 Ensure proper care and handling of aligning tools.

5.3.9 Ensure cleanliness at the workplace.



5.3.12 Ensure appropriate use of gloves, apron, goggles and mask.


Page:80

5.4 Lay Dry Rubble Masonry (DRM) wall

5.4.1 Define DRM wall.

5.4.2 List the advantages and disadvantages of DRM wall.

5.4.3 Estimate material for DRM wall.

5.4.4 State the application of DRM wall.


5.4.6 Ensure cleanliness at the workplace.



5.4.9 Ensure appropriate use of gloves, apron, goggles and mask.

5.5 Lay Ashlar masonry wall

5.5.1 Define Ashlar masonry.

5.5.2 Describe the types of ashlar masonry.

5.5.3 Differentiate between RRM and Ashlar masonry.

5.5.4 State the application of Ashlar masonry.



5.6 Lay retaining wall

5.6.1 Define retaining.

5.6.2 Explain the types of retaining wall and their applications.

5.6.3 Explain the reason for providing weep holes.

5.6.4 Explain the importance for preparing a wooden profile.

5.6.5 Explain the importance of back fill in retaining wall.

5.6.6 Interpret the drawing and specifications of retaining wall.

5.6.7 Differentiate breast wall and retaining wall.

5.6.8 Ensure proper use of aligning tools.


5.7 Repair brick, block and stone masonry works

5.7.1 Explain the purpose of repairing.

5.7.2 Explain the common damage on structures.

5.7.3 Ensure proper use of repairing tools.


Page:81

Annexes


DRAWING LESSONS


Practical (hrs)

Total (hrs)

IXModule 1

Interpreting engineering

drawing

Chapter 1

Interpreting basic

engineering drawing

1.1 Using drawing instruments 3 35

40

1.2 Laying out drawing sheet 2 3 1.3 Interpreting Engineering Signs,

symbols and abbreviation 2 4


1.5 Draw letters and numbers 1 81.6 Provide dimensioning 1 6

Total 40hrs

X


drawing

Chapter 2



2.1 Drawing of Isometric blocks 6 1424

Total 24hrs

XIModule 1

Interpreting engineering

drawing

Chapter 2



2.1 Drawing Orthographic Projec-tion 2 33.5

792.2 Drawing a simple building plan 2 41.5

Total 79hrs

CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX


Chapter 1: Interpreting Basic Engineering DrawingBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:


1.1.1 Define Engineering Drawing.



1.1.4 List the sizes of drawing papers.




Page:82


1.2.1 Define the layout of a drawing sheet.


1.2.3 Layout drawing sheet.



1.2.6 Ensure that the sheet edges are not damaged while handling the drawing.




1.3.3 Draw engineering sign, symbol, and abbreviations.




1.4.1 Define line.


1.4.3 Ensure proper handling of drawing instrument.


1.5 Draw letters and numbers










1.6.1 Define dimensioning.




Page:83

Annexes




Chapter 2: Interpreting Isometric, orthographic and trade drawingBy the end of class X, students should be able to:




3.2.3 Ensure handling of set squares.

Chapter 2: Interpreting Isometric, orthographic and trade projectionsBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

2.2 Draw Orthographic projection


2.2.2 List the four quadrants.

2.2.3 Name the different ways of drawing orthographic projections.




2.3 Draw a simple building plan

2.3.1 Define building drawing.

2.3.2 List the types of building drawing.

2.3.3 Define the scale for drawing.


2.3.5 Develop creativity through their own simple drawing plan.




Page:84

Page:85

Annexes

ANNEX IV: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR ELECTRICAL

A. ELECTRICAL LESSONS

Class-IX

Class Modules covered Chapters Lessons Theory

(Hrs)Practical

(Hrs)

Totalduration

(Hrs)

Cla

ss IX

Module 1Applying Fundamental of Electricity

Chapter 1PracticingOccupational Health and Safety (OHS)

1.1 Applying principles of 5S and OHS practice.

1 2

18

1.2 Using Personal Protective 1.3 Equipment (PPE). 1 21.4 Maintaining workplace & personal

safety. 3 4

1.5 Maintaining tools & equipment safety.

1 2

1.6 Following the Electrical safety rules

2

Chapter 2Applying basic electrical theory

2.1 Testing conductor, semiconductor and insulator

9 4

102

2.2 Performing instrument reading 12 62.3 Verifying Faraday’s Law of

electromagnetic induction.6 6

2.4 Measuring resistance, voltage, current, power, frequency and energy.

35 24

Chapter 3

Verifying DC circuits

3.1 Determining the value of resistor using colour code chart.

3 4

48

3.2 Verifying Ohm’s law. 3 63.3 Verifying characteristics of series circuit.

2 4

3.4 Verifying characteristics of parallel circuit.

2 4

3.5 Verifying characteristics of series parallel combined circuit.

1 4

3.6 Verifying Kirchhoff ’s law. 3 63.7 Verifying characteristics of cells

connected in series and parallel.2 4

Chapter 4Verifying AC circuits

4.1 Verifying characteristics of AC and DC. 3 5 8

Total Hours 176


Page:86

Class-X


(Hrs)Practical

(Hrs)

Totalduration

(Hrs)

Cla

ss X

Module 1Applying Fundamentals of Electricity

Chapter 4Verifying AC circuits

4.2 Verifying characteristics of pure resistive circuit.

3 6

142

4.3 Verifying characteristics of pure inductive circuit.

3 6

4.4 Verifying characteristics of pure capacitive circuit.

3 6

4.5 Verifying characteristics of RL series circuit.

3 6

4.6 Verifying characteristics of RC series circuit.

2 6

4.7 Verifying characteristics of LC series circuit.

2 6

4.8 Verifying characteristics of RLC series circuit.

3 8

4.9 Verifying characteristics of RL parallel circuit.

3 8

4.10 Verifying characteristics of RC parallel circuit.

2 7

4.11 Verifying characteristics of LC parallel circuit.

2 7

4.12 Verifying characteristics of RLC parallel circuit.

3 9

4.13 Checking Phase sequence of 3 phase supply.

3 2

4.14 Verifying the characteristics of balanced and unbalanced load

4 12

4.15 Verifying the characteristics of balanced delta load connection

4 12

Chapter 5

Apply basic Electronics theory

5.1 Testing resistor, inductor, capacitor, diode, zener diode and transistor.

2 4

345.2 Verifying half wave rectifier. 2 55.3 Verifying full wave rectifier. 2 55.4 Verifying filter circuit. 2 55.5 Verifying characteristics of

voltage regulator circuit.2 5

Total Hours 176

Page:87

Annexes

Class- XI


(Hrs)Practical

(Hrs)

Totalduration

(Hrs)C

lass

XI

Module 1Applying Fundamentals of Electricity

Chapter 5

Apply basic Electronics theory

5.6 Verifying characteristics of transistor as a switch

3 4

56

5.7 Verifying characteristics of transistor as an amplifier

3 4

5.8 Verifying truth table for NOT gate.

3 4

5.9 Verifying truth table for AND gate.

3 3

5.10 truth table for OR gate. 2 35.11 Verifying truth table for NAND

gate.3 3

5.12 Verifying truth table for NOR gate.

2 3

5.13 Verifying truth table for XOR gate.

3 4

5.14 Verifying truth table for XNOR gate.

3 3

Chapter 6

Repair home appliances

6.1 Repairing water boiler. 1 7

72

6.2 Repairing curry cooker. 2 86.3 Repairing rice cooker. 2 86.4 Repairing electric iron. 1 76.5 Repairing electric heater. 2 86.6 Repairing geyser. 1 76.7 Repairing ceiling fan. 2 86.8 Repairing washing machine. 1 7

Chapter 7

Install solar PV system

7.1 Measuring PV panel output. 3 2

37

7.2 Measuring the output of PV panel under different weather conditions.

1 2

7.3 Measuring the output of PV panel under different inclinations.

1 2

7.4 Measuring the output of PV panel in different directions.

1 1

7.5 Verifying the characteristics of PV panel connected in series.

1 2

7.6 Verifying the characteristics of PV panel connected in parallel.

1 2

7.7 Installing solar battery. 2 37.8 Installing PV panel. 2 27.9 Installing controller. 2 37.10 Installing inverter. 2 2

Chapter 1Preparing

for Electrical

wiring

1.1 Selecting tools, materials and equipment. 14 6 91

1.2 Estimate materials.61 10

Total Hours 128 128 256


Page:88

Class-XII


(Hrs)Practical

(Hrs)

Totalduration

(Hrs)

Cla

ss X

II

Module IICarrying out Domestic and Commercial Building wiring

Chapter 1Preparing for Electrical wiring

1.3 Preparing layout. 4 15

401.4 Preparing wire joints. 9 12

Chapter 2Performing wiring

2.1 Laying conduit. 7 30

150

2.2 Performing wiring for light points (two/three lamps).

2 12

2.3 Performing Insulation Resistance test

4 8

2.4 Performing continuity/open circuit test

3 8

2.5 Performing polarity test. 3 82.6 Performing staircase wiring. 2 122.7 Performing godown wiring. 2 122.8 Performing call-bell wiring. 3 62.9 Performing hostel wiring. 2 102.10 Performing wiring

consisting of light and power points.

3 13

Chapter 3Install control board and switch gear.

3.1 Installing the main control board.

1 6

343.2 Installing energy meter. 1 33.3 Installing protective switch

gears.7 16



Grand Total 864

Page:89

Annexes

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR ELECTRICAL

B.1. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IXMODEL 1: APPLYING FUNDAMENTAL OF ELECTRICITY

Chapter 1: Practicing Occupational Health and Safety (OHS)

By the end of class IX, students should be able to:

1.1 Apply Principles of 5S

1.1.1 Define 5S.


1.1.3 Explain the principles of 5S.

1.1.4 Define OHS.


1.1.6 Explain the rights of employee.



1.1.9 Be responsible and vigilant while following OHS.

1.1.10 Ensure safe handling of materials and equipment.

1.2 Use Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

1.2.1 Define PPE.



1.2.4 Ensure safe handling of PPE.

1.3 Maintain workplace & personal safety








1.3.8 Ensure safe handling of equipment.

1.3.9 Ensure correct operation of fire extinguisher.

1.3.10 Ensure safe working environment.


Page:90

1.4 Maintain tools & equipment safety


1.4.2 State the importance of maintaining tools and equipment.

1.4.3 List Do’s and Don’ts of maintaining tools and equipment.

1.4.4 Be responsible and vigilant while maintaining tools and equipment.


1.5 Using fire extinguisher





1.5.5 State the methods of combating/extinguishing fires

1.5.6 Explain the types of fire extinguishers.

1.5.7 State the methods of combat/extinguisher fires.

1.5.8 Be responsible and vigilant while using fire extinguisher.

1.5.9 Ensure safe handling fire extinguisher.

Chapter 2: Applying basic electrical theoryBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

2.1 Test conductor, semiconductor and insulator

2.1.1 Define conductor, insulator and semiconductor.

2.1.2 Explain the properties of conductor, insulator and semiconductor.

2.1.3 Differentiate among conductors, insulators and semiconductors.

2.1.4 Use multimeter.

2.1.5 Be responsible and vigilant while following testing.

2.1.6 Ensure safe handling of instruments.

2.2 Perform instrument reading

2.2.1 List the types of measuring instruments.

2.2.2 State the functions of measuring instruments.

2.2.3 List signs & symbols of instruments.

2.2.4 Explain the errors in the instruments.

2.2.5 Be responsible and vigilant while performing instrument reading.

2.2.6 Ensure safe handling of instrument.

Page:91

Annexes

2.3 Verify Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction

2.3.1 List types of magnets.

2.3.2 State the properties of magnet.

2.3.3 State the properties of magnetic lines of force.

2.3.4 List factors affecting the strength of magnet.

2.3.5 Describe the basic concept of magnetism and electromagnetism.

2.3.6 State application of Fleming’s right hand rule.

2.3.7 State application of Fleming’s left hand rule.

2.3.8 Ensure safe handling of materials.

2.4 Measure resistance, voltage, current, power, frequency and energy

2.4.1 Define resistance, voltage, current, power, frequency and energy.

2.4.2 State the unit of electrical quantities.

2.4.3 Use measuring instruments.

2.4.4 Ensure safe handling of measuring instruments.

2.4.5 Ensure to select correct range of the meters.

Chapter 3: Verifying Dc circuitsBy the end of class IX, students should be able to

3.1 Determine the value of resistor using colour code chart

3.1.1 Define resistor.

3.1.2 List the types of resistors.

3.1.3 Explain the systems of colour coding band of resistor.

3.1.4 Explain the properties of resistor.

3.1.5 Be responsible and vigilant while determining the value of colour code chart.

3.1.6 Ensure to refer correct band of resistor color code.

3.2 Verify Ohm’s law

3.2.1 State Ohm’s law.

3.2.2 Explain relation among voltage, current and resistance.

3.2.3 State the application and limitations of Ohm’s law.

3.2.4 Use ammeter

3.2.5 Use voltmeter.

3.2.6 Ensure safe handling of meters.

3.2.7 Ensure to check the connection of meters.

3.2.8 Ensure to verify the circuit connection.


Page:92

3.3 Verify characteristics of series circuit

3.3.1 Define series circuit.

3.3.2 Explain the characteristics of series circuit.

3.3.3 Calculate the value of resistance and voltage in series circuit.

3.3.4 Use ammeter.


3.3.6 Ensure safe handling of meters.



3.4 Verify characteristics of parallel circuit

3.4.1 Define parallel circuit.

3.4.2 Explain the characteristics of parallel circuit.

3.4.3 Calculate the value of resistance and current in parallel circuit.

3.4.4 Use ammeter.





3.5 Verify characteristics of series parallel combined circuit

3.5.1 State the application of series and parallel circuit.

3.5.2 Differentiate between series and parallel circuit.

3.5.3 Use ammeter.





3.6 Verify Kirchhoff ’s law

3.6.1 State Kirchhoff ’s current and Kirchhoff ’s voltage law.

3.6.2 State the application of Kirchhoff ’s law.

3.6.3 Explain sign-convention in applying Kirchhoff ’s law.

3.6.4 Use ammeter and voltmeter.




Page:93

Annexes

3.7 Verify characteristics of cells connected in series and parallel

3.7.1 Define cell.

3.7.2 State the types of cells.

3.7.3 Differentiate between primary and secondary cell.

3.7.4 Explain cells connected in series and parallel.

3.7.5 Use ammeter.





Chapter 4: Verifying AC circuitsBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

4.1 Verify characteristics of AC and DC

4.1.1 Explain the generation of electricity.

4.1.2 Explain characteristics of AC and DC.

4.1.3 List the advantages of AC over DC.

4.1.4 State the application of Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO).

4.1.5 Explain the operation of CRO.

4.1.6 Use CRO.


4.1.8 Be responsible and vigilant while operating the CRO.


Chapter 4: Verifying AC circuitsBy the end of class X, students should be able to:

4.2 Verify characteristics of pure resistive circuit

4.2.1 Explain the characteristics of pure resistive circuit.

4.2.2 Draw vector/ phasor diagram of pure resistive circuit.

4.2.3 Use ammeter.


4.2.5 Use power factor meter.

4.2.6 Use wattmeter.


Page:94




4.3 Verify characteristics of pure inductive circuit

4.3.1 Define inductor and inductance.

4.3.2 State the unit and symbol of inductor.

4.3.3 Explain the characteristics of pure inductive circuit.

4.3.4 List the types of inductors.

4.3.5 State the application of inductors.

4.3.6 List the factors which affect the inductance of a coil.

4.3.7 Explain the phasor diagram of pure inductive circuit.

4.3.8 Use ammeter.







4.4 Verify characteristics of pure capacitive circuit

4.4.1 Define capacitor and capacitance.

4.4.2 Explain the characteristics of capacitive circuit.

4.4.3 State the unit and symbol of capacitor.

4.4.4 List the types of capacitors.

4.4.5 State the application of capacitor.

4.4.6 List the factors which determine the value of capacitance.

4.4.7 Identify series and parallel circuit of capacitance.

4.4.8 Draw vector/ phasor diagram of pure capacitive circuit.

4.4.9 Use ammeter.







Page:95

Annexes

4.5 Verify characteristics of RL series circuit

4.5.1 Define Resistance and Inductor (RL) series circuit.

4.5.2 State the purpose of RL series circuit.

4.5.3 Draw vector/phasor diagram of RL series circuit.

4.5.4 Explain vector/phasor diagram of RL series circuit.

4.5.5 Use ammeter.







4.6 Verify characteristics of RC series circuit

4.6.1 Define Resistance and Capacitance (RC) series circuit.

4.6.2 Explain vector/phasor diagram of RC series circuit.

4.6.3 Use ammeter.







4.7 Verify characteristics of LC series circuit

4.7.1 Define Inductance and capacitance (LC) series circuit.

4.7.2 State the application of LC series circuit.

4.7.3 Explain vector/phasor diagram of LC series circuit.

4.7.4 Use ammeter.







Page:96


4.8 Verify characteristics of RLC series circuit4.8.1 Define RLC series circuit.4.8.2 Explain vector/phasor diagram of RLC series circuit.4.8.3 State the application of RLC series circuit.4.8.4 Illustrate the waveform of RLC series circuit 4.8.5 Use ammeter. 4.8.6 Use voltmeter.4.8.7 Use power factor meter.4.8.8 Use wattmeter. 4.8.9 Ensure safe handling of instruments.4.8.10 Ensure to check the connection of meters.


4.9 Verify characteristics of RL parallel circuit

4.9.1 Define RL parallel circuit.

4.9.2 Explain vector/phasor diagram of RL parallel circuit.

4.9.3 Use ammeter.







4.10 Verify characteristics of RC parallel circuit

4.10.1 Define RC parallel circuit.

4.10.2 Explain vector/phasor diagram of RC parallel circuit.

4.10.3 Use ammeter.







Page:97

Annexes

4.11 Verify characteristics of LC parallel circuit

4.11.1 Define LC parallel circuit.

4.11.2 Explain vector/phasor diagram of LC parallel circuit.

4.11.3 Use ammeter.







4.12 Verify characteristics of RLC parallel circuit

4.12.1 Define RLC parallel circuit.

4.12.2 Explain vector/phasor diagram of RLC parallel circuit.

4.12.3 Use ammeter.







4.13 Check phase sequence of 3 phase supply

4.13.1 Define phase sequence.

4.13.2 List the advantages of poly phase over single phase.

4.13.3 State the purpose of checking phase sequence.

4.13.4 Ensure safe handling of instrument.

4.13.5 Ensure to check the connection of meter.


4.14 Verify the characteristics of balanced and unbalanced load in star connection

4.14.1 Define phase voltage, phase current, line voltage, line current, balanced load and unbalanced load.

4.14.2 Draw the connection diagram of star balanced and unbalanced load.



Page:98



4.15 Verify the characteristics of balanced delta load connection

4.15.1 State the application of delta connection.

4.15.2 Draw the connection diagram of delta connection.

4.15.3 Explain the difference between star and delta connection.




Chapter 5: Applying basic electronic theoryBy the end of class X, students should be able to:

5.1 Test resistor, inductor, capacitor, diode, zener-diode and transistor

5.1.1 Define electronics components (resistor, inductor, capacitor, diode, zener- diode and transistor).

5.1.2 State the charging and discharging of capacitor.

5.1.3 List the types and applications of diodes.

5.1.4 State the characteristics and application of zener diode.

5.1.5 Explain the transistor bias and symbols.

5.1.6 List the types of transistors and explain their characteristics.

5.1.7 Ensure to select the correct range of multimeter.

5.1.8 Ensure safe handling of electronics components.

5.1.9 Ensure safe disposal of malfunction electronic components.

5.2 Verify half wave rectifier

5.2.1 List the types of full wave rectifier.

5.2.2 State the functions of rectifier circuit.

5.2.3 List the advantages and disadvantages of half wave rectifier.

5.2.4 Explain the characteristics of half wave rectifier.

5.2.5 Explain the working principle of half wave rectifier.

5.2.6 Ensure safe handling of CRO.


5.3 Verify full wave rectifier

5.3.1 Explain the types of full wave rectifier.

Page:99

Annexes

5.3.2 Explain the working principle and characteristics of full wave rectifier.

5.3.3 Differentiate between full wave and half wave rectifier.

5.3.4 State the advantages and disadvantages of full wave rectifier.



5.4 Verify filter circuit

5.4.1 List the types of filter circuit.

5.4.2 State the characteristics and application of filter circuits.



5.5 Verify characteristics of voltage regulator circuit

5.5.1 List the types of voltage regulator.

5.5.2 State the advantages and disadvantages of linear voltage regulator.

5.5.3 Explain the construction and function of voltage regulator.

5.5.4 Ensure to select correct range of voltmeter.

5.5.5 Ensure safe handling of voltmeter and components.



Chapter 5: Applying basic electronic theoryBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

5.6 Verify characteristics of transistor as a switch

5.6.1 List the types of transistor.

5.6.2 Explain the characteristics and application of transistor as a switch.

5.6.3 Ensure safe handling of components.


5.7 Verify characteristics of transistor as an amplifier

5.7.1 Explain the application of transistor as an amplifier.

5.7.2 Use Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO).




Page:100

5.8 Verify truth table for NOT gate

5.8.1 Explain number system, logic gates and truth table.

5.8.2 Define Boolean algebra.

5.8.3 State application of NOT, AND, OR, NAND, NOR, XOR and XNOR gate.

5.8.4 Use logic gate trainer kit.

5.8.5 Ensure safe handling of trainer kits.


5.9 Verify truth table for AND gate

5.9.1 Draw logic symbol of AND gate.

5.9.2 Interpret truth table.




5.10 Verify truth table for OR gate

5.10.1 Draw logic symbol of OR gate.





5.11 Verify truth table for NAND gate

5.11.1 Draw logic symbol of NAND gate.





5.12 Verify truth table for NOR gate

5.12.1 Draw logic symbol of NOR gate.


5.12.3 Use logic gate trainer kit



Page:101

Annexes

5.13 Verify truth table for XOR gate

5.13.1 Draw logic symbol of XOR gate.





5.14 Verify truth table for XNOR gate

5.14.1 Draw logic symbol of XNOR gate.





Chapter 6: Repairing Home AppliancesBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

6.1 Repair water boiler:

6.1.1 List the types of water boiler.

6.1.2 Identify and state the function of each components of water boiler.

6.1.3 Explain the construction and working principle of water boiler.

6.1.4 Identify the fault of water boiler.


6.1.6 Ensure to store the removed parts safely.

6.1.7 Ensure to disconnect the wires properly.

6.1.8 Ensure secured connections of electrical wires.

6.2 Repair curry cooker

6.2.1 List the types of curry cooker.

6.2.2 Explain the construction and working principle of curry cooker.

6.2.3 Identify the fault of curry cooker.






Page:102

6.3 Repair rice cooker

6.3.1 List the types of rice cooker.

6.3.2 Identify and state the function of each components of rice cooker.

6.3.3 Explain the construction and working principle of rice cooker.

6.3.4 Identify the fault of rice cooker.





6.4 Repair electric iron

6.4.1 List types of electric iron.

6.4.2 Identify and state the function of each components of electric iron.

6.4.3 Explain the construction and working principle of electric iron.

6.4.4 Identify the fault of electric iron.





6.5 Repair electric heater

6.5.1 List the types of electric heater.

6.5.2 Identify and state the function of each components of electric heater.

6.5.3 Explain the construction and work principle of electric heater.





6.6 Repair geyser

6.6.1 List the types of geyser.

6.6.2 Identify and state the function of each components of geyser.

6.6.3 Explain the construction and working principle of geyser.

6.6.4 Identify the fault of geyser.



Page:103

Annexes



6.7 Repair ceiling fan

6.7.1 Identify and state the function of each components of ceiling fan.

6.7.2 Explain the construction and working principle of ceiling fan.

6.7.3 Identify the fault of ceiling fan.





6.8 Repair washing machine

6.8.1 List the types of washing machine.

6.8.2 Identify and state the function of each components of washing machine.

6.8.3 Explain the construction and working principle of washing machine.

6.8.4 Identify the fault of washing machine.





Chapter 7: Installing solar PV systemBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

7.1 Measure Photovoltaic (PV) panel output

7.1.1 Define Photovoltaic.

7.1.2 Explain the analogy of Solar and water system

7.1.3 List types of PV panel.

7.1.4 Explain the construction of PV panel.

7.1.5 Explain working principal of PV panel.

7.1.6 Explain the concept of solar radiation.

7.1.7 State the applications of PV panel.

7.1.8 Calculate the power rating of PV panel.

7.1.9 State the purpose of measuring Voc and ISC.

7.1.10 Explain the efficiency of panel output.



Page:104

7.1.12 Ensure safe handling of PV panels.

7.1.13 Ensure to select correct range of multimeter.

7.2 Measure the output of PV panel under different weather condition

7.2.1 List the methods of simulating artificial weather.

7.2.2 Explain factors affecting the output of PV panel.

7.2.3 State the purpose of measuring PV output under different weather conditions.




7.3 Measure the output of PV panel under different inclination

7.3.1 State the purpose of measuring PV output under different inclinations.

7.3.2 Use inclinometer.




7.4 Measure the output of PV panel at different direction

7.4.1 State the purpose of measuring PV output under different directions.

7.4.2 Use magnetic compass.




7.5 Verify the characteristics of PV panel connected in series

7.5.1 State the purpose of connect PV panels in series.




7.6 Verify the characteristics of PV panel connected in parallel

7.6.1 State the purpose of connect PV panels in parallel.




Page:105

Annexes

7.7 Install solar battery

7.7.1 Define solar battery.

7.7.2 List types of battery.

7.7.3 Explain the constructional parts of battery.

7.7.4 Explain the working principle of battery.

7.7.5 Explain the capacity of battery.

7.7.6 Explain the stages of battery charging.

7.7.7 Explain the methods of interconnecting batteries.

7.7.8 Calculate the size of battery required for SHS.

7.7.9 List the factors affecting solar battery.

7.7.10 Determine battery state of charge.

7.7. 11 List the rules for maintaining battery.

7.7.12 Explain the maintenance of solar battery.

7.7.13 Test solar battery.

7.7.14 Use hydrometer.


7.7.16 Ensure safe handling of solar battery.


7.8 Install PV panel

7.8.1 List types of PV panel mounts.

7.8.2 List panel mounting rules.

7.8.3 Calculate the size of PV panel.





7.9 Install controller

7.9.1 List types of controller.

7.9.2 Explain the characteristics of controller.

7.9.3 List advantages and disadvantages of controller.

7.9.4 Explain causes of controller failure.

7.9.5 Ensure safe handling of controller.



Page:106

7.9.7 Ensure safe handling of controller.


7.10 Install inverter

7.10.1 State the purpose of inverter.

7.10.2 List types of inverter.

7.10.3 Explain the causes of inverter failure.

7.10.4 Calculate the size of inverter.


7.10.6 Ensure safe handling of inverter panels.


Chapter 1: Preparing for electrical wiringBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

1.1 Select tools, materials and equipment

1.1.1 List type of tools used for electrical work.

1.1.2 Identify materials used for electrical work.

1.1.3 Identify equipment used for electrical work.

1.1.4 List specifications for tools, equipment and materials.

1.1.5 Ensure safe handling of tools, materials and equipment.

1.1.6 Ensure safe storage of tools, materials and equipment.


1.2.1 Explain the purpose of estimation and costing.

1.2.2 Calculate the cost estimate for electrical work.

1.2.3 Refer Bhutan Schedule of Rate (BSR).

1.2.4 Prepare the bill of quantity (BOQ).


1.2.6 Ensure to refer BSR.

Page:107

Annexes


Chapter 1: Preparing for electrical wiringBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

1.3 Prepare layout

1.3.1 Interpret electrical drawing.

1.3.2 Ensure to draw the layout as per the given single line diagram.

1.4 Prepare wire joints

1.4.1 List types of wire joints.

1.4.2 State the application of wire joints.


1.4.4 Ensure to use appropriate tools for removing insulation of wire.

Chapter 2: Performing wiringBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

2.1 Lay Conduit

2.1.1 Explain types of conduits.

2.1.2 Explain different types of wiring system.

2.1.3 State the advantages and disadvantages of surface and concealed wiring.

2.1.4 Use hacksaw.

2.1.5 Collaborate and work in team.


2.1.7 Ensure to cut PVC/MS conduit/casing capping as per the measurement.


2.2 Perform wiring for light points (two/three lamps)

2.2.1 List types fittings.

2.2.2 Explain wiring diagram

2.2.3 Pre-test fittings and fixtures.



2.2.6 Ensure to use appropriate tool for removing insulation of wire.



Page:108

2.3 Perform Insulation Resistance (IR) test

2.3.1 State the purpose of IR test.

2.3.2 Use megger.


2.3.4 Ensure safe handling of megger.


2.4 Perform continuity/open circuit test

2.4.1 State the purpose of continuity/open circuit test.

2.4.2 Use megger.




2.5 Perform polarity test

2.5.1 State the purpose of polarity test.

2.5.2 Use megger.




2.6 Perform staircase wiring

2.6.1 Explain the purpose of staircase wiring.

2.6.2 Explain wiring diagram


2.6.4 Collaborate and work in team




2.7 Perform godown wiring

2.7.1 Explain the function of godown wiring.

2.7.2 Explain wiring diagram.



Page:109

Annexes




2.8 Perform callbell wiring

2.8.1 Explain the working principle of callbell wiring

2.8.2 State the application of callbell wiring

2.8.3 Expalin wiring diagram.






2.9 Perform hostel wiring

2.9.1 Explain the purpose of hostel wiring.





2.9.6 Ensure to use appropriate tool for removing insulation of wiring.


2.10 Perform wiring consisting of light and power points








Page:110

Chapter 3: Installing control board and switch gearsBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

3.1 Install the main control board:

3.1.1 Define control board.

3.1.2 State the function of control board.

3.1.3 Explain the specification of control board.

3.1.4 State the purpose of installing control board.


3.1.6 Ensure safe handling of control board.


3.2 Install energy meter

3.2.1 Define energy meter.

3.2.2 Explain the work principle of energy meter.

3.2.3 State the purpose of installing energy meter.


3.2.5 Ensure safe handling of energy meter.


3.3 Install protective Switchgears

3.3.1 Define protective switchgears.

3.3.2 State the function of protective switchgears.


3.3.5 Ensure safe handling of protective switchgears.


Page:111

Annexes


DRAWING LESSONS

Class Topics/Chapter LessonsTheory

(Hrs)

Practical

(Hrs)

Total

Duration (Hrs)

XII

Chapter 1

Basic Engineering Drawing

1.11 Using of drawing instruments 2 1

14

1.12 Laying out of drawing sheet 1 2

1.13 Interpreting Engineering sign, symbols and abbreviation

1 1

1.14 Drawing different types of lines 1 11.15 Lettering and numbering 1 1

1.16 Dimensioning 1 1

Chapter 2

Interpreting Basic Engineering

Drawing

2.4 Converting scale for drawing 1 2

18

2.5 Drawing isometric blocks 2 4 2.6 Drawing orthographic view 2 7


LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII

Chapter: 1 Basic Engineering DrawingBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:




1.2.3 List the types of drawing instruments.

1.2.4 State uses of drawing instruments.

1.2.5 List types and sizes of drawing papers.



1.3 Lay out of drawing sheet

1.3.1 Define layout.

1.3.2 List terminology for layouts.


1.3.4 Explain the purpose of title block.

1.3.5 Use drawing sheet.


Page:112

1.3.6 Be responsible and vigilant while using drawing sheets.

1.4 Interpret Engineering signs, symbols and abbreviation


1.4.2 Explain importance of sign and symbols.

1.4.3 Identify types of sign and symbols.


1.4.5 Describe the purpose of abbreviation.

1.4.6 Identify abbreviation.




1.5.1 Define line.

1.5.2 State the uses of different lines.

1.5.3 Identify types of lines.



1.6 Letter and numbering



1.6.3 Describe the requirement for lettering.



1.7 Dimension





Chapter: 2 Interpreting Basic Engineering DrawingBy the end of class XII students should be able to:

Page:113

Annexes

2.4 Convert Scale for drawing

2.4.1 Define scale of drawing.

2.4.2 List types of scale.






2.5.3 Use drawing instruments.



2.6 Draw orthographic projection


2.6.2 List the four quadrant.

2.6.3 State types of orthographic projections.


2.6.5 Use drawing instruments




Page:114

Page:115

Annexes

ANNEX V: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR WELDING

A. WELDING LESSONS

Class Modules Chapters Lessons Theory (hrs)

Practical (hrs)

Total (Hrs)

CLA

SS I

X Module 1 Performing arc welding

Chapter 1

Apply Occupational health and safety (OHS) and personal protective equipment(PPE)

1.1 Apply principle of 5S 3 4

18

1.2 Use Personal Protective equipment (PPE)

1 0


1 2


4 3

Chapter 2

Set up arc welding

2.1 Perform the basic electrical connection

2 4

302.2 Set up arc welding 2 10 2.3 Test operation of welding machine 2 10

Chapter 3

Carry out arc welding

3.1 Prepare base metal 4 20

853.2 Align the workpiece 1 5

3.3 Maintain arc length 4 23

3.4 Maintain electrode angle 4 24


Total Hours 176

CLA

SS X

Module 1 Performing arc welding

Chapter 3


3.5 Perform metal surface build up 2 30

1193.6 Perform tack weld 1 53.7 Weld butt joint in all Positions 2 393.8 Weld lap joint in all Positions 1 39

Engineering Drawing 57Total Hours 176

CLA

SS-X

I

Module 1 Performing arc welding Chapter 3


3.9 Weld Tee joint in over head position

8.5 33

198 3.10 Weld corner joint in flat position 8.5 33

3.11 Weld flange joint in horizontal position

8.5 33

3.12 Perform pipe welding in vertical position

9.5 40

3.13 Perform liquid penetrant test 5 19

Engineering Drawing 8 50 58Total Hours 48 208 256


Page:116

CLA

SS-X

II

Module 2

Carrying out Oxyacetyline process

Chapter 1

Perform oxyacetyline welding

1.1 Perform setup for oxyacetyline welding

8 24

167

1.2 Perform straight line bead without filler rod

4 14

1.3 Perform straight line bead with filler rod

4 24

1.4 Perform fillet weld joint in flat position (1F)

4 14

1.5 Perform butt joint in flat position (1G)

4 14

1.6 Perform fillet joint in horizontal position (2F)

4 14

1.7 Perform butt joint in horizontal position (2G)

4 14

1.8 Perform fillet joint in vertical position (3F)

3 14

Chapter 2

Perform oxyacetyline cutting

2.1 Setup oxyacetyline cutting equipment

8 1462

2.2 Perform striaght cutting 2 122.3 Perform angle cutting 1 122.4 Perform profile cutting 1 12

Chapter 3

Perform post work for oxyacetyline process

3.1 Perform visual inspection of finished work piece

1 5

273.2 Maintain oxyacetyline equipment 1 63.3 Perform basic estimation and costing

4 10

Total 53 203 256Total Hours 864

Page:117

Annexes

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR WELDING


Chapter1. Practicing Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) By the end of class IX, students should be able to:

1.1 Apply Principles of 5S

1.1.1 Define 5s.


1.1.3 Explain the principles of 5s

1.1.4 Define OHS.


1.1.6 Explain the rights of the employee.


1.1.8 Explain the safety rules.



1.2.1 Define PPE.





1.2.6 Ensure not to use defective and damaged PPE

1.3 Maintaining workplace and personal safety












Page:118







1.4.1 Explain tools and equipment safety


1.4.3 List the do’s and don’ts of tools and equipment.

1.4.4 Ensure all the tools are in workable condition.






1.5.2 Label the parts of a fire extinguisher.

1.5.3 Explain types/classes of fire.

1.5.4 List the types of fire extinguishers.

1.5.5 State the methods of combating/extinguishing fires.



Chapter 2: Setup arc weldingBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

2.1 Perform the basic electrical connection

2.1.1 Define voltage, current, resistance, and their unit.

2.1.2 Identify the conductor, insulator and parallel circuits.

2.1.3 Explain the differences between AC & DC current.

2.1.4 Explain the electrical phases.

2.1.5 Explain the capacity and functions of MCB.

2.1.6 Use tester.

2.1.7 Ensure proper handling of tools, equipment, and material.

Page:119

Annexes

2.1.8 Ensure the main supply switch is off while performing electrical connection.

2.1.9 Ensure the electrical connection is free from water.

2.2 Set up the arc welding machine

2.2.1 Define Arc welding.

2.2.2 Describe the arc welding machine.

2.2.3 List different types of welding machine.

2.2.4 Explain arc welding accessories and their function.

2.2.5 Explain the working principle of the welding machine.

2.2.6 State the current carrying capacity of welding machine.

2.2.7 Use spanner/wrench.


2.2.9 Ensure main supply switch and the machine are properly earthed.

2.2.10 Ensure to safeguard against work hazards.

2.3 Test operation of welding machine

2.3.1 Define electrical terms.

2.3.2 Explain all safety measures associated with the test operation of the welding machine.


2.3.5 Ensure the electrode holder does not contact with earth cable when the machine is in ON mode.

Chapter 3: Carry out arc weldingBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

3.1 Prepare base metal

3.1.1 Explain basic metallurgy.

3.1.2 Explain the types of edge preparation and its purposes.

3.1.3 State the types of file, their functions and classification.

3.1.4 Identify the types of a hacksaw and their functions.

3.1.5 Describe high-speed cutter.

3.1.6 Describe angle grinder.

3.1.7 Use hacksaw.

3.1.8 Use high-speed cutter.

3.1.9 Use file.

3.1.10 Use angle grinder.


Page:120

3.1.11 Ensure safe handling of tools, materials, and equipment.

3.1.12 Ensure proper disposal of waste material.


3.2 Align the workpiece

3.2.1 Demonstrate the technique to align base metal.

3.2.2 Explain the distortion preventive measures.

3.2.3 Use jigs and fixture.

3.2.4 Ensure proper use of jigs and fixture.

3.2.5 Ensure proper alignment of work piece.

3.3 Maintain arc length

3.3.1 Explain the striking of an arc.

3.3.2 Explain the types of striking method.

3.3.3 Define arc length.

3.3.4 Explain different types of arc length and its effect.

3.3.5 Explain the current setting and its importance.

3.3.6 Ensure to maintain the correct arc length.

3.3.7 Ensure proper handling of electrode and electrode holder.

3.3.8 Ensure to maintain exhaust system in the workshop.


3.4 Maintain electrode angle

3.4.1 Explain electrode angle and its importance.

3.4.2 State the types and coding of the electrode.

3.4.3 Identify welding symbols and its application.

3.4.4 Ensure efficient use of electrodes.



Page:121

Annexes


Chapter 3: Carry out arc weldingBy the end of class X, students should be able to:

3.5 Perform metal surface build up

3.5.1 Identify types of welding beads.

3.5.2 State the application and purpose of surface build up.

3.5.3 Explain types of welding defects and its remedial action.

3.5.4 Demonstrate metal surface build-up technique.

3.5.5 Maintain straight line welding beads.


3.5.7 Ensure proper handling of arc welding machine.


3.6 Perform tack weld

3.6.1 Define tack weld.

3.6.2 Explain the tack welding and its importance.

3.6.3 List the types of the welding process.



3.7 Weld butt joint in all positions

3.7.1 Define weld joint.

3.7.2 State the different types of welding joints.

3.7.3 State the different types of welding position.

3.7.4 State the purpose of the keyhole.

3.7.5 Describe butt joint.

3.7.6 State the application of butt joint in all positions.



3.8 Weld lap joint in all positions

3.8.1 Describe lap joint.

3.8.2 Explain the application of lap joint in all positions.




Page:122


Chapter 3: Carry out arc weldingBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

3.9 Weld T-joint in all positions

3.9.1 Explain different metal joining methods.

3.9.2 Describe T-Joint.

3.9.3 Explain the types of weld.

3.9.4 Describe the nomeclature of fillet weld.

3.9.5 Describe the nomeclature groove weld.

3.9.6 Describe the types of weld pass.

3.9.7 Explain the application of T-joint .



3.10 Weld corner joint in flat position

3.10.1 Describe corner joint.

3.10.2 State the purpose of root gap.

3.10.3 Describe the application of corner joint.

3.10.4 State the difference between back welding and backing weld.



3.11 Weld flange joint in horizontal position

3.11.1 Describe flange joint

3.11.2 Describe mode of metal tranfer.

3.11.3 Describe the application of flange joint.



3.12 Perform pipe welding in vertical position

3.12.1 Describe the pipe joint.

3.12.2 Explain the pipe welding positions (1G/2G/5G/6GR).

3.12.3 State the advantages and disadvantages of pipe welding.

3.12.4 Explain the types of pipe joints.



Page:123

Annexes

Demonstrate pipe welding development techinique.

3.13 Perform liquid penetrant test

3.13.1 Explain the importance of surface cleaning

3.13.2 Describe the technique of surface cleaning

3.13.3 State the types of penetrant test

3.13.4 Define liquid penetrant test

3.13.5 Describe the purpose of liquid penetrant test

3.13.6 Describe the set of liquid penetrant kits

3.13.7 Explain the principle of liquid penetrant test

3.13.8 Describe the types of indication

3.13.9 Ensure to avoid DPT when job piece is in hot condition.


Module 2: Carryout Oxy-Acetylene processes Chapter 1 Perform oxy-acetylene weldingBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

1.1 Perform setup for oxy-acetylene welding

1.1.1 Introduce oxy-acetylene welding

1.1.2 Explain the working principle of oxy-acetylene welding

1.1.3 Explain the tools used in oxy-acetylene welding and their functions

1.1.4 Describe the features of oxygen and acetylene cylinder

1.1.5 State the Dos and Don’ts of gas cylinders handling

1.1.6 State the types of gas

1.1.7 Explain the types of welding position

1.1.8 Explain the welding techniques

1.1.9 Describe the importance of maintaining blowpipe angle

1.1.10 Explain the characteristics of hose

1.1.11 Describe the selection of nozzle

1.1.12 Perform flame setting for oxyacetylene welding


1.2 Performing straight line bead without filler rod

1.2.1 State the types of base metal

1.2.2 Describe types of flame and its characteristics


Page:124

1.2.3 Describe application of flames

1.2.4 State the function of flash back arrestor (FBA)

1.2.5 State the indication, causes and remedies of back fire and flash back

1.2.6 Describe importance of cracking gas cylinders

1.2.7 Describe application of straight-line bead without filler rod

1.2.8 State the types of regulator

1.2.9 Describe function of regulator

1.2.10 Explain working principle of regulator

1.2.11 Describe the construction of blow pipe

1.2.12 State the types of blowpipe and their functions

1.2.13 Explain the importance of cleaning nozzle tip

1.2.14 Explain marking tool and its purpose

1.2.15 State the selection of parameters for oxyacetylene welding

1.2.16 Operating guillotine machine

1.2.17 Operating portable shear

1.3 Performing straight line bead with filler rod

1.3.1 Purpose of filler rod

1.3.2 Feeding technique of filler rod

1.3.3 Purpose of flux

1.3.4 Types of clamping devices

1.3.5 Distortion and its control

1.3.6 Describe the application of straight-line bead with filler rod

1.3.7 Ensure appropriate use PPE

1.4 Welding fillet joint in flat position (1F)

1.4.1 Describe 1F

1.4.2 Describe the application of welding fillet joint in flat position


1.5 Welding butt joint in flat position (1G)

1.5.1 Describe 1G

1.5.2 Describe the application of welding butt joint in flat position


Page:125

Annexes

1.6 Welding fillet joint in horizontal position (2F)

1.6.1 Describe 2F

1.6.2 Describe the application of welding fillet joint in horizontal position


1.7 Welding butt joint in horizontal position (2G)

1.7.1 Describe 2G

1.7.2 Describe the application of welding butt joint in horizontal position


1.8 Welding fillet joint in vertical position (3F)

1.8.1 Describe 3F

1.8.2 Describe the application of welding fillet joint in vertical position

1.8.3 State the difference between SMAW and oxy-acetylene welding

1.8.4 State the advantages and limitations of Oxy-acetylene welding


Chapter 2 Perform oxy-acetylene cutting2.1 Setting up oxy-acetylene cutting equipment

2.1.1 Introduce oxy-acetylene cutting process

2.1.2 Explain the working principle of oxy-acetylene cutting and its application

2.1.3 Describe the construction of cutting blowpipe

2.1.4 State the difference between oxy-acetylene cutting blow pipe and welding blowpipe

2.1.5 Explain cutting tolerance and its importance

2.1.6 State the types of cutting nozzle

2.1.7 Describe selection of cutting nozzle

2.1.8 Describe the importance of gas pressure setting

2.1.9 State advantages and limitation of oxy-acetylene cutting process

2.1.10 State the comparison between oxy-acetylene cutting and shielded metal arc cutting

2.1.11 Perform flame setting for oxy-acetylene cutting


2.2 Performing straight cutting

2.2.1 Explain cutting techniques

2.2.2 Describe the application of straight cutting

2.2.3 State gas cutting defects and its remedies

2.2.4 Explain the importance of maintaining gap between tip of cone and work piece


Page:126


2.3 Performing angle cutting

2.3.1 State method of piercing a hole

2.3.2 Describe the application of angle cutting


2.4 Performing profile cutting

2.4.1 Describe the types of cutting in profile

2.4.2 Explain the importance of templates

2.4.3 State the methods of profile cutting


Chapter 3 Perform post work for oxy-acetylene processes3.1 Performing visual inspection work piece

3.1.1 Explain importance of visual inspection

3.1.2 Describe importance of proper lighting while welding

3.1.3 Using weld gauge


3.2 Maintaining oxy-acetylene equipment

3.2.1 Explain importance of maintenance

3.2.2 Explain preventive maintenance of oxy-acetylene equipment


3.3 Estimating the materials

3.3.1 Describe estimation and costing

3.3.2 Estimate the weight of materials

3.3.3 Estimate the cost of product

3.3.4 Estimate the cost of oxyacetylene process


Page:127

Annexes


DRAWING LESSONS

Class Module Chapter Lessons Theory (hrs)

Practical (hrs)

Total (Hrs)

IX Module 1


Drawing

Chapter 1

Draw basic signs, symbols, and dimension

1.17 Using drawing instrument 3 4

43

1.18 Laying out drawing sheet 3 4

1.19 Interpreting engineering sign, symbols, and abbreviation

3 5

1.20 Drawing different types of lines

3 10

1.21 Drawing Letters and numbers 2 2 1.22 Providing Dimensions 2 2

X

Module 1


Drawing

Chapter: 2

Drawing isometric and

mechanical parts

2.9 Converting drawing scales 2 5

57

2.10 Drawing isometric block 2 30

2.11 Interpreting simple mechanical drawing

3 14

XI

Module 1


Drawing

Chapter :3

Interpreting Technical drawing

3.1 Drawing isometric views for different joint

2 15

58 3.2 Drawing orthographic Projections

4 15

3.3 Drawing mechanical machine parts

2 20

Total Hours 158

LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IXMODULE: INTERPRETING ENGINEERING DRAWING

Chapter: 1 Draw basic signs, symbols and dimensionBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:





1.8.4 State uses of drawing instruments.

1.8.5 List types and sizes of drawing papers.




Page:128


1.9.1 Define layout.

1.9.2 List terminology used for layouts.


1.9.4 Explain the purpose of the title block.




1.10.1 Define sign and symbol

1.10.2 Draw civil signs and symbols

1.10.3 Define abbreviation

1.10.4 List the abbreviation used in dimensioning

1.10.5 List the abbreviation used in drawing

1.10.6 List the abbreviation used for the units of length




1.11.1 Define line.

1.11.2 State types of line and its applications.



1.12 Draw Letters and numbers


1.12.2 Classify letters style.



1.12.5 List the size of letters.




1.13 Provide dimensions


Page:129

Annexes






LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XChapter: 2.Drawing isometric and mechanical partsBy the end of class X students should be able to:

2.8 Convert drawing scale

2.8.1 Define the scale of the drawing.

2.8.2 List types of scale.








2.10 Interpret simple mechanical drawing

2.10.1 Define mechanical drawing.

2.10.2 List types of mechanical drawing.

2.10.3 Explain plan, elevation, and section.



LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XIChapter: 3 Interpreting Technical drawingBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

3.1 Draw isometric views for different joint

3.1.1 Describe sectional views.

3.1.2 Describe auxiliary views.




Page:130

3.2 Draw orthographic projection


3.2.2 List the four quadrant.

3.2.3 State types of orthographic projections.




3.3 Draw mechanical machine parts

3.3.1 Development of surfaces.



Page:131

Annexes

ANNEX VI: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR AUTOMOBILE

A. AUTOMOBILE LESSONS

Class Modules Chapter LessonsTheory

(hrs)Practical

(hrs)Total (hrs)

IX

Module I

Servicing Suspension System

Chapter 1


1.1 Applying Principle’s of 5s 1 0

37

1.2 Applying OHS Practices 1 01.3 Using of Personal Protective

Equipment (PPE) 1 1

1.4 Maintaining work place and personal safety 1 0

1.5 Maintaining tools and equipment safety 1 1

1.6 Using fire extinguisher 1 21.7 Using hack saw 1 6

1.8 Performing filing 1 6

1.9 Performing drilling 1 1

1.10 Performing grinding 1 1

1.11 Performing basic arc welding 1 6Chapter 2

Replacing faulty rigid suspension components

2.1 Replacing shock absorber 3 3

43

2.2 Replacing leaf spring assembly 1 18

2.3 Disassembling leaf spring assembly 1 62.4 Assembling leaf spring assembly 0.5 6

2.5 Changing leaf spring bush 0.5 4Chapter 3

Replacing faulty independent suspension components

3.1 Replacing strut assembly 0.5 6

48

3.2 Disassembling strut and coil spring 0 3

3.3 Assembling strut and coil spring 0 33.4 Replacing coil spring 0.5 5.5

3.5 Replacing strut bar 0.5 3

3.6 Replacing suspension arm 1 9

3.7 Replacing torsion bar 0.5 5.53.8 Replacing lateral control rod 0.5 3.5

3.9 Replacing stabilizer bar 0.5 5.5Chapter 4

Diagnosing suspension system failures

4.1 Performing visual inspection of suspension failure 1 1

84.2 Performing bounce test 1 2

4.3 Performing Test Drive 1 2


Total Hours 176


Page:132

X

Module II

Servicing Brake System

Chapter 1

Overhauling brake system

1.1 Checking operation of brake booster 0.5 1

61

1.2 Changing brake booster 1 51.3 Replacing master cylinder kit 1 5

1.4 Changing brake shoes 0.5 5.5

1.5 Replacing wheel cylinder kits 1 41.6 Changing brake caliper assembly 1 31.7 Change brake pipeline 0.5 5.51.8 Changing brake disc/rotor 0.5 5.5

1.9 Changing brake fluid 1 51.10 Changing anti-lock brake system

speed sensor 2 2

1.11 Changing parking brake cable 0.5 5.5

Chapter 2

Adjusting brake system

2.1 Adjusting brake pedal free play 0.5 3

92.2 Adjusting drum brake 0 2

2.3 Adjusting parking brake 0 1.5

2.4 Performing Test Drive 1 1Module

III

Servicing steering system

Chapter 1 Servicing steering components

1.1 Replacing steering wheel 0.5 3

66

1.2 Replacing steering Shaft0.5 5.5

1.3 Replacing tie rod end 0.5 4

1.4 Replacing rack& pinion assembly 2 16

1.5 Replacing pitman arm 0 2

1.6 Replacing re-circulating ball type steering gear box 1 5

1.7 Overhauling re-circulating type steering gear box 0 9

1.8 Adjusting steering gear back lash 0.5 3

1.9 Replacing integral power steering gear box 2 6


Total Hours 176

Page:133

Annexes

XI

Module III

Servicing Steering System

Chapter 1

Servicing steering components

1.10 Replacing rack & pinion power steering gear box 2 9

27.5

1.11 Replacing power steering belt 1.5 2

1.12 Changing power steering fluid 0.5 2

1.13 Purging hydraulic power steering 0.5 1

1.14 Replacing power steering pump 2 5

1.15 Troubleshooting steering system 1 1Chapter 2

Servicing kingpin

2.1 Removing kingpin assembly 2 7

262.2 Refitting kingpin assembly 2 72.3 Performing kingpin greasing 1 32.4 Replacing steering knuckle 1 3

Chapter 3

Performing Wheel alignment

3.1 Performing pre-alignment 2 2

18

3.2 Adjusting Toe-Angle 1 1

3.3 Adjusting camber 1 5

3.4 Adjusting caster angle 1 5Chapter 4

Carrying out Wheel balancing

4.1 Performing inspection on tire wear 2 2

154.2 Performing static test drive 0.5 2

4.3 Performing dynamic test drive 0.5 2

4.4 Performing wheel balancing 1 5

Module IV

Servicing Engine Auxiliary System

Chapter 1

Servicing cooling System

1.1 Changing Coolant 1.5 3

34

1.2 Changing thermostat valve 0.5 4

1.3 Checking leakages 0.5 21.4 Changing Radiator Assembly 1 51.5 Changing fan belt 0.5 2

1.6 Changing Water Pump Assembly 1 11.5

1.7 Troubleshooting cooling system 0.5 1Chapter 2

Servicing Lubrication system

2.1 Changing Engine oil 2 4

92.2 Changing oil pressure switch 0.5 1

2.3 Troubleshooting lubrication system 0.5 1

Chapter 3

Servicing Petrol fuel system

3.1 Changing fuel filter 2 3

35.5

3.2 Changing accelerator cable 0.5 43.3 Changing fuel rail (fuel delivery

pipe) and injector 2 10

3.4 Changing positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve 0.5 2

3.5 Servicing fuel tank 0.5 9

3.6 Troubleshooting petrol fuel system 1 1


Page:134

Chapter 4

Servicing Diesel fuel system

4.1 Changing fuel filter 2 4

51

4.2 Changing feed pump 1.5 44.3 Bleeding fuel system 0.5 24.4 Setting fuel injection timing (in-line type) 2 12

4.5 Servicing fuel injector 1 5

4.6 Setting fuel injection timing (Distributor type) 2 12

4.7 Troubleshooting diesel fuel system 1 2Engineering Drawing 6 34 40


XII

Module V Overhauling drive train

Chapter 1 Servicing propeller shaft components

1.1 Changing propeller shaft 2.5 4

19.51.2 Checking propeller shaft run out 0.5 21.3 Changing cross bearing 0.5 5

1.4 Changing center bearing 0.5 3

1.5 Troubleshooting propeller shaft 1 0.5Chapter 2

Servicing wheel bearing and axle shaft components

2.1 Overhauling wheel hub assembly 1 11

23.52.3 Replacing drive or axle shaft 1 4

2.4 Changing CV joint 0.5 5

2.5 Troubleshooting wheel hub 0.5 0.5

Chapter 3

Servicing final drive and differential components

3.1 Changing differential oil 0.5 3

40.5

3.2 Replacing differential assembly 2 123.3 Disassembling differential assembly 2.5 8

3.4 Assembling differential assembly 2 83.5 Troubleshooting final drive and differential components 0.5 2

Chapter 4.

Servicing transmission components

4.1 Changing transmission fluid 0.5 2

116.5

4.2 Replacing transmission 2 124.3 Disassembling transmission components 3 12

4.4 Inspecting transmission components 1 5

4.5 Assembling manual transmission 1.5 2

4.6 Overhauling transfer case 2 17

4.7 Replacing transaxle 1 17

4.8 Disassembling transaxle 1 17

4.9 Assembling transaxle 0.5 18

4.10 Troubleshooting transmission components 1 1

Page:135

Annexes

Chapter 5.

Overhauling and service clutch mechanism

5.1 Replacing clutch assembly 2 9

40.5

5.2 Inspecting clutch components 3 65.3 Changing clutch fluid 0.5 45.4 Replacing clutch master cylinder 2 65.6 Replacing clutch cable 0.5 45.7 Adjusting clutch pedal free play 0 25.8 Troubleshooting clutch mechanism 0.5 1

Module VI

Performing Basic Electrical Works

Chapter 1

Inspecting/replacing basic electric component

1.1 Performing soldering 2 2

81.2 Repairing wires and connector 1 1

1.3 Changing fuse 1 1

Chapter 2

Servicing batteries and jump start vehicle

2.1 Changing battery 0.5 1

7.52.2 Performing visual inspection 0.5 12.3 Checking battery voltage 0.5 12.4 Performing jump starting 0.5 12.5 Changing battery terminal 0.5 1

Total Hours 44 212 256Grand Total Hours 158.5 705.5 864


Page:136

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR AUTOMOBILE


Module I: SERVICING SUSPENSION SYSTEM

Chapter 1: Practicing Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) By the end of class IX, students should be able to:


1.1.1 Define 5S.

1.1.2 Sate the purposes of 5S.


1.1.4 Define OHS.


1.1.6 Explain the rights for employee.





1.2 Use of PPE

1.2.1 Define PPE.






1.3 Maintain work place and personal safety






1.3.6 Explain the Emergency exit


Page:137

Annexes




1.3.11Ensure to display safety sings and symbols.







1.4.2 State the importance of maintaining tool and equipment safety

1.4.3 List the do’s and don’ts for tool and equipment.








1.5.3 State the types of fire.





1.6 Use hacksaw

1.6.1 State function of hacksaw.

1.6.2 List parts of hack saw.

1.6.3 State types of hack saw.



Page:138

1.7 Perform filing

1.7.1 State the function of file.

1.7.2 List the types of files.

1.7.3 List the parts of file.


1.8 Perform drilling

1.8.1 Define drilling machine.

1.8.2 State the function of drilling machine.

1.8.3 List the types of drilling machine.

1.8.4 Operate drilling machine.

1.8.5 Use center punch.


1.8.7 Ensure to use coolant.

1.9 Perform grinding

1.9.1 State the function of grinding machine.

1.9.2 Label the parts of grinding machine.

1.9.3 List the types of grinding machine

1.9.4 Operate grinding machine.


1.9.6 Ensure to keep safe distance between hand and grinding machine.

1.9.7 Ensure to use gradual force while grinding.

1.10 Perform Arc welding

1.10.1 Define of arc welding

1.10.2 Define arc welding machine.

1.10.3 List the types of welding machine.

1.10.4 List the accessories and its functions.

1.10.5 Define arc length.

1.10.6 Operate arc welding machine.


1.10.8 Ensure to set welding current as per the job requirement.

Page:139

Annexes

Chapter 2: Replacing faulty rigid suspension componentsBy the end of class IX students should be able to:

2.1 Replace shock absorber

2.1.1 Define suspension system.

2.1.2 State the function of suspension system.

2.1.3 Explain the operation of suspension system.

2.1.4 State the types of suspension system.

2.1.5 List the components of suspension system.

2.1.6 State the functions of shock absorber.

2.1.7 Classify the types of shock absorber.

2.1.8 Illustrate the construction of shock absorber.

2.1.9 Explain the operation of shock absorber.

2.1.10 Ensure the vehicle is parked safely.

2.1.11 Ensure to place the safety stands on a designated area.

2.1.12 Ensure to secure nuts and bolts of shock absorber.

2.1.13 Ensure to handle tools and equipment properly.

2.2 Replace leaf spring assembly

2.2.1 Explain the types of leaf spring.

2.2.2 State the functions of leaf spring.

2.2.3 Explain the operation of leaf spring.

2.2.4 Define and state the function of torque wrench.

2.2.5 Explain the types of torque wrench.

2.2.6 Explain the torque conversion factor.

2.2.7 Use hydraulic jack.

2.2.8 Use Torque wrench.

2.2.9 Ensure vehicle is parked safely.

2.2.10 Ensure all tools and equipment are handled properly.

2.2.11 Ensure that chassis and axle is supported by safety stand.

2.3 Disassemble leaf spring assembly

2.3.1 List the spring defects.

2.3.2 Describe the materials of spring.

2.3.3 Identify the components of leaf spring and its functions.


Page:140


2.3.5 Ensure proper usage of right tools to pry up the clamp.

2.4 Assemble leaf spring assembly

2.4.1 Explain the importance of spring alignment.

2.4.2 Define pneumatic impact gun.

2.4.3 State the function of pneumatic impact gun.

2.4.4 List the external components of pneumatic gun.

2.4.5 Use pneumatic impact gun.


2.4.7 Ensure leaf spring assembly is clamped on the vice securely.

2.5 Change leaf spring bush

2.5.1 Explain function of spring bush.

2.5.2 State the types of bushes.


2.5.4 Ensure proper disposal of used bushes.

2.5.5 Ensure to follow the cross pattern for loosening and tightening U-bolt.

Chapter 3: Replacing faulty independent suspension componentBy the end of class IX students should be able to:

3.1 Replace strut assembly

3.1.1 Define independent suspension system

3.1.2 State function of strut assembly.

3.1.3 List the types of independent suspension system.

3.1.4 Explain construction of strut assembly.

3.1.5 Explain operation of strut assembly.


3.1.7 Ensure brake lines are secured.

3.1.8 Ensure to tightened wheel nut with the specific torque.

3.2 Disassemble strut and coil spring

3.2.1 Explain the components of independent suspension system.

3.2.2 State the function of jack.

3.2.3 List types of Jacks.

Page:141

Annexes

3.2.4 Locate jacking position.

3.2.5 Use screw jack.

3.2.6 Ensure proper griping of strut assembly in the bench vice.

3.2.7 Ensure the hooks of the spring compressors are place properly.

3.3 Assemble strut and coil spring

3.3.1 State importance of coil spring positioning.

3.3.2 Use coil spring compressor.

3.3.3 Ensure to hold the piston rod safety while tightening the lock nut.

3.3.4 Ensure to install the spring in a correct position.

3.3.5 Endure to hock coil spring compressor correctly.

3.3.6 Ensure to tighten each coil spring compressor hook evenly.

3.4 Replace coil spring

3.4.1 State function of coil spring.

3.4.2 List the characteristics of coil spring.

3.4.3 Explain the operation of coil spring.


3.4.5 Ensure to place the jack and safety stand in correct position.

3.5 Replace strut bar

3.5.1 Describe strut bar.

3.5.2 State the function of strut bar.

3.5.3 Ensure to wedge a wheels.

3.5.4 Ensure to give specified torque to strut bar nut.

3.6 Replace suspension arm

3.6.1 State the functions of suspension arm.

3.6.2 Explain the types of suspension arm.

3.6.3 Explain the operation of suspension arm.


3.6.5 Ensure to wedge the wheels.

3.7 Replace torsion bar

3.7.1 Define torsion bar.

3.7.2 State the function of torsion bar.


Page:142

3.7.3 Explain the characteristics of torsion bar.

3.7.4 Explain the operation of torsion bar.



3.7.7 Ensure to place the jack and safety standing correct position.

3.8 Replace lateral control rod

3.8.1 Define lateral control rod.

3.8.2 State the function of lateral control rod.

3.8.3 Explain the operation of lateral control rod.


3.8.5 Ensure the jack saddle is placed in the correct position.


3.9 Replace stabilizer bar

3.9.1 Define stabilizer bar.

3.9.2 State the function of stabilizer bar.

3.9.3 Explain the construction of stabilizer bar.

3.9.5 Explain the construction of stabilizer link bar.

3.9.6 Ensure to park the vehicle safely.


Chapter 4: Diagnosing suspension system failuresBy the end of class IX students should be able to:

4.1 Perform visual inspection of suspension failure

4.1.1 List the methods of inspecting suspension system failure.

4.1.2 Explain types of defects in suspension system.

4.1.3 Explain the inspection check list.


4.1.5 Ensure to park the vehicle safely.

4.2 Perform bounce test

4.2.1 Explain the methods of bounce test.

4.2.2 Ensure the vehicle is parked on the level ground.

Page:143

Annexes

4.3 Perform Test Drive

4.3.1 Explain the symptoms, causes and remedies of suspension system failure.

4.3.2 Ensure to fasten seat belt while driving.

4.3.3 Ensure to follow traffic signs and road hazards.


MODULE 2: SERVICING BRAKE SYSTEM

Chapter 1: Overhauling brake system By the end of class X, students should be able to:

1.1 Check operation of brake booster.

1.1.1 Define brake system.

1.1.2 Explain the function of brake system.

1.1.3 State the types of brake system.

1.1.4 Explain the principle of brake system.

1.1.5 Explain the components of brake system.

1.1.6 State the function of brake booster.

1.1.7 Explain the types of brake booster.

1.1.8 Ensure to engage parking brake.

1.1.9 Ensure to engage gear in neutral.


1.2 Change brake booster

1.2.1 Illustrate the construction of vacuum brake booster.

1.2.2 Illustrate the construction of hydraulic brake booster.

1.2.3 Explain the operation of brake booster.


1.2.5 Ensure to handle brake fluid safely.

1.3 Replace master cylinder kits

1.3.1 State the function of master cylinder.

1.3.2 Explain the types of master cylinder.

1.3.3 Illustrate the construction of master cylinder.

1.3.4 Explain the operation of master cylinder.


Page:144

1.3.5 Ensure to dispose drained brake fluid in safe container.

1.3.6 Ensure safe handling of brake fluid.

1.3.7 Ensure to use hand gloves and goggles.

1.4 Change brake shoes

1.4.1 Explain the types of brake shoes.

1.4.2 Explain the construction of drum brake.

1.4.3 Explain the operation of drum brake.


1.4.5 Ensure to use safety stand and wedge the vehicle.

1.4.6 Ensure to place removed tire under the vehicle.

1.5 Replace wheel cylinder kits

1.5.1 Define wheel cylinder.

1.5.2 State function of wheel cylinder.

1.5.3 Explain the types of wheel cylinder.

1.5.4 Illustrate the construction of wheel cylinder.

1.5.5Explain the operation of wheel cylinder.


1.5.7 Ensure not to spill brake fluid over the vehicle body.

1.6 Change brake caliper assembly

1.6.1 Explain the types of brake caliper.

1.6.2 Illustrate the construction of brake caliper.

1.6.3 Explain the operation of brake caliper.

1.6.4 State functions of brake pad and its wear indicator.

1.6.5 Describe the materials of brake pad.

1.6.6 Ensure safe handling of brake pipe while disconnecting.



1.7 Replace brake pipeline

1.7.1 State the function of brake pipeline.

1.7.2 Describe brake pipe layout.

1.7.3 Explain the types of brake pipe.

1.7.4 Use flaring tool.

Page:145

Annexes

1.7.5 Ensure to engage parking brake.

1.7.6 Ensure to handle brake safely.


1.8 Change brake disc/rotor

1.8.1 State function of brake disc/rotor.

1.8.2 State the types of brake disc/rotor.

1.8.3 Explain the defects of brake disc/rotor.

1.8.4 Use micrometer.


1.8.6 Ensure to support the vehicle with safety stand.

1.9 Change brake fluid

1.9.1 State the purpose of changing brake fluid.

1.9.2 State the function of brake fluid.

1.9.3 Explain the types of brake fluid.

1.9.4 List the properties of brake fluid.

1.9.5 State the purpose of brake bleeding.

1.9.6 Explain the changing intervals of brake fluid.



1.10 Change anti-lock brake system speed sensor

1.10.1 Define ABS system.

1.10.2 List the components of ABS.

1.10.3 State the function of speed sensor.

1.10.4 Explain the operation of ABS system.


1.10.6 Ensure that sensor wire is routed as previously to avoid crimping or twisting the wire harness.

1.11 Change parking brake cable

1.11.1 State the function of hand brake cable.

1.11.2 List the types of hand brake.

1.11.3 Explain the operation of hand brake.

1.11.4 Ensure proper disposal of old brake cable.



Page:146

Chapter 2: Adjusting brake system By the end of class X students should be able to:

2.1 Adjust brake pedal free play

2.1.1 Define pedal free play.

2.1.2 State the importance of brake pedal free play.

2.1.3 State the purpose of brake pedal free play.

2.1.4 Define pedal height.

2.1.5 State the purpose of pedal height.

2.1.6 Define reserve distance.

2.1.7 State the purpose of reserve distance.

2.1.8 Ensure to engage parking brake


2.2 Adjust drum brake

2.2.1 Explain the types of drum brake adjuster.

2.2.2 List the purpose of brake adjustment.



2.3 Perform Test Drive

2.3.1 List the symptoms, causes and remedies of brake failure.

2.3.2 Ensure to fasten seat belt.

2.3.3 Ensure to maintain speed limit.

MODULE III: SERVICING STEERING SYSTEM

Chapter 1: Servicing steering componentsBy the end of class X students should be able to:

1.1 Replace steering wheel

1.1.1 Define steering system.

1.1.2 State the functions of steering system.

1.1.3 Explain the principles of steering system.

1.1.4 Explain the types of steering system.

1.1.5 Explain the components of steering system.

1.1.6 List the types of steering gear box.

1.1.7 Explain the basics of SRS system.

Page:147

Annexes

1.1.8 State the advantages of SRS system.

1.1.9 Ensure to disconnect the battery negative terminal before removing steering wheel.

1.1.10 Ensure to tighten wheel nut to specified torque.


1.2 Replace steering shaft

1.2.1 State the function of steering shaft.

1.2.2 State the function of universal joint.

1.2.3 State the function of steering column.

1.2.4 Illustrate the construction of steering column.

1.2.5 Ensure to take care of electrical components.


1.3 Replace tie rod end

1.3.1 State the function of tie rod end.

1.3.2 Explain the construction of tie rod end.

1.3.3 Use tie rod end remover.



1.4 Replace rack & pinion assembly

1.4.1 State the function of rack and pinion.

1.4.2 Explain steering gear mechanism.

1.4.3 Calculate gear ratio.

1.4.4 List the components of rack and pinion.

1.4.5 Explain the operation of rack and pinion steering gear box.


1.4.7 Ensure to jack up vehicle in correct position.

1.5 Replace pitman arm

1.5.1 State the functions of pitman arm.


1.5.3 Ensure to wedge the wheel.


Page:148

1.6 Replace re-circulating ball type steering gear box

1.6.1 Illustrate the construction of re-circulating type gear box.



1.7 Overhaul re-circulating type steering gear box

1.7.1 Explain the operation of recirculating gear box.



1.8 Adjust steering gear backlash

1.8.1 Define backlash.

1.8.2 State the purpose of back lash.

1.8.3 Use dial gauge.

1.8.4 Ensure dial gauge is handled safely.


1.9 Replace integral power steering gear box

1.9.1 Define power steering system.

1.9.2 State the types of power steering.

1.9.3 State the types of power steering gear box.

1.9.4 Explain the construction of integral power steering gear box.

1.9.5 Explain the operation of integral power steering gear box.

1.9.6 Ensure proper disposal of used power steering fluid.



MODULE III: SERVICING STEERING SYSTEM By the end of class XI students should be able to:

1.10 Replace rack & pinion power steering gear box

1.10.1 State function of power steering system.

1.10.2 Illustrate construction of hydraulic rack and pinion power steering system.

1.10.3 Explain the operation of hydraulic rack and pinion power steering system.

1.10.4 Illustrate the construction of electronic power steering system.

Page:149

Annexes

1.10.5 Explain the operation of electronic power steering system.

1.10.6 Ensure steering fluid is disposed in a designated container.

1.11 Replace power steering belt

1.11.1 State the function of power steering drive belt.

1.11.2 State the types of power steering drive belt.

1.11.3 Explain the belt defects.

1.11.4 Use belt tension gauge.

1.11.5 Ensure proper handling to belt tension gauge.

1.12 Change power steering fluid

1.12.1 State the types of power steering fluid.

1.12.2 List the properties of power steering fluid.

1.12.3 State the function of power steering fluid.

1.12.4 Ensure old steering fluid is disposed in designated container.

1.13 Purge hydraulic power steering

1.13.1 State purpose of purging/bleeding hydraulic power steering.

1.13.2 Ensure the fluid is not spilled.

1.14 Replace power steering pump

1.14.1 State the function of power steering pump.

1.14.2 Illustrate the construction of power steering pump.

1.14.3 Explain the types of steering pump.

1.14.4 Explain the working operation of vane type power steering pump.

1.14.5 Ensure old steering fluid is disposed in a designated container.

1.15 Troubleshoot steering system

1.15.1 Explain the symptoms, causes and remedies of steering system failure.

Chapter 2: Servicing kingpinBy the end of class XI, Students should be able to:

2.1 Remove kingpin assembly

2.1.1 Define kingpin.

2.1.2 State the function of kingpin.


Page:150

2.1.3 Explain the construction of kingpin.


2.1.5 Ensure the vehicle is safely supported with safety stand.

2.1.6 Ensure that the old grease is disposed at designated container.

2.2 Refit kingpin assembly

2.2.1 State the function of kingpin components.

2.2.2 Explain kingpin inclination.

2.2.3 Explain the causes and remedies of king pin failure.

2.2.4 Ensure proper handling of pre-load gauge.

2.3 Perform kingpin greasing

2.3.1 Define grease.

2.3.2 State the purpose of greasing.

2.3.3 Explain the types of grease.

2.3.4 State the properties of grease.

2.3.5 Ensure old grease is disposed at designated container.

2.4 Replace knuckle assembly

2.4.1 Define steering knuckle assembly

2.4.2 State the function of knuckle assembly

2.4.3 Explain the function of knuckle oil seal

2.4.4 Ensure proper handling of hand tools

Chapter 3: Performing wheel alignmentBy the end of class XI chapter 3, students should be able to;

3.1 Perform pre-alignment

3.1.1 Define wheel alignment.

3.1.2 Explain steering geometry.

3.1.3 State the factors affecting wheel alignment.

3.1.4 List the specification of tire pressure.

3.1.5 State importance of pre-alignment.

3.1.6 Use Tire pressure gauge.

3.1.7 Ensure compressed air is used for the right application.

Page:151

Annexes

3.2 Adjust toe-angle

3.2.1 Define toe angle.

3.2.2 State the purpose of maintaining toe angle.

3.2.3 Explain turning radius of toe angle.

3.2.4 State the methods of adjusting toe-angle.

3.2.5 Ensure the vehicle is wedged and engage parking brake securely.

3.2.6 Ensure proper handling of SST (Steering wheel lock).

3.3 Adjust camber

3.3.1 Define camber.

3.3.2 State the purpose of camber.

3.3.3 Determine the effects of camber failure.

3.3.4 Explain steering axis inclination.

3.3.5 Ensure vehicle is parked on level ground.

3.3.6 Ensure proper handling of hand tools and equipment.

3.4 Adjust caster angle

3.4.1 Define caster.

3.4.2 State the purpose of caster.

3.4.3 Explain the effects of caster failure.

3.4.4 Ensure vehicle is parked on level ground.

3.4.5 Ensure proper handling of hand tools and equipment.

Chapter 4: Carrying out wheel balancingBy the end of class XI chapter 3, students should be able to:

4.1 Perform inspection on tire wear

4.1.1 Describe tire.

4.1.2 State the function of tire.

4.1.3 List the types of tire.

4.1.4 Illustrate the construction of tire.

4.1.5 Explain the specification of tire.

4.1.6 List the defects of tire wear pattern.

4.1.7 Explain the symptoms and causes of tire wear.

4.1.8 Ensure that the vehicle is supported with safety stand in correct position.


Page:152

4.2 Perform static test drive

4.2.1 Define wheel balancing.

4.2.2 State types of wheel balancig

4.2.3 State the purpose of static test.

4.2.4 Explain the effects of wheel balancing.

4.2.5 Ensure that the vehicle is jacked up at correct position.

4.3 Perform dynamic test drive

4.3.1 State the importance of performing pre-driving checks.

4.3.1 Explain the purpose of dynamic test.

4.3.1 Ensure that all safety factors are followed while driving on the high way.

4.4 Perform wheel balancing

4.4.1 State the purpose of wheel balancing.

4.4.2 State the purpose of counter weight.

4.4.3 Explain the causes and effects of unbalance wheel.

4.4.4 Explain the proper handling of wheel balancing machine.

4.4.5 Operate wheel balancing machine.

4.4.6 Ensure to check the machine prior to operation.


MODULE IV: SERVICING ENGINE AUXILIARY

Chapter 1: Servicing Cooling SystemBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

1.1. Change Coolant

1.1.1 Explain engine auxiliary system.

1.1.2 State the function of cooling system.

1.1.3 List the components of cooling system.

1.1.4 Classify cooling system.

1.1.5 Explain the operation of cooling system.

1.1.6 Define coolant.

1.1.7 State the function of coolant.

1.1.8 List the properties of coolant.

1.1.9 Explain water coolant ratio.

Page:153

Annexes

1.1.10 State the importance of using distilled water.

1.1.11 Explain the causes and effects of stray current.

1.1.12 Ensure proper disposal of used coolant.

1.2 Change thermostat valve

1.2.1 Explain the function of thermostat valve.

1.2.2 List types of thermostat valve.

1.2.3 Illustrate the construction of thermostat valve.

1.2.4 Explain the operation of thermostat valve.

1.2.5 Ensure proper use of hand tools.

1.3 Check leakages

1.3.1 List types of leakages in cooling system.

1.3.2 Explain causes of cooling system leakage.

1.3.3 Use pressure tester.

1.3.4 Ensure safe handling of pressure tester.

1.3.5 Ensure that the vehicle is safely parked on level ground.

1.4 Change radiator assembly

1.4.1 State function of radiator.

1.4.2 Explain types of radiator.

1.4.3 Explain construction of radiator.

1.4.4 State function of radiator cap.

1.4.5 Explain the construction and operation of radiator pressure cap.

1.4.6 State function of fan shroud.

1.4.7 Explain purpose of bleeding air from cooling system.

1.4.8 Ensure to remove radiator when the engine is cool.

1.4.9 Ensure proper handling of radiator fins.

1.5 Change water pump assembly

1.5.1 Illustrate the construction of water pump.

1.5.2 State types of water pump.

1.5.3 State functions of water pump.

1.5.4 Explain the working principle of water pump.

1.5.5 Ensure proper disposal of used coolant and gasket.


Page:154

1.5.6 Ensure to wear hand gloves.

1.6 Troubleshoot cooling system

1.6.1 Explain the symptoms, causes and remedies of cooling system failure.

Chapter 2: Servicing Lubrication systemBy the end of class XI chapter 2, students should be able to:

2.1 Change engine oil

2.1.1 Define lubrication system.

2.1.2 State types of lubrication system.

2.1.3 Classify methods of lubrication system.

2.1.4 Explain construction of lubrication system.

2.1.5 Explain operation of lubrication system.

2.1.6 Define viscosity.

2.1.7 State functions of engine oil.

2.1.8 List properties of engine oil.

2.1.9 Classify the specification of engine oil.

2.1.10 Explain the changing interval of engine oil.

2.1.11 State purpose of dip stick.

2.1.12 Explain the function of oil filter.

2.1.13 Explain the construction of oil filter.

2.1.14 Explain the operation of oil filter.

2.1.15 Use oil filter wrench.

2.1.16 Ensure to dispose the old engine oil and oil filter at the designated container.


2.2 Change oil pressure switch

2.1 State function oil pressure switch.

2.2 Explain the operation of oil pressure switch.

2.3 Troubleshoot lubrication System

2.3.1 Explain symptoms, causes and remedies of lubrication system failure.

Page:155

Annexes

Chapter 3: Service Petrol fuel systemBy the end of class XI students should be able to:

3.1 Change petrol fuel filter

3.1.1 List the components of petrol fuel system.

3.1.2 Explain how petrol fuel system works.

3.1.3 State types of fuel system.

3.1.4 State the function of fuel filter.

3.1.5 Describe the construction of fuel filter.

3.1.6 State the types of petrol fuel filter.

3.1.7 State the importance of changing petrol filter.

3.1.8 Ensure to dispose old petrol fuel filter at the designated place.

3.1.9 Ensure to wear hand gloves and goggles.

3.2 Change accelerator cable

3.2.1 Explain the function of accelerator cable.

3.2.2 Explain the operating mechanism of acceleration system.


3.3 Change fuel rail (fuel delivery pipe) and injectors

3.3.1 Define of EFI system.

3.3.2 Differentiate carburetor and EFI system.

3.3.3 Explain EFI system.

3.3.4 State advantages of EFI.

3.3.5 State function of engine sensors.

3.3.6 State function of fuel injector.

3.3.7 Explain the construction of fuel injector.

3.3.8 Explain the operation of fuel injector.

3.3.9 Ensure to hand gloves and goggles.

3.4 Change positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve

3.4.1 State function of PCV valve.

3.4.2 Illustrate the construction of PCV valve.

3.4.3 Explain the operation of PCV valve.


Page:156

3.5 Service fuel tank

3.5.1 State function of fuel tank.

3.5.2 Illustrate the construction of fuel tank.

3.5.3 Ensure proper storing of ignitable substances.


3.6 Troubleshoot petrol fuel system

3.6.1 Explain the symptoms, causes and remedies for carburetor fuel system failure.

Chapter 4: Servicing Diesel fuel systemBy the end of class XI students should be able to:

4.1 Change diesel fuel filter

4.1.1 Describe the diesel fuel system.

4.1.2 State function of diesel fuel injection system.

4.1.3 Illustrate inline pump construction of diesel fuel injection system.

4.1.4 Explain the operation of diesel fuel injection system in inline type.

4.1.5 State functions of diesel fuel filter.

4.1.6 List the types of diesel fuel filter.

4.1.7 Illustrate the construction of diesel fuel filter.

4.1.8 Explain the changing intervals of diesel fuel filter.

4.1.9 Ensure to dispose old filter at the designated place.


4.2 Change feed pump

4.2.1 Explain function of hand feed pump.

4.2.2 List the types of hand feed pump.

4.2.3 Explain the operation of feed pump.

4.3 Bleed fuel system

4.3.1 State properties of diesel fuel.

4.3.2 List the types of diesel fuel.

4.3.3 State purpose of bleeding.

4.3.4 Ensure to wear gloves and goggles.

4.4 Set fuel injection timing (in-line type)

4.4.1 Overview of fuel injection pumps.

4.4.2 Explain the working principle of fuel injection pumps.

Page:157

Annexes

4.4.3 Explain the working of centrifugal governor.


4.5 Service fuel injector

4.5.1 Explain function of fuel injector.

4.5.2 List the types of fuel injector.

4.5.3 Illustrate the construction of fuel injector.

4.5.4 Explain the operation of fuel injector.

4.5.5 Use fuel injector pressure tester.

4.5.6 Ensure safe handling of fuel injector pressure tester.


4.6 Set fuel injection timing (Distributor type)

4.6.1 Describe the construction of distributor type fuel pump.

4.6.2 Explain the operation of distributer type fuel pump.

4.6.3 Describe the components of fuel injection pump.

4.6.4 Explain the operation of all speed governor.

4.6.5 Use dial gauge.

4.6.6 Ensure safe handling of dial gauge.

4.7 Troubleshoot diesel fuel system

4.7.1 Explain the symptoms, causes and remedies for diesel fuel system failure.

4.7.2 Explain the symptoms, causes and remedies for CRDI system failure.

B.5. LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XIIMODULE V: OVERHAULING POWER OR DRIVE TRAIN

Chapter 1: Servicing Propeller shaft componentsBy the end of class XII students should be able to:

1.1 Change propeller shaft

1.1.1 Define propeller shaft.

1.1.2 List components of power train.

1.1.3 Explain transmission power flow mechanism.

1.1.4 State function of propeller shaft.

1.1.5 List types of propeller shaft.

1.1.6 Explain purpose of slip joint.

1.1.7 List components of propeller shaft and their functions.


Page:158

1.1.8 Ensure to place saddle in correct position when lifting the vehicle.

1.2 Check propeller shaft run out

1.2.1 Explain purpose of checking propeller shaft run out.

1.2.2 Explain function of counter weight on the propeller shaft.

1.3 Change cross bearing

1.3.1 State function of cross bearing.

1.3.2 List universal joint.

1.3.3 List parts of cross bearing.

1.3.4 Ensure to use hand gloves.

1.4 Change centre bearing

1.4.1 State function of centre bearing.

1.4.2 Explain construction of centre bearing.


1.5 Troubleshoot propeller shaft failure

1.5.1 Explain the symptoms, causes and remedies of propeller shaft failure.

Chapter 2: Servicing wheel bearing and axle shaft componentsBy the end of class XII students should be able to:

2.1 Overhaul wheel hub assembly

2.1.1 Define wheel hub.

2.1.2 State function of wheel bearing.

2.1.3 List types of wheel bearing.

2.1.4 Explain construction of wheel bearing assembly.

2.1.5 Explain components of wheel hub assembly and their functions.

2.1.6 Explain purpose of hub greasing.

2.1.7 Explain purpose of bearing preload.

2.1.8 Use of pre load gauge.

2.1.9 Ensure proper disposal of used grease.


2.2 Replace drive/axle shaft

2.2.1 State function of axle.

2.2.2 List types of axle.

Page:159

Annexes

2.2.3 Illustrate construction of drive axle.

2.2.4 List types of axle shaft.

2.2.5 State function of axle shaft.

2.2.6 Explain purpose of inspecting axle shaft.

2.2.7 Ensure proper disposal of used lubricants.

2.2.8 Ensure to us hand gloves.

2.3 Change CV joint

2.3.1 State function of CV joint.

2.3.2 List types of CV joint.

2.3.3 Explain construction of CV joint.

2.3.4 Explain operation of CV joint.

2.3.5 Ensure use of hand gloves.

2.4 Troubleshoot wheel hub assembly

2.4.1 Explain symptoms, causes and remedies of wheel bearing failure.

2.5 Troubleshoot drive/axle shaft

2.5.1 Explain symptoms causes and remedies of drive/axle shaft failure.

Chapter 3: Servicing final drive and differential ComponentsBy the end of class XII students should be able to:

3.1 Change differential oil

3.1.1 State the funstion of differential oil.

3.1.2 Explain the classification of differential oil.

3.1.3 Explain changing interval of differential oil.


3.2 Replace differential assembly

3.2.1 Define final drive.

3.2.2 Define differential.

3.2.3 List types of differential.

3.2.4 State function of final drive.

3.2.5 State function of differential.

3.2.6 Explain application of differential.


Page:160

3.2.7 Ensure proper jacking position of vehicle.

3.2.8 Ensure to use gloves.

3.3 Disassemble differential assembly

3.3.1 List types of final drive gear

3.3.2 Explain construction of differential

3.3.3 Explain working principle of differential

3.3.4 Explain differential gear ratio

3.3.5 Use bearing puller

3.3.6 Ensure to use gloves

3.4 Assemble differential assembly

3.4.1 Define bearing pre load.

3.4.2 State purpose of bearing pre load.

3.4.3 Define backlash.

3.4.4 State purpose of backlash.

3.4.5 Explain gear tooth nomenclatures and gear contact pattern.

3.4.6 Use SST (Differential side bearing adjuster).


3.4.8 Ensure to take care of drained gear oil.

3.5 Troubleshoot final drive and differential

3.5.1 Explain symptoms, causes and remedies of final drive/differential failure.

Chapter 4: Servicing final drive and differential ComponentsBy the end of class XII students should be able to:

4.1 Replace transmission

4.1.1 Define transmission system.

4.1.2 Explain functions of transmission system.

4.1.3 List types of transmission system.

4.1.4 List types of manual transmission.

4.1.5 Use transmission jack.


Page:161

Annexes

4.2 Change transmission oil

4.2.1 State function of gear oil.

4.2.2 List properties of gear oil.

4.2.3 Explain classification and specification gear oil.

4.2.4 Ensure to dispose used gear oil at designated container.


4.3 Disassemble transmission components

4.3.1 Illustrate construction of manual transmission.

4.3.2 Explain construction and operation of synchronizing unit.

4.3.3 Explain power flow in transmission.

4.3.4 List types of gear used in manual transmission.

4.3.5 Explain calculation of gear ratio.

4.3.6 State functions of transmission components.

4.3.7 Explain gear shifting mechanism.

4.3.8 Use oil seal remover.

4.3.9 Use bearing puller.


4.4 Inspect transmission components

4.4.1 Illustrate the defects of transmission components.

4.4.2 Use feeler gauge.

4.4.3 Ensure proper disposal of damaged gear.

4.5 Assemble manual transmission

4.5.1 Explain the purpose of backlash/thrust play.


4.6 Overhaul transfer case

4.6.1 State the purpose of transfer case.

4.6.2 Illustrate the construction of transfer case.

4.6.3 List types of transfer case.

4.6.4 Explain operation of full-time and part-time transfer case.

4.7 Replace transaxle

4.7.1 Define transaxle.

4.7.2 List types of transaxle.


Page:162


4.8 Disassemble transaxle components

4.8.1 Explain construction of transaxle.

4.8.2 Explain power flow of transaxle.

4.8.3 Ensure proper disposal old transaxle fluid at designated container

4.9 Assemble transaxle components

4.9.1 State functions of transaxle components.

4.9.2 State function of sealant.

4.9.3 Explain application of sealant.


4.9.5 Ensure proper disposal of old sealant.

4.10 Troubleshoot transmission failure

4.10.1 Explain symptoms, causes and remedies of transmission failure.

Chapter 5: Overhauling and Service Clutch MechanismBy the end of class XII students should be able to:

5.1 Replace clutch assembly

5.1.1 Define clutch system.

5.1.2 State function of clutch system.

5.1.3 Explain the classification of clutch system.

5.1.4 Illustrate construction clutch system.

5.1.5 Explain operation clutch system.


5.1.7 Ensure to dispose used clutch plate at designated place.

5.2 Inspect clutch components

5.2.1 Explain functions of clutch plate, pressure plate, release bearing, pilot bearing, fly wheel and release fork.

5.2.2 Illustrate parts of pressure plate.

5.2.3 List types of pressure plate.

5.2.4 Explain construction and function of clutch plate components.

5.2.5 List types of clutch plate.

5.2.6 Use straight edge gauge.


Page:163

Annexes

5.3 Change clutch fluid

5.3.1 Explain the interval of changing clutch fluid.

5.3.2 Ensure proper disposal of used clutch fluid.


5.4 Replace clutch master cylinder kits

5.4.1 State function clutch master cylinder.

5.4.2 List components of clutch master cylinder.

5.4.3 Explain working principle of clutch master cylinder.

5.4.4 State function of slave cylinder.

5.4.5 List components of slave cylinder.

5.4.6 Explain the working principle of slave cylinder.

5.4.7 Ensure to use gloves and goggles.

5.4.8 Ensure to dispose used clutch fluid and kits in safe place.

5.5 Replace clutch cable

5.5.1 State function of clutch cable.

5.5.2 Explain operation of clutch cable.

5.5.3 Ensure to dispose old clutch cable to designated place.


5.6 Adjust clutch pedal free play

5.6.1 Describe clutch padel free play.

5.6.2 State the purpose of adjusting clutch pedal height.

5.6.3 Explain the specification of clutch pedal free play.

5.7 Troubleshoot clutch system failure

5.7.1 Explain symptoms, cause and remedies of clutch failure.


Page:164

MODULE VI: PERFORMING BASIC AUTO ELECTRICAL WORKS

Chapter 1: Replacing Basic Electrical ComponentsBy the end of class XII students should be able to:

1.1 Perform soldering

1.1.1 Define soldering.

1.1.2 List types of soldering lead and its size.

1.1.3 State the purpose of soldering iron.

1.1.4 Explain the purpose of flux during soldering.

1.1.5 Use soldering iron.

1.1.6 Ensure to use hand gloves, goggles and apron.

1.2 Repair wires and connectors

1.2.1 Define current, voltage and resistance.

1.2.2 State Ohms law.

1.2.3 List types of crimp terminal and connectors.

1.2.4 List types of wire jointing.

1.2.5 Illustrate colour coding and wire size.


1.2.7 Ensure to dispose wasted wires in proper place.

1.3 Change fuse

1.3.1 State function of fuse.

1.3.2 List types of fuse.

1.3.3 Illustrate fuse rating and colour coding.

Chapter 2: Servicing batteries and jump start vehicleBy the end of class XII students should be able to:

2.1 Change battery

2.1.1 Define battery and explain its function.

2.1.2 Explain the purpose of disconnecting negative battery terminal.

2.1.3 Ensure to disconnect battery negative terminal prior to changing battery.

2.1.4 Ensure to use hand gloves and apron.

Page:165

Annexes

2.2 Perform visual inspection

2.2.1 Explain the construction of battery.


2.3 Check battery voltage

2.3.1 Describe the capacity rating of battery.


2.3.3 Ensure proper handling of multimeter/voltmeter.

2.4 Perform jump starting

2.4.1 State the purpose of jump starting of battery.

2.4.2 Construct circuit of jump start.

2.4.3 Use battery starter.

2.4.4 Ensure proper handling of battery starter.


2.5 Change battery terminal

2.5.1 State the function of battery terminal.

2.5.2 List the types of battery terminal.

2.5.3 State the purpose of applying petroleum jelly.

2.5.4 Ensure to proper handling of battery end remover.


DRAWING LESSONS


Practical (hrs)

Nominal Duration

(Hrs)

IX Module 1


Drawing

Chapter: 1

Draw basic signs, symbols, and

dimension

1.1 Using drawing instrument 2 4

43 hrs

1.2 Laying out drawing sheet 2 4

1.3 Interpreting engineering signs, symbols, and abbreviation 2 4


1.5 Drawing letters and numbers 2 4

1.6 Providing dimensions 2 6


Page:166

X Module 1


Drawing

Chapter: 2

Drawing isometric and orthographic projections

2.1 Converting drawing scales 1 2

57 hrs

2.2 Drawing of isometric block 2 18

2.3 Draw orthographic projections 2 15

XI

Module 1


Drawing

Chapter :3

Interpreting Technical drawing

3.1 Drawing isometric views for different joint

2 22

58 hrs 3.2 Interpret simple mechanical drawing

2 6

3.3 Drawing mechanical machine parts

2 6

Total 158 hrs



Chapter: 1 Draw basic signs, symbols and dimensionBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

1.1 Use drawing instrument




1.1.4 List sizes of drawing papers.




1.2.1 Define layout of a drawing.





1.3.1 Define signs and symbols

1.3.2 Define abbreviation

1.3.3 Ensure to maintain cleanliness and neatness of drawing


Page:167

Annexes


1.4.1 Define line

1.4.2 State types of line and its applications



1.5 Draw Letters and numbers


1.5.2 Classify letters style.



1.5.5 List the size of letters.




1.6 Provide dimensions


1.6.2 State the types of dimensions.

1.6.3 Explain the system of dimensions.






Chapter: 2.Drawing isometric and orthographic projectionsBy the end of class X students should be able to:

2.1 Convert drawing scale

2.1.1 Define drawing scale.





Page:168



2.2.2 State the isometric terminologies.



2.3 Draw orthographic projections

2.3.1 Define orthographic projections.

2.3.2 Draw six principle views.

2.3.3 Explain the method of obtaining six principle views.

2.3.4 Explain four quadrants with the help of diagrams.

2.3.5 Differentiate between first and third angle projections.




Chapter: 3 Interpreting Technical drawingBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

3.1 Draw isometric views for different joint

3.1.1 Describe sectional views

3.1.2 Describe auxiliary views



3.2 Interpret simple mechanical drawing

3.2.1 Define mechanical drawing.

3.2.2 List types of mechanical drawing.

3.2.3 Explain plan, elevation, and section.



3.3 Draw mechanical machine parts

3.3.1 Development of surfaces.



Page:169

Annexes

ANNEX VII: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING

A. COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING LESSONS

Class MODULE Chapter LessonsTheory

(hrs)

Practical

(hrs)Total (hrs)

CLA

SS- I

X

MODULE-I Performing installation and configuration of computer system and device

Chapter 1

Applying Occupational Health and Safety (OHS) and Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

1.1 Applying principle of 5s 0.5 1

12

1.2 Applying OHS practices 1 1

1.3 Using Personal Protective Equipment(PPE)

1 1

1.4 Maintaining work place and personal safety

1.5 1

1.5 Maintaining tools and equipment safety

0.5 0.5

1.6 Using fire extinguisher 0.75 2.25

Chapter 2

Preparing for software installation

2.1 Checking hardware compatibility

2 2

82.2 Checking software compatibility

1 1.5

2.3 Preparing for effective data backup and recovery

0.5 1

Chapter 3

Installing Operating System and Application software

3.1 Backing-up data 6 12

1063.2 Installing Windows OS 8 22

3.3 Installing inbuilt device driver 4 12

3.4 Installing Application software 5 18

3.5 Formatting HDD(After installation of OS)

2 6

3.6 Customizing disk partition (disk management)

2 4

3.7 Configuring software 1 4

Chapter 4

Performing PC assembly

4.1 Identifying tools, materials and equipment for computer maintenance

1 3

504.2 Fixing Motherboard 2 84.3 Mounting CPU 2 84.4 Mounting CPU fan 2 64.5 Fixing RAM 2 84.6 Installing Add-on cards 2 6

TOTAL 47.75 128.25 176


Page:170

CLA

SS- X

MODULE-I Performing installation and configuration of computer system and device

Chapter 4

Performing PC assembly

4.7 Installing Hard disk drive (HDD) 2 12

60

4.8 Installing Optical drive 2 6

4.9 Installing Switch Mode Power Supply (SMPS)

4 12

4.10 Configuring Front panel connection

4 10

4.11 Conducting test for PC assembly 2 6

Chapter 5

Installing peripheral devices

5.1 Downloading device drivers using software(Scanner tools)

2 10

56

5.2 Installing printer 4 12

5.3 Installing scanner 1 5

5.4 Installing projector 2 12

5.5 Installing barcode reader 2 6

MODULE-II

Performing troubleshooting of computer system and devices

Chapter 1

Diagnosing PC faults

1.1 Checking software update 2 12

601.2 Performing system scan 3 121.3 Performing continuity test 2 101.4 Diagnosing boot error 7 12

TOTAL 39 137 176

CLA

SS- X

I

MODULE-II

Performing troubleshooting of computer system and devices

Chapter 1

Diagnosing PC faults

1.5 Defragmenting HDD 1 4

48

1.6 Checking screen 1 121.7 Checking system components

voltage4 15

1.8 Performing troubleshooting using inbuilt tools

2 6

1.9 Estimating the cost of repair 1 2

Chapter 2

Rectifying software faults

2.1 Installing software update 4 8

752.2 Repairing software (application) 2 102.3 Upgrading software 2 122.4 Rectifying BSOD error/boot error 6 62.5 Repairing OS 4 18

Chapter 3

Rectifying PC Components

3.1 Repairing SMPS 4 24

133 3.2 Replacing screen 2 243.3 Replacing speaker 4 183.4 Replacing keyboard 4 233.5 Replacing touch pad 4 26

TOTAL 45 211 256

Page:171

Annexes

CLA

SS- X

IIMODULE II Performing troubleshooting of computer system and devices

Chapter 3

Rectifying PC Components

3.6 Servicing cooling medium 2 618

3.7 Replacing motherboard 2 8

Chapter 4

Rectifying peripheral device fault

4.1 Servicing printer 2 10 364.2 Servicing photocopy machine 2 10

4.3 Servicing scanner 2 10

MODULE III Performing installation and configuration of

Network

Chapter 1

Installing network

1.1 Designing network topology

2 6

761.2 Estimating the cost 1 2

1.3 Laying Network cables 2 6

1.4 Installing firewall device 2 8

1.5 Fixing I/O box 2 12

1.6 Crimping RJ45 connector 2 9

1.7 Carrying out casing and capping

4 18

Chapter 2

Configuring network

2.1 Configuring modem router

2 12

48.5

2.2 Configuring Computer on network

1 5

2.3 Assigning IP address 2 3.5

2.4 Configuring switch 2 12

2.5 Configuring network security software

1 5

2.6 Documenting network details

1 2

Chapter 3

Conducting test

3.1 Checking network device drivers

1 3

13.53.1 Testing cable connectivity 1 4

3.1 Pinging IP address 1 3.5

Module-IV

Performing Maintenance of Network

Chapter 1

Diagnosing Network faults

1.1 Checking data transmission

1 5

181.2 Checking signal strength 1 5

1.3 Testing device port 1 5

Chapter 2

Carrying out maintenance

2.1 Preparing maintenance plan

1 1

46

2.2 Backing up network data 2 12

2.3 Upgrading network software

2 8

2.4 Upgrading network security software

2 6

2.5 Rectifying signal strength 1 3

2.6 Resetting modem router 1 5

2.7 Preparing maintenance report

1 1

Total 50 206 256


Page:172

LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING


MODULE 1: PERFORMING INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION OF COMPUTER SYSTEM AND DEVICE

Chapter 1: Applying Occupational Health and Safety (OHS)By the end of class IX, students should be able to:

1.1 Apply principal of 5s

1.1.1 Define 5S.


1.1.3 Explain the principles of 5S.

1.1.4 Define OHS.


1.1.6 Explain the rights of employee

1.1.7 State the main causes of accidents





1.2.1 Define PPE.












1.3.6 Explain the Emergency exit

Page:173

Annexes












1.4.2 State the importance of maintaining tool and equipment safety

1.4.3 List the do’s and don’ts for tool and equipment.








1.5.3 State the types of fire.





Chapter 2: Preparing for software installation

By the end of class IX, students should be able to:

2.1 Check hardware compatibility

2.1.1 Define computer.

2.1.2 List characteristics of computer.

2.1.3 Explain generation of computer.

2.1.4 State the functions of the computer.


Page:174

2.1.5 Explain Input-Process-Output (IPO) terminology.

2.1.6 Identify basic computer components.

2.1.7 Differentiate between computer hardware and software.

2.1.8 Explain the category of software.

2.1.9 Explain the category of hardware.

2.1.10 List the types of computers.

2.1.11 Explain hardware and software used in different types of computer.

2.1.12 List minimum requirement of hardware during installation of an Operating System.

2.1.13 Ensure to use Electrostatic discharge (ESD) tools.


2.2 Check software compatibility

2.2.1 Explain software compatibility.

2.2.2 Explain consequences of not checking software compatibility.

2.2.3 State the methods to check software compatibility.

2.2.4 Use Internet.

2.2.5 Ensure to browse safe websites.

2.2.6 Be patient while checking software compatibility.

2.3 Prepare Effective Data Backup and Recovery

2.3.1 State the importance of preparing for data backup and recovery.

2.3.2 Explain backup storage.

2.3.3 Describe vital things that must be considered before backup.

2.3.4 Explain backup data.

2.3.5 Segregate data.

2.3.6 Ensure to select proper backup media.

Chapter 3: Installing Operating System and Application softwareBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

3.1 Backup data

3.1.1 Define data backup.

3.1.2 State importance of data backup.

3.1.3 Explain the types of data backup.

3.1.4 List types of backup storage media.

3.1.5 Differentiate between device driver backup and data backup.

Page:175

Annexes

3.1.6 Restore data.

3.1.7 Ensure to use online backup services securely.

3.1.8 Ensure that the backup storage device is safe and has enough space.

3.2 Install Windows OS

3.2.1 State the functions of Operating System.

3.2.2 List the types of Operating System.

3.2.3 Identify versions and service pack of windows.

3.2.4 State the purpose of product key.

3.2.5 Examine methods of installation.

3.2.6 Identify key to enter the BIOS.

3.2.7 Change Boot priority in BIOS program.

3.2.8 Ensure to enter the correct product key.

3.2.9 Ensure proper handling of installation media (CD/DVD/Pen drive).

3.3 Install inbuilt device driver

3.3.1 List the function of device manager.

3.3.2 Interpret signs of device driver fault.

3.3.3 Examine ways to install device drivers.

3.3.4 Update Device driver.

3.3.5 Ensure to follow the instruction while installing.

3.3.6 Ensure to download the device driver from safe manufacture website.

3.4 Install Application software

3.4.1 State function of application software.

3.4.2 List the types of application software.

3.4.4 Differentiate between trial and licensed version.

3.4.5 Explain the function of ‘Setup’ file, ‘ReadMe’ file and ‘Serial Key’.

3.4.6 Generate product key to activate software.

3.4.7 Ensure to scan the installation media before installation.

3.4.8 Ensure proper handling of installation media.


Page:176

3.5 Format HDD(After installation of OS)

3.5.1 List file systems to format HDD/storage media.

3.5.2 Differentiate between FAT and NTFS file system.

3.5.3 Illustrate reasons to format.

3.5.4 List the types of formatting.

3.5.5 Ensure to backup important data before Format.

3.5.6 Be patient while formatting Hard disk drive.

3.6 Customize disk partition (through Disk management)

3.6.1 State function of Disk Management tools.

3.6.2 List advantages of partition HDD from disk management.

3.6.3 Indicate ways to browse disk management window.

3.6.4 Browse “disk management” tool.

3.6.5 Ensure to shrink volume from the drive other than OS containing drive.

3.6.6 Be patient while customizing disk partition.

3.7 Configure software

3.7.1 Define control panel.

3.7.2 Describe control panel options.

3.7.3 Determine ways to browse control panel.

3.7.4 Ensure to make changes on the setting.

Chapter 4: Performing PC AssemblyBy the end of class IX, students should be able to:

4.1 Identify tools, materials and equipment for computer maintenance

4.1.1 Classify tools, materials and equipment for computer maintenance.

4.1.2 Explain Electrostatic-Sensitive Device (ESD) equipment.

4.1.3 Explain Safe-working of ESD.

4.1.4 Explain precautionary ESD signs and symbols.

4.1.5 Ensure to identify the right tools for the right work.

4.2 Fix Motherboard

4.2.1 Define the motherboard.

4.2.2 Label components of the motherboard.

4.2.3 Classify types of motherboard.

Page:177

Annexes

4.2.4 Label system case.

4.2.5 List types of the system case.

4.2.6 State functions of stand-off.

4.2.7 Ensure to avoid dropping the screws on motherboard to prevent short circuits.

4.2.8 Ensure to use anti-static wristband while fixing the motherboard.

4.2.9 Ensure safe handling of tools, materials and Motherboard.

4.3 Mount Central Processing Unit (CPU)

4.3.1 Define CPU.

4.3.2 Explain CPU Frequency.

4.3.3 Categorize types of CPU.

4.3.4 Interpret CPU alignment.

4.3.5 List types of sockets.

4.3.6 Describe the effect of binding pins.

4.3.7 Ensure to align CPU on the socket after interpreting identification marks

4.3.8 Ensure to use anti-static wrist band

4.3.9 Ensure to switch off the power supply

4.3.10 Ensure to maintain Zero Insertion force(ZIF)while fixing CPU

4.4 Mount CPU fan

4.4.1 Define CPU fan.

4.4.2 Explain propose of locking CPU fan.

4.4.3 Explain computer cooling mechanisms and its function.

4.4.4 Ensure CPU fan is properly aligned and tightened.

4.4.5 Ensure proper handling of CPU fan and tools.

4.4.6 Ensure power supply is unplugged.

4.5 Fix RAM

4.5.1 List types of computer memory.

4.5.2 Explain the differences between ROM and RAM.

4.5.3 Classify types and size of RAM.

4.5.4 Ensure RAM is sited firmly.

4.5.5 Ensure retaining clips are properly locked.

4.5.6 Ensure compatible RAM is installed according to requirements.

4.5.7 Ensure handle RAM lock with care.

4.5.8 Ensure to use ant-static wrist band.


Page:178

4.6 Install Add-on cards

4.6.1 State types of expansion slot.

4.6.2 List types of PCI card used.

4.6.3 State purpose of adding cards.

4.6.4 Ensure to use antistatic wristband while installing Add-on card.

4.6.5 Ensure safely handling Add-on cards.


Chapter 4: Performing PC AssemblyBy the end of class X, students should be able to:

4.7 Install Hard disk drive (HDD)

4.7.1 State functions of HDD.

4.7.2 Explain the size and capacity of storage drive.

4.7.3 Label parts of the HDD.

4.7.4 Ensure to plug cables in designated ports.

4.7.5 Ensure to use antistatic wristband while installing HDD.

4.8 Install optical drive

4.8.1 Categorize types of optical drive.

4.8.2 Explain the jumper setting of optical drives.

4.8.3 Label the parts of optical drive.

4.8.4 Ensure to plug cables in designated port.

4.8.5 Ensure to use antistatic wrist band while installing optical drive.

4.8.6 Ensure screws are properly tightened.

4.9 Install Switch Mode Power Supply(SMPS)

4.9.1 Define SMPS.

4.9.2 Classify types of SMPS and its connectors.

4.9.3 Locate internal components of SMPS.

4.9.4 State voltage rating of SMPS connectors.

4.9.5 Ensure SMPS is connected with correct connections.


4.9.7 Ensure connections are correct and firmly fixed.

Page:179

Annexes

4.10 Configure the front panel connection

4.10.1 Define front panel.

4.10.2 List types of front panel ports connectors.

4.10.3 State the purpose of front panel connector.

4.10.4 State the function of Front panel connector.

4.10.5 Ensure to use anti-static wristband and gloves.

4.10.6 Ensure to plug the connector in the right connection.

4.11 Conduct test for PC assembly

4.11.1 List types of BIOS manufacturer and its beep codes.

4.11.2 List devices that are detected in BIOS program.

4.11.3 List inbuilt diagnostic software tools to diagnose faults.

4.11.4 Ensure to use anti-static wristband and gloves.

4.11.5 Ensure not to make any critical changes in BIOS without having knowledge.

Chapter 5: Installing peripherals devicesBy the end of class X, students should be able to:

5.1 Download device drivers using software

5.1.1 Define driver software tool.

5.1.2 State function of driver software tool.

5.1.3 List types of software tool.

5.1.4 Check service tag and serial number.

5.1.5 Ensure to browse safe websites.

5.2 Install printer

5.2.1 Define printer.

5.2.2 Explain the types of printers.

5.2.3 List types of printer cartridge.

5.2.4 Explain methods of installing the printer.

5.2.5 Ensure to connect USB/COM cable in the right port.

5.2.6 Ensure to verify print setup.

5.3 Install scanner

5.3.1 Define scanner.

5.3.2 List types of scanners.

5.3.3 Explain methods of installation.

5.3.4 Ensure to install the right utility software.


Page:180

5.4 Install projector

5.4.1 Define projector

5.4.2 List components of the projector

5.4.3 Use drilling machine.

5.4.4 Ensure VGA cable is securely tightened.

5.4.5 Ensure bracket is installed securely.

5.4.6 Ensure the screw is tightened securely into the wall.


5.5 Install barcode reader

5.5.1 Define barcode reader.

5.5.2 Explain the types of barcode readers.

5.5.3 State the functions of barcodes reader.

5.5.4 Ensure to install right utility software.

5.5.5 Ensure proper handling of a barcode reader.

MODULE 2: PERFORMING TROUBLESHOOTING OF COMPUTER SYSTEM AND DEVICES

Chapter 1: Diagnosing PC faultsBy the end of class X, students should be able to:

1.1 Check software update

1.1.1 Define software update.

1.1.2 State the purpose for updating.

1.1.3 State the differences between software upgrades and updates.

1.1.4 Browse Control Panel.

1.1.5 Be patient while updating software.

1.2 Perform system scan

1.2.1 Define computer virus.

1.2.2 List the type of viruses.

1.2.3 Explain the scanning method.

1.2.4 State the purpose of scanning.

1.2.5 Ensure to use genuine antivirus software.

Page:181

Annexes

1.3 Perform continuity test

1.3.1 Define continuity test.

1.3.2 State the purpose of testing.

1.3.3 List tools to test continuity.


1.3.5 Ensure to connect the jacks firmly and securely.

1.3.6 Ensure to use right probe in right terminal.

1.4 Diagnose boot error

1.4.1 Define boot error.

1.4.2 List the types of boot errors.

1.4.3 Explain the causes of boot error.


1.4.5 Ensure to use ESD wrist band.


Chapter 1: Diagnosing PC fault

By the end of class XI, students should be able to:

1.5 Defragment hard disk drive (HDD)

1.5.1 Define defragment.

1.5.2 State purpose of defragmentation.

1.5.3 Explain the advantages of disk defragmentation.

1.5.4 List types of software to defragment HDD.

1.5.5 State the method of defragment.

1.5.6 Ensure proper handling of materials and equipment.

1.6 Check screen

1.6.1 List specification of screen size

1.6.2 List common screen errors.

1.6.3 Explain to troubleshoot common screen error

1.6.4 Ensure to use ESD wristband while checking screen

1.6.5 Ensure proper handling of tools and materials


Page:182

1.7 Check system component voltage

1.7.1 Define Voltage

1.7.2 List electronic components with its function

1.7.3 State purpose of checking the voltage

1.7.4 Use multi-meter

1.7.5 Ensure to switch off the power while checking system component voltage

1.7.6 Ensure the prop is placed in the right terminal

1.7.7 Ensure to set the multi-meter range above rated value of components to check.

1.8 Perform troubleshooting using window inbuilt tools

1.8.1 Define window inbuilt tool

1.8.2 Define safe mode

1.8.3 List Microsoft support diagnoses tool.

1.8.4 Be patient while using window inbuilt tools

1.9 Estimate cost of repair

1.9.1 State the definition of estimation and costing

1.9.2 Explain importance of estimating and costing

1.9.3 State the types of material and their specification

1.9.4 Explain the factor determining the cost of repair

1.9.5 Ensure estimation cost is done correctly

1.9.6 Ensure to maintain work ethic and integrity while estimating the cost of repair.

Chapter 2: Rectifying software faultsBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

2.1 Install software updates

2.1.1 Categorize types of software

2.1.2 Explain the importance of software updating

2.1.3 Explain methods of updating

2.2 Repair software(Application Software)

2.2.1 Define software repair

2.2.2 Explain the purpose of repairing

2.2.3 List types of application software errors

2.2.4 Method of repairing

2.2.5 Ensure to be patient while repairing software

Page:183

Annexes

2.3 Upgrading software

2.3.1 State purpose of upgrading.

2.3.2 State benefit of upgrading software.

2.3.3 Determine software versions.

2.3.4 Ensure to install software in a primary partition.

2.4 Rectifying BSOD error

2.4.1 Explain the causes of BSOD errors.

2.4.2 State the purpose of system restore and safe mode.

2.4.3 Ensure to wear ESD wristband

2.4.4 Ensure to backup important files

2.4.5 Be patient while rectifying BSOD error

2.5 Repair OS

2.5.1 List types of recovery tools

2.5.2 State function of system recovery tools

2.5.3 Explain causes of corrupted files in OS

2.5.4 Set boot priority

2.5.5 Ensure to repair with correct OS version

Chapter 3: Rectifying PC components (Laptop/Palmtop)By the end of class XI, students should be able to:

3.1 Repair SMPS

3.1.1 State function and types of SMPS

3.1.2 List components of SMPS

3.1.3 Explain the troubleshooting of SMPS

3.1.4 State cable voltage rating of SMPS

3.1.5 Use required tools(Multi-meter, Soldering iron and screwdriver)

3.1.6 Ensure proper disposal of used electronic components

3.1.7 Ensure not to touch the tip of soldering iron

3.1.8 Ensure to return the soldering iron to its stand

3.1.9 Be patient while repairing SMPS


Page:184

3.2 Replace screen

3.2.1 Explain the troubleshooting of PC screen problem

3.2.2 List types of screen and its specification

3.2.3 Use Screen Replacement Tool Kit

3.2.4 Ensure proper disposal of waste

3.2.5 Ensure to replace the screen with the same specification

3.3 Replace the speaker

3.3.1 Explain the troubleshooting of the speaker

3.3.2 Classify types of speaker and its specification


3.3.4 Ensure to safely handle the connectors

3.4 Replace keyboard

3.4.1 Explain the troubleshooting of keyboard

3.4.2 State the specifications of keyboard

3.4.3 State the methods of replacing a keyboard

3.4.4 State reasons for keyboard damages

3.4.5 Ensure not to pull keyboard without disconnecting the cable

3.4.6 Ensure the keyboard is screwed or locked properly

3.4.7 Ensure proper handling of tools and equipment

3.5 Replace touchpad

3.5.1 Explain the troubleshooting of touchpad

3.5.2 Label the components of a laptop

3.5.3 State the specifications of touchpad connectors

3.5.4 Ensure not to pull touchpad without disconnecting the cable

3.5.5 Ensure to align touchpad with base

Chapter 3: Rectifying PC components (Laptop/Palmtop)By the end of class XI, students should be able to:

3.6 Service cooling medium

3.6.1 Explain the types of cooling medium.

3.6.2 Identify area/components for application of spray

3.6.3 State the function of the CPU fan, GPU and heat sink.

Page:185

Annexes

3.6.4 Ensure safe handling of tools and materials

3.6.5 Ensure not to apply spray on delicate components


3.6.7 Ensure not to apply excessive thermal paste on CPU

3.7 Replace motherboard

3.7.1 Explain the troubleshooting ofthe motherboard

3.7.2 Explain motherboard compatibility

3.7.3 List components of the motherboard

3.7.4 Ensure to wear ESD wristband.

3.7.5 Ensure proper disposal of used motherboard

3.7.6 Ensure to check the compatibility of the motherboard before replacing

Chapter 4: Rectifying peripheral devicesBy the end of class XI, students should be able to:

4.1 Service printer

4.1.1 State the types of printer, brand and its specification

4.1.2 Classify types of cartridge

4.1.3 State functions of cartridge

4.1.4 Explain the importance of removing protective plastic of the cartridges

4.1.5 Remove Jammed paper

4.1.6 Ensure no paper fragment are left inside

4.1.7 Ensure proper handling of equipment and materials

4.2 Service photocopy machine

4.2.1 State types of photocopy machine and specification

4.2.2 State the types of Cartridge and its functions

4.2.3 Explain the causes of paper getting jammed in photocopy machine

4.2.4 Ensure power is off before service start

4.2.5 Ensure no paper fragments are left behind

4.2.6 Ensure roller and cooper is not broken or loosen

4.2.7 Ensure cartridge is inserted


4.2.9 Ensure to avoid touching any metallic surface in the fuser area


Page:186

4.3 Service scanner

4.3.1 Categorize types of scanner and specification

4.3.2 State functions of scanner glass and Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)

4.3.3 List types of cleaning material

4.3.4 Use manual guide

4.3.5 Ensure power is off before cleaning

4.3.6 Ensure not to use hard substances to scrub or wipe the glass

4.3.7 Ensure not to apply too much force on the glass

4.3.8 Ensure not to use thinner or corrosive solvent to clean the glass surface

4.3.9 Ensure not to spill the liquid into scanner mechanism or electronic component

4.3.10 Be patient while servicing scanner


MODULE 3: PERFORMING INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION OF NETWORK

Chapter 1: Installing networkBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

1.1 Design network topology

1.1.1 Define network topology

1.1.2 List types of topology

1.1.3 List advantages and disadvantages of network topology

1.1.4 List types of network device

1.1.5 Be patient while designing a network topology

1.2 Estimate the cost of networking

1.2.1 Explain the purpose of estimating the cost

1.2.2 Estimate specification and cost of equipment and materials

1.2.3 Maintain work ethic and integrity while estimating the cost

1.3 Carryout casing and capping

1.3.1 List materials specifications for casing and capping

1.3.2 Explain the reason for casing & capping


1.3.4 Ensure to use appropriate PPE

Page:187

Annexes

1.4 Lay Network cables

1.4.1 List types of network cables

1.4.2 Identify the category of UTP cables

1.4.3 Use cable tester

1.4.4 Use Crimping tools

1.4.5 Ensure to cut the cable keeping minimum of 5cm extra from the actual length

1.5 Crimp RJ-45 connector

1.5.1 Define connector

1.5.2 List colour coding of UTP cable

1.5.3 Differentiate crossover and straight through UTP cable


1.6 Fix I/O box

1.6.1 State the function of I/O box.

1.6.2 Explain the colour coding cables for I/O box

1.6.3 Use the punching tool


1.6.5 Ensure to use appropriate PPE

1.6.6 Ensure to punch with correct colour coding

1.7 Install Switch

1.7.1 State function and parts of the network switch

1.7.2 List types of switch


1.7.4 Ensure appropriate use of PPE(Dust mask, Safety Goggles)

1.8 Install firewall device

1.8.1 Explain the function and importance of firewall

1.8.2 Identify parts of a firewall device.

1.8.3 State basic configuration of a firewall

1.8.4 Identify an appropriate location for the Installation of the firewall device

1.8.5 Ensure to choose strong passwords


Page:188

Chapter 2: Configuring network

By the end of class XII, students should be able to:

2.1 Configure modem router(Wireless Router)

2.1.1 List types of ISP connection

2.1.2 State SSID and its use

2.1.3 Explain the types of authentication

2.1.4 Explain types of encryption

2.1.5 State importance of security key

2.1.6 Understand LED light reading for:

» LAN

» WPS

» ADSL

» Power

» Internet

2.1.7 Ensure to select the strong security type

2.2 Assign Internet protocol (IP) address

2.2.1 Define IP address, gateway, DNS and subnet mask

2.2.2 Explain static and dynamic IP address

2.2.3 Classify IP address and its use

2.2.4 Expalin IP subnetting

2.2.5 Differciate public and private IP address

2.2.6 Ensure to assign a different IP address to avoid IP conflict

2.3 Configure switch

2.3.1 List specification of the network switch

2.3.2 List CLI commands

2.4.3 State purpose of configuring the switch

2.4.4 Ensure to plug cable with care

2.4 Configure network security software

2.4.1 State the reasons for configuring network security software (firewall).

2.4.2 Explain the different setting available in windows firewall

2.4.3 List the types of network security software

Page:189

Annexes

2.4.4 Ensure to select the strong security type

2.5 Perform resourse sharing

2.5.1 Explain the purpose of resourse sharing

2.5.2 Define host name, domain and work group

2.5.3 State advantages and disadvantages of resourse sharing

2.6 Document network details

2.6.1 Explain the purpose of maintaining network documentation


Chapter 3: Conducting network connectivity testBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

3.1 Check network device driver

3.1.1 Define network device driver

3.1.2 State the purpose of a network device driver

3.1.3 List alternative ways to obtain device driver

3.1.4 List error related to a network device driver

3.1.5 Ensure to use right device driver for the network card

3.2 Test cable contunuity

3.2.1 List ways to test able contunuity

3.2.2 List different types of faults.

3.2.3 Identify faulty cables through LED blinking

3.2.4 Ensure proper handling of tool and equipment

3.3 Ping IP address

3.3.1 Define ping command in networking

3.3.2 State the purpose of the ping command

3.3.3 State the different types of network command and function

3.3.4 Ensure safe handling of tools and equipment


Page:190

MODULE 4: PERFORMING MAINTENANCE OF NETWORK

Chapter 1: Diagnosing Network FaultsBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

1.1 Check data transmission

1.1.1 Define data transmission

1.1.2 List data transmission rate

1.1.3 List ways to check internet bandwidth

1.1.4 Ensure safe handling of materials and equipment

1.2 Check signal strength

1.2.1 Define network strength

1.2.2 List different ways to check network signal strength

1.2.3 State purpose of checking network signal strength.

1.2.4 Ensure safe handling of tools and equipment

1.3 Test Device port

1.3.1 Explain the puprpose of port

1.3.2 State the application of talnet connectivity TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) port

Chapter 2: Carrying out maintenanceBy the end of class XII, students should be able to:

2.1 Prepare maintenance plan

2.1.1 Define maintenance plan

2.1.2 State the importance of network maintenance plan

2.1.3 State the importance of maintenance checklist

2.1.4 State the activities to be considered before maintaining the network

2.1.5 Ensure to keep the checklist in a safe place

2.2 Backup network data

2.2.1 Define network data backup

2.2.2 State the importance of data backup

2.2.3 List types of software to backup data

2.2.4 Ensure to use appropriate backup software

Page:191

Annexes

2.3 Upgrade network software

2.3.1 Define network software

2.3.2 State function of Network Operating System (NOS)

2.3.3 List network software (Operating System)

2.3.4 List ways to upgrade a network operating system

2.3.5 Differentiate Network OS(NOS) and desktop OS

2.3.6 Be patient while upgrading network software

2.4 Upgrade network security software

2.4.1 Explain network security

2.4.2 Define network security software

2.4.3 List types of network security software

2.4.4 List importance of network security software

2.4.5 Ensure network security software is up-to-date

2.5 Rectify signal strength

2.5.1 Explain the causes of signal fluctuations

2.5.2 Explain the method of rectifying WIFI signal

2.5.3 Ensure to keep wireless router in a proper location in coverage of network signal

2.6 Reset modem router

2.6.1 Define Wi-Fi protect setup (WPS)

2.6.2 State the purpose of resetting modem router

2.6.3 Differentiate hard from soft reset

2.6.4 Explain default IP address of modem router

2.6.5 Ensure to press the reset button with the required force.

2.7 Prepare maintenance report

2.7.1 State the importance of recording maintenance activities

2.7.2 Explain the challenges faced by the network administrator

2.7.3 Be patient while preparing a maintenance report


Page:192

Page:193

Annexes

ANNEX VIII: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR TSEMZO

(TAILORING) ༼ཚམ་བཟའ་ཆས་ཚན་ར་གཞང་ག་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས།༽A. TSEMZO LESSONS

༼ཚམ་བཟའ་ཆས་ཚན་ར་གཞང་ག་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས།༽སབ་རམ་ སངཚན།

(Module)སན་ཚན།

(Chapter)

སབ་སང་གནད་དན་གཙ་བ།(Lessons)

ནང་སང་ཆ་ཚད།

ལག་སང་ཆ་ཚད།

དས་ཡན་ཆ་ཚད་

ཡངས་བསམས

༩

དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན།

སན་ཚན་དང་པ།

ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན།

༡.༡ 5s ག་ར་དན་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན།

(5s principle) ༡ ༢

༨༡.༢ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན། (OHS) ༠.༣༠ ༢

༡.༣ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན། (PPE) ༠.༣༠ ༢

སན་ཚན་གཉས་པ།

འཕལ་ཆས་ཉམས་བཅ ས་འབད་ན།

༢.༡ འཕལ་ཚམ་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན། ༢ ༩༧

༡༤༤༢.༢ འཕལ་ཁབ་སམ་སག་འབད་ན། ༡ ༣༡༢.༣ འཕལ་སམ་བགས་ན། ༠.༡༥ .༤༥༢༤. འཕལ་ཐག་ཐད་ཕང་བཀལ་ན ༠.༣༠ ༥.༥༢༥. འཕལ་གཟར་བསམ་ན་དང་ཕ་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༥.༥

སན་ཚན་གསམ་པ།

ག་སག་འབད་ན།

༣.༡ ས་ས་ཉན་སང་དང་ལནམ་ས་འཚལ་ན། ༡ -

༢༤༣.༢ ར་ཆས་དང་ཅ་ཆས་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ན། ༢ -༣.༣ དཀ་ར་ག་ཚད་ལན་ན། ༡.༣༠ ༤.༣༠༣.༤ དཀ་ར་ག་དམ་བཟ་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༢.༣༠༣.༥ དཀ་ར་ག་ཁ་སག་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༢.༣༠༣.༦ དཀ་ར་ག་མ་བཟ་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༥.༣༠༣.༧ འཇའ་ད་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༢.༣༠


Page:194

༡༠

སན་ཚན་བཞ་པ།

དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན།

༤.༡ སདཔ་ཚས་གཞ་སག་ན་ ༠.༡༠ -

༡༦༧༤.༢ སདཔ་དམ་ལད་ལ་ན། ༠.༡༥ ༢༤.༣ ས་ཚམ་/ལད་ཚམ་རབ་ན། ༠.༡༥ ༥༤.༤ གམ་ཚད་བཀལ་ན། ༠.༡༥ ༥༤.༥ དཀ་ར་མ་མཐད་རབ་ན། ༠.༢༥ ༥༤.༦ དཀ་ར་ས་སལ་རབ་ན། ༠.༡༥ ༡༨༤.༧ འཇའ་བཀལ་ན། ༠.༢༥ ༧༧༤.༨ ཁ་ཤ་ཁ་སམ་ག་དཀ་ར་དང་པང་ཐགས་དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན། ༡ ༥༢

སན་ཚན་ལ་པ།

མཇག་བས་ན།

༥.༡ དབར་ས་རབ་ན། ༠.༡༥ ༣.༣༠

༩༥.༢ ཧམ་ཆ་བཏན་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༠.༢༥༥.༣ བལབ་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༠.༢༠༥.༤ ཚམ་ག་ལན་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༠.༣༠༥.༥ ཚམ་ཁང་རན་སང་འབད་ན། ༠.༣༠ ༡

༡༡

དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན། སན་ཚན་བཞ་པ།

འཕ་བཐད་དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན་སང་བ།

༤.༩ ཁ་ཐགས་དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན། ༣ ༧༥ ༡༤༤

༤.༡༠ དང་སང་ག་དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན། ༦ ༥༠

སད་གས་འན་འཇ་ དང་དངལ་ཁག་བཙམ་ན།


སད་གས་ག་སག་འབད་ད་བཙམ་ན།

༡.༡ སད་གས་ཀ་ར་ཆས་དང་ཅ་ཆས་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ན། ༣ ༡ ༨༨༡.༢ སད་གས་ཚད་ལན་ཏ་བཟ་བཀད་འབད་ད་ད་ན། ༡༩ ༢༦༡.༣ སད་གས་བཙམ་ན། ༡༤ ༢༥


ཤན་སར་སད་ག ས་/ལག་རན བཙམ་ན།

༢.༡ ཤན་འཇར་སད་གས་ཚད་ལན་ཏ་ད་ན། ༢ ༧ ༣༤

༢.༢ ཤན་འཇར་སད་གས་བཙམ་ན། ༢ ༡༣

༢.༣ ལག་རན་ད་ས་བཙམ་ན། ༢ ༨

༡༢

སན་ཚན་གསམ་པ་

འན་འཇ་ག་སག་འབད་ད ་བཙམ་ན།

༣.༡ འན་འཇ་ག་ར་ཆས་དང་ཅ་ཆས་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ན། ༥ ༡ ༡༤༣༣.༢ འན་འཇ་ཚད་ལན་ཏ་བཟ་བཀད་འབད་ད་ན། ༡༢ ༣༠༣.༣ འན་འཇ་བཙམ་ན། ༡༥ ༨༠


པ་ས་སད་དང་དངལ་ཁག་

བཙམ་ན།་(Pencil་case/bag)

༤.༡ པ་ས་སད་དང་དངལ་ཁག་བཟ་ན་ག་ར་ཆ་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ན།

༥ ༡ ༡༣༣

༤.༢ པ་ས་སད་ཚད་ལན་ཏ་བཟ་བཀད་འབད་ད་ད་ན། ༦ ༣༠

༤.༣ པ་ས་སད་བཙམ་ན། ༨ ༦༣

Page:195

Annexes

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES

སབ་རམ་ར་ར་བཞན་ག་སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།

B.1 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS IX

སབ་རམ་དག་པའ་སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།

སན་ཚན་དང་པ་ ཉན་སང་ག་སར།

སན་ཚན་དང་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་དག་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༡.༡ 5s ག་ར་དན་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན། (5s principle)

༡.༡.༡ 5s ག་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༡.༢ 5s ག་ར་དན་སར་ལས་བཤད་པ་རབ་ཚགས།༡.༡.༣ ག་ར་དན་སར་ལས་བཤད་པ་རབ་ཚགས།༡.༡.༤ 5s ག་ར་དན་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༡.༢ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན།(OHS)

༡.༢བ་དཕའ་ག་ལ ༡.སན་དང་ཉན་སང་ག་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡བ་དཕའ་ག་ལ ༢.༢.སན་དང་ཉན་སང་གལ་ཅན་བར་འཇག་བཤད་ཚགས།༡་ལ་ངན་ས་ས་འས་དབའ་ལ ༤.༢.ག་བར་ག་རན་ངས་འཛན་འབད་དག།

༡.༣ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན། (PPE)

༡.༣.༡ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་སར་ལས་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༡.༣.༢ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ཐ་བཀད་ཚགས།༡.༣.༣ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༡.༣.༤ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

སན་ཚན་གཉས་པ། འཕལ་ཆས་ཉམས་བཅས་འབད་ན།

སན་ཚན་གཉས་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་དག་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༢.༡ འཕལ་ཚམ་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན།༢.༡.༡ འཕལ་ཚམ་ག་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡.༢ འཕལ་ཚམ་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡.༣ ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཚགས།


Page:196

༢.༡.༤ འཕལ་ཚམ་ག་འཁར་ལ་དང་རང་ཁབ་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༡.༥ ཀང་ཀ་ག་སདཔ་དཀ་ཚགས།༢.༡.༦ ཀང་ཀ་སད་ཚང་ནང་བཙགས་ཚགས།༢.༡.༧ སད་ཚང་འཕལ་ཚམ་ག་བཙགས་ཚགས།༢.༡.༨ འཕལ་ཚམ་ག་ལག་སད་བར་ཚགས།༢.༡.༩ འག་སད་འཕལ་སགས་ག་སན་ཚགས།༢.༡.༡༠ འཕལ་ཆས་དང་ཁབ་ཚ་ལག་ལན་ལགས་ཤམ་འབད་འཐབ་དག།

༢.༢ འཕལ་ཁབ་སམ་སག་འབད་ན།༢.༢.༡ འཕལ་ཁབ་ཀ་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༢.༢ འཕལ་ཚམ་ག་ཁབ་རབ་མདན་མ་འཛལ་བ་བཙགས་ཚགས།༢.༢.༣ འཕལ་ཁབ་སམ་སག་འབད་དག།

༢.༣ འཕལ་སམ་བགས་ན།༢.༣.༡ འཕལ་སམ་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༣.༢ འཕལ་སམ་བགས་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༣.༣ འཕལ་སམ་བགས་པའ་སབས་ཚད་ལན་ས་བགས་ཚགས།༢.༣.༤ འཕལ་སམ་འད་ཉན་ལར་ལ་འག་མ་བཙགས་པའ་ཧ་མ་ཚར་ར་བགས་དག།

༢.༤ འཕལ་ཐག་ཐད་ཕང་བཀལ་ན།༢.༤.༡ འཕལ་ཐག་ཕང་བཀལ་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༤.༢ འཕལ་ཚམ་ག་འཁར་ལ་གང་འག་གཉས་ཐད་ཕང་ཚགས།༢.༥ འཕལ་གཟར་བསམ་ན་དང་ཕ་ན།༢.༥.༡ འཕལ་གཟར་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༥.༢ འཕལ་གཟར་བསམ་ལད་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༥.༣ འཕལ་གཟར་བསམ་ན་དང་ཕ་བའ་སབས་ཚལ་མཐན་ས་འབད་དག།

Page:197

Annexes

སན་ཚན་གསམ་པ། དཀ་ར་ག་སག་འབད་ན།

སན་ཚན་གསམ་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་བཅ་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༣.༡ ས་ས་ཉན་སང་དང་ལནམ་ས་བཞག་ན།༣.༡.༡ ཅ་ཆས་དང་ལན་པའ་ཉན་སང་བཤད་ཚགས།།༣.༡.༢ ཚང་མགན་པའ་ཉན་སང་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༡.༣ བསམ་སད་ལས་བརན་པའ་ཉན་སང་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༡.༤ ག་བར་སན་བཅས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༣.༢ ར་ཆས་དང་ཅ་ཆས་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ན།༣.༢.༡ དཀ་རའ་ར་ཆ་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས།༣.༢.༢ སདཔ་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ཚགས།༣.༢.༣ སས་ཚད་དབ་ཞབ་འབད་ཚགས།༣.༢.༤ ཐན་རམ་སབ་སག་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།

༣.༣ དཀ་ར་ཚད་ལན་ན།༣.༣.༡ ཚད་ལན་ག་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༣.༢ འཇལ་ཐག་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཐངས།༣.༣.༣ ས་སག་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཐངས།༣.༣.༤. གཞ་རན་རས་ཁ་བཤད་ཚགས།

» ཕབ་ར། » བག་རས། » དག་འཐབ། » བསམ་རས། » བར་ཆ་ཕབ་ཚགས།

༣.༣.༥ ར་ཚད་དང་རང་ཚད་ལན་ཚགས།༣.༣.༦ ཚད་རགས་བཀལ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༣.༧ འབལ་བ་དང་ག་བར་སད་ཚགས།༣.༣.༨ ཐག་ཚད་ཐབ་ཐངས་དང་འཁལ་ལན་དག།༣.༣.༩ ར་ཆས་ཚད་འཛན་ས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།༣.༣.༡༠ ཚང་མགན་པའ་གཟགས་ལས་ ཚད་ཚལ་དང་ལནམ་ས་ལན་དག།


Page:198

༣.༤ དཀ་ར་ག་དམ་བཟ་ན།༣.༤.༡ དམ་ག་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༤.༢ ཚང་མགན་པའ་དམ་ཚད་ལངས་ཧང་བལ་ཚགས།༣.༤.༣ དམ་ཚང་ཧང་བལ་ཚགས།༣.༤.༤ དམ་མ་ལངས་པ་ཅན་ལངས་ཐབས་བཟ་དག།

༣.༥ དཀ་ར་ག་ཁ་སག་ན།༣.༥.༡ ཁ་སག་ཐངས་གལ་ཆ་ཚལ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༥.༢ ཁ་མག་མཇག་བལ་ཚགས།༣.༥.༣ མ་བཙམ་པའ་གང་ལས་ཁ་ལ་རག་འབད་ད་ཚང་མགན་པ་དང་མཉམ་འབལ་འབད་དག།

༣.༦ དཀ་ར་མ་བཟ་ན།༣.༦.༡ མ་ག་ག་དན་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༦.༢ མ་ག་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས།༣.༦.༣ ར་ཚད་དང་རང་ཚད་འཇལ་ཚགས།

༣.༧ འཇའ་ད་ན།༣.༧.༡ འཇའ་ད་ནའ་ག་རམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༧.༢ འཇའ་ཚས་གཞ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༧.༣ འཇའ་ག་ཚད་གཞ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༣.༧.༤ དབར་ས་རབ་ས་འཇའ་བལབ་ཤལ་བཟ་ན་དང་ཐག་འཐན་ཐངས།༣.༧.༥ འཇའ་ག་ཕ་ནང་བལ་ཚགས།༣.༧.༦ གམ་ཙ་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཐངས།༣.༧.༧ འཇའ་མཐད་ཐངས།༣.༧.༨ ཚང་མགན་པའ་དགས་མཁ་དང་འཁལ་འཇའ་ག་ཚད་གཞ་གཏང་དག།༣.༧.༩ འཇའ་ད་བའ་སབས་ ས་ད་ས་ད་དག།

Page:199

Annexes

B.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X

སན་ཚན་བཞ་པ་ དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན།སན་ཚན་བཞ་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་བཅ་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༤.༡ སདཔ་ཚས་གཞ་སག་ན།༤.༡.༡ སདཔ་ཚས་གཞ་སག་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༡.༢ སདཔ་ཚས་གཞ་དབ་བ་ཕ་ས་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༤.༡.༣ སདཔ་ཚས་གཞ་དང་འཁལ་ཏ་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།༤.༡.༤ སདཔ་ག་ར་ཆས་ཚ་ ཚལ་མཐན་ས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༤.༢ སདཔ་སམ་ལད་བལ་ན།༤.༢.༡ འག་སདཔ་དང་ལག་སདཔ་གཉས་དམ་ལད་སམ་ཚགས།༤.༢.༢ ཚམ་རབ་པའ་སབས་སདཔ་གང་འག་གཉས་དམ་ལད་ཕལ་ཕལ་རང་དབ་ཞབ་འབད་དག།

༤.༣ ས་ཚམ་/ལས་ཚམ་རབ་ན།༤.༣.༡ ལས་ཚམ་ག་ཕ་ནང་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས།༤.༣.༢ ལས་ཚམ་ག་བཤད་པ་རབ་ཚགས།༤.༣.༣ ལས་ཚམ་ག་ཁབ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༤.༣.༤ ལས་ཚམ་ལག་དབ་ཀ་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༣.༥ ལས་ཚམ་ག་རང་ཁབ་དང་འཁར་ལ་རབ་མདན་བཏང་ཐངས།༤.༣.༦ ལས་ཚམ་ག་ཁབ་རབ་མདན་མ་འཛལ་བར་བཙགས་ཚགས།༤.༣.༧ ལས་ཚམ་ག་སདཔ་ལམ་པ་གསམ་བར་ཚགས།༤.༣.༨ ལས་ཚམ་སདཔ་བཙག་ནའ་སམ་པ་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཚགས།༤.༣.༩ འཕལ་ཆས་དང་ཁབ་ཚ་ལག་ལན་ལགས་ཤམ་ས་འཐབ་དག།༤.༣.༡༠ སདཔ་བར་བའ་སབས་ལད་ལད་འབད་ར་དག།

༤.༤ གམ་ཚད་བཀལ་ན།༤.༤.༡ གམ་ཚད་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༤.༤.༢ གམ་ཚད་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཚགས།༤.༤.༣ གམ་ཚད་ཀ་ཨང་རགས་བད་སག་བཀལ་ཚགས།༤.༤.༤ ར་ཆས་དང་འཁལ་བའ་ཚམ་ག་གམ་ཚད་བད་སག་འབད་དག།

༤.༥ དཀ་ར་མ་མཐད་རབ་ན།༤.༥.༡ མ་ག་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས།

» འཕལ་ཐགས།


Page:200

» པང་ཐགས། » ཀར་རང་། » མ་ཏག་ཅནམ།

༤.༥.༢ མ་མཐད་རབ་དག་པའ་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༥.༣ དམ་(བང་ཐག)དབ་བ་ར་ར་ལ་མ་ མ་འདཝ་བཟ་ཐངས་ཀ་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།

༤.༦ དཀ་ར་ས་སལ་རབ་ན།༤.༦.༡ ས་སལ་རབ་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༦.༢ ས་སལ་རབ་ཐངས་ཀ་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས།༤.༦.༣ མ་ག་ཚས་གཞ་དང་འཁལ་ཏ་ས་སལ་ག་སདཔ་ཚས་གཞ་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།༤.༦.༤ ས་ཚལ་མཐན་ས་སལ་དག།

༤.༧ འཇའ་བཀལ་ན།༤.༧.༡ འཇའ་བཀལ་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༧.༢ འཇའ་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༧.༣ འཇའ་བཙམ་ནའ་ག་རམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༧.༤ འཇའ་བཀལ་ནའ་ཚད་གཞ་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༧.༥ འཇའ་ག་སང་ལད་རན་ཏག་ཏ་ས་བཀལ་དག།

༤.༨ ཁ་ཤ་ཁ་སམ་ག་དཀ་ར་དང་པང་ཐགས་དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན། ༤.༨.༡ ཁ ཤ་ཁ་སམ་ར་ཆའ་སར་ལས་བཤད་པ་རབ་ཚགས། ༤.༨.༢ པང་ཐགས་ཀ་ ར་ཆའ་སར་ལས་བཤད་པ་རབ་ཚགས། ༤.༨.༣ ཁ ཤ་ཁ་སམ་ར་ཆའ་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས། ༤.༨.༤ པང་ཐགས་ཀ་ར་ཆའ་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས།

སན་ཚན་ལ་པ་ མཇག་བས་ན།སན་ཚན་ལ་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་བཅ་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༥.༡ དབར་ས་རབ་ན།༥.༡.༡ དབར་ས་རབ་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༡.༢ ལག་དབ་ཀ་ག་དན་ལན་ཏ་དབར་ས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཐངས།༥.༡.༣ དབར་ས་ལས་བརན་པའ་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

Page:201

Annexes

༥.༢ ཧམ་ཆ་བཏན་ན།༥.༢.༡ ཧམ༌ཆ༌བཏན༌དག༌པའ༌དགས༌པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༢.༢ སདཔ༌ར༌ བཏགས༌ཚགས།

༥.༣ བལབ་ན།༥.༣.༡ ལབ༌དག༌པའ༌དགས༌པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༣.༢ དཀ༌ར༌བལབ༌ཐངས།

» གཉས༌ལབ། » གསམ༌ལབ། » བཞ༌ལབ། » དག༌ལབ། » བརད༌ལབ།

༥.༤ ཚམ་ག་ལན་ན།༥.༤.༡ སན༌རས༌སན༌ཚགས

» ལས༌མ༌འཐས། » ཁང༌འཐས། » མ༌ཁལ། » ཆ༌ཁལ།

༥.༤.༢ ར༌ཆས༌དང༌ཅ༌ཆས༌ཀ༌རན༌གང༌དང་བདན་ག་གང་ཚད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༤.༣ ག༌འཐས༌བསར༌ཞབ༌འབད༌ཚགས།༥.༤.༤ ཐ༌བཀད༌འབད༌ཚགས།༥.༤.༥ བཙམ་ག་ལན་ཐག་འབར༌རགས༌སད༌ལན་དང་འབལ་བའ་ཁ་སབ་དག།༥.༤.༦ བཙམ༌ག་དང་ཚང་མགན་པའ་ཁ་བང༌སན༌གསལ༌སང༌ཤང༌སབ་དག།

༥.༥ ཚམ་ཁང་རན་སང་འབད་ན།༥.༥.༡ ཚམ༌ཁང༌རན༌སང༌འབད༌དག༌པའ༌དགས༌པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༥.༢ མཐན༌རན༌ཉམས༌བཅས༌དང༌བསར༌གས༌འབད༌ཚགས།༥.༥.༣ ཚམ༌ཁང༌དང༌མཐའ༌འཁར༌གཙང༌ས༌བཞག༌ཚགས།༥.༥.༤ ཅ༌ཆས༌དང༌ར༌ཆས༌ཚ༌རང༌སའ༌ས༌ས༌ནང༌བད༌ཞབ༌རབ༌ས༌བཞག༌ཚགས།༥.༥.༥ ཅ༌ཆས༌དང༌ར༌ཆས༌ཀ༌རགས༌ཉན༌སང༌དང༌ལནམ༌ས༌བཞག༌དག།༥.༥.༦ ང༌རགས༌ཨང༌ཚ༌ཚལ༌མཐན༌ས༌བཞག༌དག།༥.༥.༧ ས༌བསམ༌ན༌དང༌ཕ༌ནའ༌དས༌ཚད༌གཏན༌འཁལ༌བཟ༌དག།༥༨.༥. འཕལ་ཚམ་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཐག་ལས་གན་ཆས་བཙམ་ན་ལ་གཡག་ལ་ས་བ་ལན་དག།


Page:202

B.3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI

སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཅག་པའ་སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།སན་ཚན་བཞ་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་ སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཅག་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།བཅ་པའ་འཕ་སན་ཚན་བཞ་པ། འཕ་བཐད་དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན་སང་བ།༤.༩ ཁ་ཐགས་དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན། ༤.༩.༡ ཁ་ཐགས་ཀ་ར་ཆའ་སར་ལས་བཤད་པ་རབ་ཚགས། ༤.༩.༢ ཁ་ཐགས་དཀ་ར་ག་ ར་ཆའ་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས།

༤.༡༠ དང་སང་ག་དཀ་ར་བཙམ་ན། ༤.༡༠.༡ དང་སང་ག་དཀ་རའ་སར་ལས་བཤད་པ་རབ་ཚགས། ༤.༡༠.༢ དཀ་ར་ག་ ཧག་བཙགས་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས། ༤.༡༠.༣ ཚད་གཞ་དང་འཁལ་ བལབ་ཚམ་བཟ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༤.༡༠.༤ བལབ་ཚམ་བཟ་ན་འད་ཚང་མགན་པའ་ གཟགས་ཚད་ལས་ལན་དག།

སན་ཚན་དང་པ་ སད་གས་ག་སག་འབད་ད་བཙམ་ན།སན་ཚན་དང་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་ སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཅག་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།༡.༡ ར་ཆས་དང་ཅ་ཆས་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ན། ༡.༡.༡ སད་གའ་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༡.༢ སད་གའ་ར་ཆས་དང་ཅ་ཆས་ཀ་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས། ༡.༡.༣ སས་ཚད་དབ་ཞབ་འབད་ཚགས། ༡.༢ སད་གས་ཚད་ལན་ བཟ་བཀད་འབད་ད་ད་ན།

༡.༢.༡ ར་ཕང་བཀལ་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༢.༢ ཐག་ཚད་ཐབ་ཐངས་དང་འཁལ་ཚད་ལན་ཏ་ད་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༢.༣ བཟ་བཀད་འབད་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༢.༤ མ་ག་ར་དང་ཁ་བལ་ས་ད་ཐངས་སར་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༢.༥ གང་ག་ཚད་གཞ་སར་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༢.༦ གང་སག་ཐངས་དང་བལབ་ས་ད་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༢.༧ ཕ་དང་ག་ཚད་གཞ་དང་དབབས་བཏན་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།

Page:203

Annexes

༡.༢.༨ ཕ་དང་དང་ ཕ་དང་ག་ཁ་ཚ་ད་ཚར་ཞནམ་ལས་ མཐའམ་ཚ་ ལས་ཚམ་རབ་དག།

༡.༢.༩ སད་གས་མ་ མ་ད་བའ་ཧ་མ་ཚད་བཀལ་ཐངས་ དབབས་བཟ་ཐངས་ ཁ་སགས་ཐངས་ ར་ཐང་ཐངས་ ཚ་ག་ཁད་ཆས་སམས་ཁར་ཚང་དག།་

༡.༣ སད་གས་བཙམ་ན། ༡.༣.༡ སད་གས་ལས་ཚམ་རབ་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་དང་གམ་ཚད་སམ་ཐངས་སར་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༣.༢ མཇག་ག་ཚད་གཞ་སམ་མཐད་དང་མཇག་བལབ་རབ་ཐངས་སར་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༣.༣ གང་རབ་མདན་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་གང་བཀལ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡.༣.༤ ཕ་དང་ཁ་ཕ་ནང་སག་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་དང་བཙམ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། སན་ཚན་གཉས་པ་ ཤན་སར་སད་གས/ལག་རན་ བཙམ་ན།སན་ཚན་གཉས་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཅག་པ་ཚ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༢.༡ ཤན་འཇར་སད་གས་ཚད་ལན་ཏ་ད་ན། ༢.༡.༡ གང་བཀལ་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས། ༢.༡.༢ མ་ག་དབ་བ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས། ༢.༡.༣ ཤན་འཇར་སད་གས་ཚདགཞ་སར་བཤད་ཚགས།

༢.༢ ཤན་འཇར་སད་གས་བཙམ་ན། ༢.༢.༡ མ་མཐད་རབ་དག་པའ་སར་བཤད་ཚགས། ༢.༢.༢ ཚམ་ཕང་ཧང་སར་བཤད་ཚགས།

༢.༣ ལག་རན་ད་ས་བཙམ་ན། ༢.༣.༡ ལག་རན་བཟ་བཀད་འབད་ད་ད་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༢.༣.༢ ལག་རན་བཙམ་ཚགས།

སན་ཚན་གསམ་པ་ འན་འཇ་ག་སག་འབད་ད་བཙམ་ན།སན་ཚན་གསམ་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཉས་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།༣.༡ ར་ཆས་དང་ཅ་ཆས་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ན། ༣.༡.༡ འན་འཇའ་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༣.༡.༢ འན་འཇའ་ར་ཆ་དང་ཅ་ཆས་ཀ་དབ་བ་ཕ་ཚགས། ༣.༡.༣ འན་འཇ་ག་ཆ་ཤས་དང་ཚད་གཞ་སར་བཤད་ཚགས།


Page:204

༣.༢ འན་འཇ་ཚད་ལན༌ཏ་བཟ་བཀད་འབད་ད་ན། ༣.༢.༡ མ་ག་ཚད་ལན་ཐངས་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༣.༢.༢ གང་ག་དགས་པ་དང་ཚད་ལན་ཏ་ད་ཐངས་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༣.༢.༣ ཕ་དང་དང་ ཕ་དང་ཁ་ག་ཚད་ལན་ཐངས་སར་བཤད་ཚགས། ༣.༢.༤ ཚང་མགན་པའ་གཟགས་ཚད་དང་ཡང་ན་ དཔ་ཚད་ལས་ལན་དག།

༣.༣ འན་འཇ་བཙམ་ན། ༣.༣.༡ འན་འཇ་ག་ཕ་དང་བཙམ་ཐངས་སར་བཤད་ཚགས། ༣.༣.༢ མ་ག་ཕ་དང་སགས་ཏ་བཙམ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༣.༣.༣ གང་བཀལ་ཏ་ས་སལ་རབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༣.༣.༤ འན་འཇ་མ་ མ་ད་བའ་ཧ་མ་ཚད་བཀལ་ཐངས་ དབབས་བཟ་ཐངས་ ཁ་སགས་ཐངས་ ར་ཐང་ཐངས་ཚ་ ག་ཁད་ཆས་སམས་ཁར་ཚང་དག།

B.4 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII

སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཉས་པའ་སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།སན་ཚན་ བཞ་པ ་ པ་ས་སད་དང་དངལ་ཁག་བཙམ་ན། (Pencil case/bag, Gents/Ladies Purse)

སན་ཚན་ བཞ་པ་ མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཉས་པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༤.༡ པ་ས་སད་དང་དངལ་ཁག་བཟ་ན་ག་ར་ཆ་མཁ་སབ་འབད་ན། ༤.༡.༡ པ་ས་སད་ཀ་ ར་ཆའ་ངས་འཛན་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།

༤.༢ ཚད་ལན་བཟ་བཀད་འབད་ད་ད་ན། ༤.༢.༡ བཟ་བཀད་འབད་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས། ༤.༢.༢ དགས་མཁ་དང་འཁལ་བཟ་བཀད་འབད་ད་ད་ཚགས།

༤.༣ པ་ས་སད་བཙམ་ན། ༤.༣.༡ སལ་བཀལ་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་དང་ སལ་སམ་ཏག་ཏ་འབད་བཀལ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༤.༣.༢ ཤབ་ཤབ་བཙགས་དག་པའ་དགས་པ་དང་ ཤབ་ཤབ་བཙགས་ཏ་བཙམ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༤.༣.༣ མཐའམ་གཉས་ཀ་སར་སརམ་བཙགས་ཏ་བཙམ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།

Page:205

Annexes

ANNEX IX: LESSONS AND LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR PAINTING (SHING TSHOEN) ༼ཤང་ཚན་ ཆས་ཚན་ར་གཞང་ག་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས།༽

A. SHING TSHOEN LESSONS ༼ཤང་ཚན་ག་ ཆས་ཚན་ར་གཞང་༽སབ་རམ་དག་པའ་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས།

སབ་རམ། སང་ཚན། སན་ཚན། གནད་དན་གཙ་བ། Lessons ནང་སང་།་Theory

ལག་སང་།Practical

དས་ཚད་

༩

སང་ཚན་དང་པ།མ་ཏག་རགས་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན་དང་ཚན་སར་ན།

སན་ཚན་དང་པ།ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན༌དང༌ཉན༌སང༌ལག༌ལན༌འཐབ༌ན།

༡.༡ 5s ག་ར་དན་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡

༥༡.༢ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན།་་་་(OHS)

༠.༥ ༡

༡.༣ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན། (PPE)༠.༥ ༡.༥

སན་ཚན་གཉས་པ།མ་ཏག་ག་རགས་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

༢.༡ སན་ཙ་མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༣

༧༤

༢.༢ གསལཝ་མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༥༢.༣ མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༥༢.༤ ལགས་པད་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༥༢.༥ པད་མག་ལ་མ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༥༢.༦ སས་ར་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༣༢.༧ ཁ་ཚམ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༣༢.༨ ཀང་ཀ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༥༢.༩ གག་ལ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༥༢.༡༠ ལ་འདབ་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༨༢.༡༡ སབ་ཅང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༣༢.༡༢ མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་ཡངས་རགས་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༨

སན་ཚན་གསམ་པ།པ་ཏ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

༣.༡ པ་ཏ་མག་གསམ་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༦

༥༠༣.༢ པ་ཏ་བདན་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༢༣.༣ ནར་འཛན་པ་ཏ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༨༣.༤ ཤང་ལ་པ་ཏ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༠

སན་ཚན་བཞ་པ།ས་ཚན་སར་ན།

༤.༡ ར་བའ་ཚན་བཞ་སར་ན། ༠.༥ ༢༥

༤.༢ ཡན་ལག་ཚན་སཝ་སར་ན། ༠.༥ ༢སན་ཚན་ལ་པ།མ་ཏག་དང་པ་ཏ་ཚ་ ཚན་བཏང་ན།

༥.༡ སན་ཙ་མ་ཏག་དང་མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ཚན་བཏང་ན།

༡

༡༡

༤༢

༥.༢ ཀང་ཀ་ ཚན་བཏང་ན། ༣༥.༣ པད་མ་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༦༥.༤ ཁ་ཚམ་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༣༥.༥ མ་ཏག་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༡༢༥.༦ པ་ཏ་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༦


Page:206

སབ་རམ་བཅ་པའ་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས།སབ་རམ། སང་ཚན། སན་ཚན གནད་དན་གཙ་བ། ནང་སང་། ་

Theoryལག ་ས ང ་ ། ་Practical

ཚད།

༡༠

སང་ཚན་གཉས་པ།

མཆ ད ་རས་རགས་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན་དང་ ཚན་སར་ན།


རས་ཤང་སང་ན།

༡.༡ ཁ་ཤ་སང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡

༨༡.༢ ཀ་ར་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༡.༣ བརར་ཅ་རབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༤.༥


ན ར་བ་ཆ་བདན་ག ་ར ་མ ་འབ་ན།

༢.༡ བས་རའ་ར་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༥

༡༠༣

༢.༢ གང་ཆན་མཆཝ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༢.༣ བ་རའ་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤.༥༢.༤ སངའ་སའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༢.༥ གས་ཆན་སང་རལ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༢.༦ རལ་པའ་སན་རན་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༢.༧ བཙན་མའ་སན་རན་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤

སན་ཚན་གསམ་པ།

ཟངས་ཚན་སར་ན།

༣.༡ ར་བའ་ཚན་དག་སར་ན། ༠.༥ ༣

༦༣.༢ ཟངས་ཚན་ག་སཝ་སར་ན། ༠.༥ ༢


ན ར ་བ ་ཆ ་བདན ་གསམ་མདངས་བཏང་ན།

༤.༡ རས་ཤང་ར་ག་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༦

༥༩༤.༡ ནར་བ་ཆ་བདན་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༥༢

དས་ཚད་ཡངས་བསམས། ༣༥༢

Page:207

Annexes

སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཅག་པའ་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས།སབ་རམ། སང་ཚན། སན་ཚན གནད་དན་གཙ་བ། ནང་སང་། ་

Theoryལ ག ་ ས ང ་ ། ་Practical

ཚད།

༡༡


མཆད་རས་རགས་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན་དང་ ཚན་སར་ན།

སན་ཚན་༥་པ།

བཀས་རགས་བརད་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

༥.༡ གདགས་ཀ་ ར་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༢༠

༡༥༧

༥.༢ གསར་ཉ་ག་ར་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༩༥.༣ དང་དཀར་ག་ ར་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༩༥.༤ པད་ག་ར་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༩༥.༥ བམ་པ་ག་ར་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༩༥.༦ དཔལ་ཡབ་ཀ་ར་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༩༥.༧ རལ་མཚན་ག་ར་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༩༥.༨ འཁར་ལ་ག་ར་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ད་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༩

སན་ཚན་དན་ཚན་༦་པ།

གབ་ཚན་སར་ན།

༦.༡ གབ་ཚན་ ར་བའ་ཚན་སར་ན། ༠.༥ ༤༠༩༦.༢ གབ་ཚན་སཝ་ སར་ན།། ༠.༥ ༤

སན་ཚན་༧་པ།

བཀས་རགས་བརད་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།

༧.༡ རས་ཤང་ར་ག་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༦

༩༠

༧.༢ གདགས་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༠༧.༣ གསར་ཉ་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༠༧.༤ དང་དཀར་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༠༧.༥ པད་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༠༧.༦ བམ་པ་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༠༧.༧ དཔལ་ཡབ་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༠༧.༨ རལ་མཚན་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༠༧.༩ འཁར་ལ་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན། ༠.༥ ༩.༥


Page:208

སབ་རམ་བཅ་གཉས་པའ་ནང་དན་བཀད་རས།སབ་རམ། སང་ཚན། སན་ཚན གནད་དན་གཙ་བ། ནང་སང་།་

Theoryལག་སང་།་Practical

ཚད།

༡༢


མཆད་རས་རགས་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན་དང་ ཚན་སར་ན།

སན་ཚན་༨་པ།

བཀས་རས་བརད་ཀས་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

༨.༡ མ་ལང་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༥

༡༡༧

༨.༢ སན་ག་ཝང་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༨.༣ ཞའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༨.༤ ར་དར་བ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༨.༥ བལ་བ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༨.༦ དང་དཀར་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༨.༧ ལ་ཁ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤༨.༨ ཡངས་དཀར་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༤

སན་ཚན༩་པ།

འདད་ཡན་ལའ་ར་མ ་འབ་ན།

༩.༡ གཟགས་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༧.༥

༩༠༩.༢ སའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༧༩.༣ དའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༧༩.༤- ར་འ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༧༩.༥- རག་བའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༩

སན་ཚན་༡༠་པ།

ས་འཆམ་བསས་པ་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།

༡༠.༡་ རས་ཤང་ར་ག་མ་འབ་ན། ༠.༥ ༡༢

༤༩

༡༠.༢ བག་ཁབ་དང་བག་གདང་ཀ་པང་ཚ་ ག་ཚན་གཏང་ན།

༠.༥

༡༧༡༠.༣ པད་དང་གདང་ཚ་ ག་ཚན་གཏང་ན། ༩༡༠.༤ ས་སག་ག་ཀ་ཅང་དང་ས་རག་ཧར་ཞ་་ག་ཚན་གཏང་ན། ༡༠

དས་ཚད་ཡངས་བསམས། ༤༢༦

Page:209

Annexes

B. CLASS BY CLASS LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR SHING TSHOEN (སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།)




སབ་རམ་དག་པའ་སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།

སང་ཚན་དང་པ་ མ་ཏག་རགས་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན་དང་ཚན་སར་ན།

སན་ཚན་༡པ་ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན༌དང༌ཉན༌སང༌ལག༌ལན༌འཐབ༌ན།

སན་ཚན་༡་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༩པ་ག་ གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༡.༡ 5s ག་ར་དན་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན།༡.༡.༡ 5s ག་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༡.༢ 5s ག་ར་དན་སར་ལས་བཤད་པ་རབ་ཚགས།༡.༡.༣ 5s ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༡.༢ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན།(OHS)

༡.༢.༡ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ག་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༢.༢ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ག་གལ་ཅན་ཚ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༢.༣ ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ག་གཞ་བརན་ཐབ་དབང་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༢.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ག་གལ་ཅན་བར་འཇག་འབད་དགཔ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༢.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད་བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༡.༣ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ན། (PPE)

༡.༣.༡ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་སར་ལས་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༡.༣.༢ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ཁག་ཆཝ་ཨནམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༣.༣ རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༡.༣.༤ གནས་སངས་དང་འཁལ་རང་ག་ཉན་སང་ག་མཁ་ཆས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།


Page:210

སན་ཚན་༢པ ་མ་ཏག་རགས་ཀ་ ར་མ་འབ་ན།

སན་ཚན་༢་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༩པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༢.༡ སན་ར་མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༡.༡ སན་ར་མ་ཏག་ག་སར་ལས་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༡.༢ སན་ར་མ་ཏག་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡.༣ སན་ར་མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༢.༡.༥ ཧང་སངས་ས་འབད་ལག་ལན་ཐབས་དག།

༢.༢ གསལཝ་མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༢.༡ གསལཝ་མ་ཏག་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༢.༢ གསལཝ་མ་ཏག་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༢.༣ གསལཝ་མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༢.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༢.༣ མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༣.༡ མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༣.༢ མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༣.༣ མཐང་གསལ་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤདཚགས།༢.༣.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༢.༤ ལགས་པད་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༤.༡ ལགས་པད་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༤.༢ ལགས་པད་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༤.༣ ལགས་པད་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༤.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

Page:211

Annexes

༢.༥ པད་མག་ལ་མ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༥.༡ པད་མག་ལ་མ་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༥.༢ པད་མག་ལ་མ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༥.༣ པད་མག་ལ་མ་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༥.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༢.༦ སས་ར་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༦.༡ སས་ར་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༦.༢ སས་ར་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༦.༣ ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༦.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༢.༧ ཁ་ཚམ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༧.༡ ཁ་ཚམ་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༧.༢ ཁ་ཚམ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༧.༣ ཁ་ཚམ་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༧.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༢.༨ ཀང་ཀ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༨.༡ ཀང་ཀ་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༨.༢ ཀང་ཀ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༨.༢ ཀང་ཀ་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༧.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༢.༩ ལ་འདབ་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༩.༡ ལ་འདབ་ཀ་ དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༩.༢ ལ་འདབ་ཀ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༩.༣ ལ་འདབ་ཀ་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༩.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།


Page:212

༢.༡༠ གག་ལ་/ལ་གག་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༡༠.༡ གག་ལ་ག་ དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡༠.༢ གག་ལ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༡༠.༣ གག་ལ་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡༠.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༢.༡༡ སབ་ཅང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༡༡.༡ སབ་ཅང་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡༡.༢ སབ་ཅང་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༡༡.༣ སབ་ཅང་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༢.༡༢ མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་ཡངས་རགས་འབ་ན།༢.༡༢.༡ མ་ཏག་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡༢.༢ མ་ཏག་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༡༢.༣ མ་ཏག་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ནའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡༢.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

སན་ཚན་༣་པ་ པ་ཏ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།སན་ཚན་༣་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༩པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།༣.༡ པ་ཏ་མག་གསམ་མ་འབ་ན།

༡.༡.༣ པ་ཏ་མག་གསམ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༣.༡.༢ པ་ཏ་མག་གསམ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༣.༡.༣ པ་ཏ་མག་གསམ་ར་མ་འབ་ནའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་ཚགས།

༣.༢ པ་ཏ་བདན་མ་འབ་ན།༣.༢.༡ པ་ཏ་མག་བདན་མ་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༣.༢.༢ པ་ཏ་བདན་མ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༣.༢.༣ པ་ཏ་བདན་མ་འབ་སའ་ས་ས་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༢.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

Page:213

Annexes

༣.༣ ནར་འཛན་པ་ཏ་འབ་ན།༣.༣.༡ ནར་འཛནཔ་ཏ་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༣.༢ ནར་འཛན་པ་ཏ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༣.༣.༣ ནར་འཛན་པ་ཏ་འབ་སའ་ས་ས་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༣.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༣.༤ ཤང་ལ་པ་ཏ་འབ་ན།༣.༤.༡ ཤང་ལ་པ་ཏ་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༤.༢ ཤང་ལ་པ་ཏ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༣.༤.༣ ཤང་ལ་པ་ཏ་འབ་སའ་ས་ས་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༤.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

སན་ཚན་༤་པ ་ས་ཚན་སར་ན།

སན་ཚན་༤་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༩པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༤.༡ ས་ཚན་ག་ར་བའ་ཚན་བཞ་སར་ན།༤.༡.༡ ས་ཚན་ག་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༤.༡.༢ ས་ཚན་སར་ཐངས་ཀ་ལམ་ལགས་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༡.༣ ས་ཚན་ནང་བག་ནའ་སན་ག་རགས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཚགས།༤.༡.༤ ས་ཚན་ལང་ཁ་ག་ཁ་མདག་སར་ཐངས།༣.༡.༥ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༤.༡.༦ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༤.༢ ཡན་ལག་ག་སཝ་སར་ན།༤.༢.༡ སཝ་ག་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༢.༢ ཚན་ག་སཝ་སར་ན་ཚས་གཞ་དང་བསར་ཚད་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༢.༣ ཤང་ཚན་ལ་དག་པའ་ཚན་ས་ཁ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༡.༥ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།


Page:214

སན་ཚན ༥་པ་མ་ཏག་དང་པ་ཏ་ཚ་ ཚན་གཏང་ན།སན་ཚན་༥་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༩པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།༥.༡ སན་ཙ་མ་ཏག་དང་མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ ཚན་གཏང་ན།

༥.༡.༡ སན་ཙ་མ་ཏག་དང་མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་དང་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༡.༢ སན་ཙ་མ་ཏག་དང་མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ག་ ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐང་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༡.༣ སན་ཙ་མ་ཏག་དང་མཐང་གསལ་མ་ཏག་ཚན་གཏང་ན་ག་ལག་ཆས་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༥.༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༥.༡.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༥.༢ ཀང་ཀ་ ཚན་གཏང་ན།༥.༢.༡ ཀང་ཀ་ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༢.༢ ཀང་ཀ་ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༢.༣ ཀང་ཀ་ཚན་གཏང་ན་ག་ལག་ཆས་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༥.༢.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༥.༢.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༥.༣ པད་མ་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།༥.༣.༡ པད་མཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༣.༢ པད་མ་ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༣.༣ པད་མ་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན་ག་ལག་ཆས་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༥.༣.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༥.༣.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༥.༤ ཁ་ཚམ་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།༥.༤.༡ ཁ་ཚམ་ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༤.༢ ཁ་ཚམ་ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐང་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༤.༣ ཁ་ཚམ་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན་ག་ལག་ཆས་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༥.༤.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༥.༤.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

Page:215

Annexes

༥.༥ མ་ཏག་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།༥.༥.༡ མ་ཏག་ག་ཡན་ལག་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༥.༢ མ་ཏག་ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༥.༣ མ་ཏག་ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༥.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༥.༥.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༥.༦ པ་ཏ་ ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།༥.༦.༡ པ་ཏ་ཚན་གཏང་ན་ག་ དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༦.༢ པ་ཏ་ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༦.༣ པ་ཏ་ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༦.༤ པ་ཏ་ཚན་གཏང་ན་ག་ལག་ཆས་ངས་འཛན་འབད་དག།༥.༦.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

B.2 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS X

སབ་རམ་༡༠པའ་སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།སང་ཚན་གཉས་པ་ མཆད་རས་རགས་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན་དང་ ཚན་སར་ན། སན་ཚན་༡ པ་ རས་ཤང་སང་ན།སན་ཚན་༡་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༠པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།༡.༡ ཁ་ཤ་སང་ན།

༡.༡.༡ ཁ་ཤ་སང་དག་པའ་ཁངས་དང་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༡.༢ ཁ་ཤའ་དབ་བ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༡.༣ ཁ་ཤ་ག་ཕགས་བཞ་སང་ཐང་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༡.༡.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༡.༢ ཀ་ར་གཏང་ན།༡.༣.༡ ཀ་ར་གཏང་དགཔ་པའ་ཁངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༣.༢ ས་ཀ་ར་བཏལ་ཐངས་ཀ་ལམ་ལགས་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༣.༣ ཀ་སན་གར་ལ་སག་ན།


Page:216

༡.༣.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༡.༣.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༡.༣ བརར་ཅ་རབ་ན།༡.༤.༡ བརར་ཅ་རབ་དག་པའ་ཁངས་དང་དགས་པ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༤.༢ བརར་ཅ་དབར་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༤.༣ བརར་ཅ་ར་ངས་འཛན་འབད་ཚགས།༡.༤.༣ བརར་ཅ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༡.༣.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།༡.༡.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

སན་ཚན་༢པ་ནར་བ་ཆ་བདན་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

སན་ཚན་༢པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༠པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༢.༡ བས་རའ་ར་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༡.༡ ནར་བ་ཆ་བདན་ག་ང་སད་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡.༢ བས་ར་རའ་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༡.༣ བས་རའ་རའ་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༡.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༢.༢ གང་ཆན་མཆཝ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༢.༡ གང་ཆན་མཆཝ་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༢.༢ གང་ཆན་མཆཝ་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༢.༣ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༢.༣ བ་རའ་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༣.༡ བ་རའ་ཤང་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༣.༢ བ་རའ་ཤང་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༣.༣ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༢.༤ སང་སའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

Page:217

Annexes

༢.༤.༡ སང་སའ་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༤.༢ སང་སའ་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།

༢.༥ གགས་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༥.༡ གགས་ཤང་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༥.༢ གགས་ཤང་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༥.༣ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༢.༦ རལ་པའ་སན་རན་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༦.༡ རལ་པའ་སན་རན་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༦.༢ རལ་པའ་སན་རན་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༦.༣ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༢.༧ བཙན་མའ་སན་རན་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༢.༧.༡ བཙན་མའ་སན་རན་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༢.༧.༢ བཙན་མའ་སན་རན་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༢.༧.༣ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

སན་ཚན་༣པ་ཟངས་ཚན་སར་ན།སན་ཚན་༣་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༠པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༣.༡ ཟངས་ཚན་ག་ར་བའ་ཚན་དག་སར་ན།༣.༡.༡ ཟངས་ཚན་ག་ར་བའ་ཚན་ག་མང་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༡.༢ ཟངས་ཚན་སར་ཐངས་ཀ་བ་རམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༣.༡.༣ ཚན་བཏལ་ཐངས།༣.༡.༤ ཚན་ནང་བག་ནའ་སན་ག་ རགས་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཐངས།༣.༡.༥ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།༣.༡.༦ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༣.༢ ཟངས་ཚན་ག་སཝ་སར་ན།༣.༢.༡ ཚན་སཝ་ག་མང་བཤདཚགས།༣.༢.༢ ཚན་ག་དན་ལ་དག་པའ་ཚན་ ས་ཁ་བཤད་ཚགས།


Page:218

༣.༢.༣ ཟངས་ཚན་ སཝ་སར་ན་ཚས་གཞ་དང་བསར་ཚད་བཤད་ཚག༣.༢.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

སན་ཚན་༤་པ་ནར་བ་ཆ་བདན་ཚན་གཏངན།སན་ཚན་༤པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༠པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།༤.༡ རས་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

༤.༡.༡ རས་ཤང་ག་ཐག་རབ་དག་པའ་སར།༤.༡.༢ རས་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ཐངས་སར།༤.༡.༣ རས་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་དག་པའ་སར་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༤.༢ ནར་བ་ཆ་བདན་རས་ཤང་ག་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།༤.༢.༡ ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༢.༢ ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༤.༢.༣ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།༤.༢.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

B.3 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XI

སབ་རམ་༡༡པའ་སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།སང་ཚན་གཉས་པ་ མཆད་རས་རགས་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན་དང་ ཚན་སར་ན། སན་ཚན་༥པ་ བཀས་རགས་བརད་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།སན་ཚན་༥་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༡པ་ཚ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།༥.༡ གདགས་ཀ་ ར་མ་འབ་ན།

༥.༡.༡ བཀས་རགས་བརད་ཀ་ང་སད་བཤད་ཚགས། ༥.༡.༢ གདགས་ཀ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༡.༣ གདགས་ཀ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༥.༢ གསར་ཉ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༥.༢.༡ གསར་ཉ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༢.༢ གསར་ཉ་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།

Page:219

Annexes

༥.༢.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༥.༣ དང་དཀར་ག་ ར་མ་འབ་ན།༥.༣.༡ དང་དཀར་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༣.༢ དང་དཀར་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༣.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༥.༤ མ་ཏག་པད་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༥.༤.༡ མ་ཏག་པད་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༤.༢ མ་ཏག་པད་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༤.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༥.༥ བམ་པ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༥.༥.༡ བམ་པ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༥.༢ བམ་པ་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༥.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༥.༦ དཔལ་ཡབ་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༥.༦.༡ དཔལ་ཡབ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༦.༢ དཔལ་ཡབ་ཀ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༦.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༥.༧ རལ་མཚན་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༥.༧.༡ རལ་མཚན་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༧.༢ རལ་མཚན་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༥.༧.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༥.༨ འཁར་ལ་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༥.༨.༡ འཁར་ལ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༥.༨.༢ འཁར་ལ་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།


Page:220

༥.༨.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

སན་ཚན་༦པ་གབ་ཚན་སར་ན།

སན་ཚན་༦་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༡པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༦.༡ གབ་ཚན་ག་ར་བའ་ཚན་སར་ན།༦.༡.༡ ར་བའ་ཚན་ག་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༦.༡.༢ ཚན་སར་ཐངས་ཀ་བ་རམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༦.༡.༣ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།༦.༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༦.༢ གབ་ཚན་ག་སཝ་སར་ན།༦.༢.༡ ཚན་སཝ་ག་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༦.༢.༢ ཚན་ག་དན་ལ་དག་པའ་ཚན་ས་ཁ་བཤད་ཚགས།༦.༢.༣ གབ་ཚན་སཝ་སར་ན་ཚས་གཞ་དང་བསར་ཚད་བཤད་ཚགས།༦.༢.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

སན་ཚན་༧པ་བཀས་རགས་བརད་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།

སན་ཚན་༧་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༡པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༧.༡ རས་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༧.༡.༡ རས་ཤང་ག་ཐག་རབ་ཐངས།༧.༡.༢ རས་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ཐངས།༧.༡.༣ རས་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་དག་པའ་སར་བཤད་ཚགས།༧.༡.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

༧.༢ བཀས་རགས་བརད་རས་ཤང་ག་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་གཏང་ན།༧.༢.༡ ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།༧.༢.༢ ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།༧.༢.༣ གབ་ཚན་སཝ་སར་ན་ཚས་གཞ་དང་བསར་ཚད་བཤད་དག།༧.༢.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་དག།

Page:221

Annexes

B.4 LEARNING OBJECTIVES FOR CLASS XII

སབ་རམ་༡༢པའ་སབ་སང་ག་དམགས་དན།

སང་ཚན་གཉས་པ་ མཆད་རས་རགས་ཀ་ ར་མ་འབ་ན་དང་ ཚན་སར་ན།

སན་ཚན་༨་པ་བཀས་རས་བརད་ ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

སན་ཚན་༨་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༢པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༨.༡ མ་ལང་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༨.༡.༡ མ་ལང་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༨.༡.༢ མ་ལང་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༨.༡.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༨.༢ སན་ག་ཝང་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༨.༢.༡ སན་ག་ཝང་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༨.༢.༢ སན་ག་ཝང་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༨.༢.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༨.༣ ཞའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

༨.༣.༡ ཞའ་ར་མ་ག་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༨.༣.༢ ཞའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༨.༣.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༨.༤ ར་དར་བ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༨ .༤.༡ ར་དར་བ་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༨.༤.༢ ར་དར་བ་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༨.༤.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༨.༥ བལ་བ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༨ .༥.༡ བལ་བ་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༨.༥.༢ བལ་བ་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༨.༥.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།


Page:222

༨.༦ དང་དཀར་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༨.༦.༡ དང་དཀར་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༨.༦.༢ དང་དཀར་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༨.༦.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༨.༧ ལ་ཁ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༨.༧.༡ ལ་ཁ་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༨.༧.༢ ལ་ཁ་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༨.༧.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༨.༨ ཡངས་ཀར་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༨.༨.༡ ཡངས་ཀར་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༨.༨.༢ ཡངས་ཀར་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༨.༨.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

སན་ཚན༩་པ། འདད་ཡན་ལའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།

སན་ཚན་༩་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༢པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༩.༡ གཟགས་ཀ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༩.༡.༡ འདད་ཡན་ལའ་ང་སད་བཤད་ཚགས།༩.༡.༢ གཟགས་མ་ལང་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༩.༡.༣ གཟགས་མ་ལང་ག་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༩.༡.༤ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༩.༢ སའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༩.༢.༡ སའ་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༩.༢.༢ སའ་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༩.༢.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༩.༣ དའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༩.༣.༡ དའ་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།

Page:223

Annexes

༩.༣.༢ དའ་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༩.༣.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༩.༤ རའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༩.༤.༡ ར་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༩.༤.༢ ར་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༩.༤.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༩.༥ རག་བའ་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༩.༥.༡ རག་བ་ག་ར་མའ་འགལ་བཤད་རབ་ཚགས།༩.༥.༢ རག་བ་ག་ར་མའ་ཐབ་ལམ་བཤད་ཚགས།༩.༥.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

སན་ཚན་༡༠པ་ ས་འཆམ་བསས་པ་ཚན་གསམ་མདངས་ གཏང་ན།

སན་ཚན་༡༠་པ་མཇག་བསཝ་ད་སབ་རམ་༡༢པ་ག་གཤམ་གསལ་ཚ་འབད་ཚགས།

༡༠.༡ རས་ཤང་ག་ར་མ་འབ་ན།༡༠.༡.༡ ས་འཆམ་བསས་པའ་ང་སད་བཤད་ཚགས།༡༠.༡.༢ རས་ཤང་ག་ཐག་རབ་ཐངས་དང་ར་མ་འབ་དག་སར་ལས་བཤད་ཚགས།༡༠.༡.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༡༠.༢ བག་ཁབ་དང་བག་གདང་ཀ་པང་ཚ་ ག་ཚན་གཏང་ན།

༡༠.༢.༡ ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡༠.༢.༢ ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།

༡༠.༢.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༡༠.༢.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཚགས། ༡༠.༣ པད་དང་གདང་ཚ་ ག་ཚན་གཏང་ན།

༡༠.༣.༡ ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས། ༡༠.༣.༢ ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།


Page:224

༡༠.༣.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༡༠.༤.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཚགས། ༡༠.༤ ས་སག་ག་ཀ་ཅང་དང་ས་རག་ཧར་ཞ་་ག་ཚན་གཏང་ན། ༡༠.༤.༡ ཚན་གཏང་སའ་ས་ས་བཤད་ཚགས།

༡༠.༤.༢ ཚན་ག་ཐབ་ཐངས་བཤད་ཚགས།

༡༠.༤.༣ ས་བ་དང་གཅག་སལ་ཐག་ལས་ལ་འབད་དག།

༡༠.༤.༤ ལ་ག་འཕད༌བསན་དང་ཉན་སང་ལག་ལན་འཐབ་ཚགས།

Page:225

Annexes:x-xviii

ANNEXES:X-XVIII

Annex X: Costing for Furniture Making

Assumption: 20 students in a class

Tools

Sl. No Tools Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate Total cost

1 Jack Plane 16 " 20 Nos 750 15000.00

2 Smoothing Plane 14" 20 Nos 650 13000.003 Rebated Plane 14" 20 Nos 650 13000.004 Hand Saw 16" 20 Nos 750 15000.005 Tenon Saw 16" 20 Nos 850 17000.006 Bevel Chisel 6 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.007 Bavel Chisel 8 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.008 Bevel Chisel 10 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.009 Bevel Chisel 12 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.00

10 Bavel Chisel 14 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0011 Bevel Chisel 16 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0012 Bavel Chisel 20 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0013 Bevel Chisel 22 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0014 Firmer Chisel 6 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0015 Firmer Chisel 8 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0016 Firmer Chisel 10 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0017 Firmer Chisel 12 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0018 Firmer Chisel 14 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0019 Firmer Chisel 16 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0020 Firmer Chisel 18 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0021 Firmer Chisel 20 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0022 Firmer Chisel 22 mm 20 Nos 250 5000.0023 Try Square 16 " 20 Nos 350 7000.0024 Miter Square 14 " 20 Nos 350 7000.0025 Sliding Bevel 14 " 20 Nos 350 7000.0026 Marking Gauge 12" 20 Nos 750 15000.0027 Ball Pin Hammer 250 gm 20 Nos 550 11000.00 Measuring Tape 5 5 m 20 Nos 500 10000.00

28 Measuring Tape 50 m 5 Nos 1200 6000.0029 Claw Hammer 250 gm 20 Nos 550 11000.0030 Wooden Mallet 2 kg 20 Nos 450 9000.0031 Flat Screw driver set 16" 20 Sets 650 13000.0032 Philips Screw driver 16" 20 Sets 650 13000.0033 Spirit level 1 m 20 Nos 450 9000.0034 Triangle file 4" 20 Nos 250 5000.0035 Saw setting pliers 3" 20 Nos 250 5000.00


Page:226

36 Sash Clamp 4' long 20 Nos 850 17000.0037 Sash Clamp 10' long 10 ' long 20 Nos 850 17000.0038 Rasp file 16" 20 Nos 350 7000.0039 Flat file 16" 20 Nos 350 7000.0040 Glass Cutter Standard 20 Nos 350 7000.0041 Auger bit 16" 20 Nos 650 13000.0042 Knife 16" 20 Nos 550 11000.0043 Sharping Stone 8" 20 Nos 250 5000.0044 Drill bits set 2mm to 20 mm 20 Nos 450 9000.0045 Pincer 150mm 20 Nos 350 7000.0046 Aluminium Ladder 10 m 2 Nos 15000 30000.00

Total 416000.00

2. Equipment


1Portable Planer machine(230V) 750w GHO 31-82 10 Nos 9500 95000.00

2Portable Sanding machine(230V) GEX 150 AC4500rpm 10 Nos 9500 95000.00

3 Jigsaw machine (230V) 850W GST85 PBE 5 Nos 8500 42500.00

4Router machine with Bit sets(230V) 5 Nos 12000 60000.00

5Portable Miter Saw machine (230V) LS1440(14") 5 Nos 12500 62500.00

6 Portable Circular Saw (230V) 1400w GKS 7 1/4 5 Nos 9500 47500.00

7Extension Cable Drum single phase

230Vsingle phase cable .Length 50m 10 Nos 9000 90000.00

8 Stapler Gun machine 23x17 12" long 5 Nos 1500 7500.009 Codeless Drilling Machine 420w GBM 6 10 Nos 8500 85000.00

10Portable Drilling Machine (230V) 420w GBM 6 10 Nos 8500 85000.00

11 Circular Saw Machine MJ 154 1 Nos 230000 230000.0012 Surface planner Machine PT 210 1 Nos 250000 250000.0013 Thicknesser Machine S 500 1 Nos 250000 250000.0014 Spindle Moulder Machine SF 110 PL 1 Nos 300000 300000.0015 Band Saw Machine EF 1459 1 Nos 175000 175000.00

16 Wood Turning Lath Machine JM-WTLM 100x1500MM 1 Nos 150000 150000.00

17 Mortising Machine MC 1000 1 Nos 180000 180000.00

18 Tenon Machine Wood master double cutter 500X500 1 Nos 200000 200000.00

19 Pedestal Drilling Machine GDM 120B 1 Nos 175000 175000.00Total 2,580,000.00

Page:227

Annexes:x-xviii

3. Materials


1 Planks 1" 1" 200 Cft 300 60000.00

2 Planks 1.5" 1.5" 200 Cft 300 60000.003 Batten 2"x2" 2"x2" 200 Cft 300 60000.004 Wire Nail 1" 1" 50 Kg 95 60000.005 Wire Nail 2" 2" 50 Kg 95 4750.006 Wire Nail 3" 3" 50 Kg 95 4750.007 Wire Nail 4" 4" 50 Kg 95 4750.008 Wire Nail 5" 5" 50 Kg 95 4750.009 Wire Nail 6" 6" 50 Kg 95 4750.00

10 Pannel Pin 3/4 3/4" 30 Pkts 200 4750.0011 Sanding sheet 125 dia 80 - 400 10 Pkts 350 6000.0012 Sand Paper 50.60, 80,120 grade 200 each 15 3500.0013 Fevicol Standard 100 Lits 550 3000.0014 Wooden Screw 20 mm 30 Pkts 250 55000.0015 Wooden Screw 25 mm 30 Pkts 250 7500.0016 Wooden Screw 30 mm 30 Pkts 250 7500.0017 Wooden Screw 35 mm 30 Pkts 250 7500.0018 Wooden Screw 40 mm 30 Pkts 250 7500.0019 Wooden Screw 45 mm 30 Pkts 250 7500.0020 Wooden Screw 50 mm 30 Pkts 250 7500.0021 Brass Screw 20 mm 30 Pkts 350 7500.0022 Brass Screw 25 mm 30 Pkts 350 10500.0023 Brass Screw 30 mm 30 Pkts 350 10500.0024 Brass Screw 35 mm 30 Pkts 350 10500.0025 Brass Screw 40 mm 30 Pkts 350 10500.0026 Brass Screw 45 mm 30 Pkts 350 10500.0027 Brass Screw 50 mm 30 Pkts 350 10500.0028 Philips Screw 20 mm 30 Pkts 750 10500.0029 Philips Screw 25 mm 30 Pkts 750 22500.0030 Philips Screw 30 mm 30 Pkts 750 22500.0031 Philips Screw 35 mm 30 Pkts 750 22500.0032 Philips Screw 40 mm 30 Pkts 750 22500.0033 Philips Screw 45 mm 30 Pkts 750 22500.0034 Philips Screw 50 mm 30 Pkts 750 22500.0035 Ply wood 6 mm 50 Nos 650 22500.0036 Ply wood 8 mm 50 Nos 850 32500.0037 Ply wood 10 mm 50 Nos 1000 42500.0038 Ply wood 12 mm 50 Nos 1200 50000.0039 Painting Brush 2" 50 Nos 95 60000.0040 Painting Brush 4" 50 Nos 100 4750.0041 Painting Brush 8" 50 Nos 150 5000.0042 MS Hinges 2" 50 Nos 250 7500.0043 MS Hinges 3" 50 Nos 250 12500.00


Page:228

44 MS Hinges 4" 50 Nos 250 12500.0045 MS Hinges 5" 50 Nos 250 12500.0046 Brass Hinges 2" 50 Nos 350 12500.0047 Brass Hinges 3" 50 Nos 350 17500.0048 Brass Hinges 4" 50 Nos 350 17500.0049 Brass Handle 2" 50 Nos 350 17500.0050 Brass Handle 3" 50 Nos 300 17500.0051 Brass Handle 4" 50 Nos 300 15000.0052 MS Handle 2" 50 Nos 300 15000.0053 MS Handle 3" 50 Nos 300 15000.0054 MS Handle 4" 50 Nos 300 15000.0055 Brass Tower Bolt 2" 50 Nos 250 15000.0056 Bass Tower Bolt 3" 50 Nos 250 12500.0057 BrassTower Bolt 4" 50 Nos 250 12500.0058 MS Tower Bolt 2" 50 Nos 250 12500.0059 MS Tower Bolt 3" 50 Nos 250 12500.0060 MS Tower Bolt 4" 50 Nos 250 12500.0061 MS Latch 2" 50 Nos 150 12500.0062 MS Latch 3" 50 Nos 150 7500.0063 MS Latch 4" 50 Nos 150 7500.0064 MS Bed Socket Standard 200 Nos 350 7500.0065 Magnetic Casher 2" 150 Nos 150 70000.0066 Knob Standard 100 Nos 150 22500.0067 MS Channel 2' 30 set 450 15000.0068 Wood Stain Oak/Teak/Wal nut Standard 100 lits 500 13500.0069 Wire Mesh 26 gauge 50 Mts 500 50000.0070 Rag Standard 200 Mts 90 25000.0071 Polish/ Touch wood/Teak/Oak Standard 200 Lits 450 18000.0072 Yellow mud Yellow 20 Kg 150 90000.0073 Red Mud Red 20 Kg 150 3000.0074 Kerosine Standard 200 Lits 160 3000.0075 Thinner Standard 200 Lits 160 3000.0076 Drawing Board 500x500 mm 20 Nos 1500 30000.0077 Drawing Paper A3 20 rim 650 13000.00

TOTAL 1,470,250.00

4. Personal Protective Equipment


1 Safety Gloves Medium/large 20 Pair 450 9000.00

2 Safety Helmet Assorted Size 20 No 450 9000.003 Safety shoes Assorted Size 20 Pair 2000 40000.004 Safety Goggles s Standard 20 No 350 7000.005 Dust mask Cotton 20 No 300 6000.006 Safety belt Standard 20 Set 2500 50000.007 Workshop dress Pant & Shirt 20 Set 2000 40000.00

Page:229

Annexes:x-xviii

8 Apron Standard 20 No 550 11000.009 Ear plug Small/medium/large 20 Pair 150 3000.00

10 Ear muff Standard 20 No 550 11000.0011 Tool bag Standard 20 No 900 18000.00

12 Fire extingusher Carbon Tetrachloride 12 kg 5 Nos 14000 70000.00

Total 274,000.00

Consolidated Costing

Sl. No Items Total Cost Remarks

1 Tools 416000.00 One time

2 Equipment 2580000.00 One time

2 Materials 1470250.00 Yearly

3 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 274000.00 One time Yearly

Grand Total 4,740,250.00


Page:230

Annex XI: Costing for Plumbing

1. Tools

Sl no. Item Specification Qty Unit Approx rate Amount

1 Hack saw frame Standard size 20 Nos 105 2100.002 Round file 1 ft long 20 Nos 70 1400.003 Flat File 1 ft long 20 Nos 180 3600.004 Sprit level Design Denmark 1 mtr long 20 Nos 520 10400.005 Oil can 20 Nos 200 4000.006 Plastic pipe reamer 1/2 to 25” 20 Nos 1000 20000.007 Screw driver set set 20 Nos 200 4000.008 Plastic pipe cutter 1/2 to 25” 20 Nos 200 4000.009 GI Pipe cutter 15-25mm 20 Nos 650 13000.00

10 GI Pipe cutter 25-50mm 20 Nos 1580 31600.00

11 Gas torch with gasMagi deal Gas Butane Blow Torch Burner Welding Solder Soldering Lighter 960kcal

20 set 2300 46000.00

12 Pipe vice self locking with stand 20 Nos 1200 24000.0013 Water Level Pipe standard 10 Nos 150 1500.0014 Adjustable wrench 12” 20 Nos 220 4400.0015 Pipe wrench 14” 20 Nos 400 8000.0016 Pipe wrench 18” 20 Nos 650 13000.0017 Yarning chisel 1 ft long 20 Nos 490 9800.0018 Measuring tap with level, 5 15 meter 150 2250.0019 Extension Cable drum 30 mtr 10 Nos 7000 70000.0020 Chalk line standard 20 Nos 100 2000.0021 Hack saw blade standard 20 Nos 500 10000.0022 Half Round File 1 ft long 20 Nos 120 2400.0023 Heating plate 250mm 8 Nos 1890 15120.0024 Tool box 65x25x25mm 20 Nos 1000 20000.0025 Spade normal 8 Nos 185 1480.0026 Plumb bob 200grm 20 Nos 50 1000.00

27 Stone dressing hammer 300grm 8 Nos 200 1600.00

28 copper tube cutter 15mm to 25mm 10 Nos 1550 15500.0029 ladder 10 2 mtr 15000 30000.00

Total 372,150.00

2. Equipment

Sl no. Item Specification Qty Unit Approx rate Amount

1 Die and stock 15mm-25mm 20 Nos 2000 40000.002 Die and stock 25mm-50mm 10 Nos 3000 30000.003 Ratched die set 15mm-25mm 20 Nos 2000 40000.004 Ratched die set 25mm-50mm 10 Nos 3000 30000.005 Ratchet pipe reamer 1/2 to 25” 20 Nos 1500 30000.006 Electric threader machine 15mm to 50mm 5 set 20000 100000.00

7Universal Electric threading machine 15mm to 50 mm 2 set 50000 100000.00

Page:231

Annexes:x-xviii

8 HDPE bud welding machine 50 mm to 650 mm 2 set 40000 80000.009 PP-R welding machine 16mm to 32mm 5 set 8000 40000.00

10 Pressure testing machine 6-50 bars 5 Nos 7100 35500.0011 Drilling Machine (heavy duty) GBS 16 RE 6 Nos 6200 37200.00

12 Tile cutter machine32mm,1200W,RPM 13000,Net Weight 2.9kg 6 Nos 4750 28500.00

Total 591200.00

3. Materials

3a. GI pipe and fittingsSl No. Item Specification Qty Unit Rate Amount

1 Pipe 15mm 30 Pcs 725 21750.002 Pipe 20mm 20 Pcs 895 17900.003 Pipe 25mm 15 Pcs 1250 18750.004 Pipe 32mm 5 pcs 1550 7750.005 Pipe 40mm 5 pcs 1800 9000.006 Pipe 50mm 5 pcs 2200 11000.007 Tee 15mm 50 Nos 23 1150.008 Elbow 15mm 150 Nos 35 5250.009 Elbow 20mm 100 Nos 40 4000.00

10 Elbow 25mm 50 Nos 55 2750.0011 Reducer socket 15mmx20mm 20 Nos 35 700.0012 Reducer socket 20mmx 25mm 20 Nos 45 900.0013 Socket 15mm 50 Nos 20 1000.0014 Socket 20mm 40 Nos 30 1200.0015 Plug 15mm 10 nos 25 250.0016 Cap 15mm 10 nos 20 200.0017 Hexagonal nipple 15mm 10 nos 25 250.0018 Tank nipple 15mm 10 nos 25 250.0019 Elbow 32mm 5 nos 100 500.00

20 Elbow 40mm 5 nos 130 650.00

21 Elbow 50mm 5 nos 230 1150.00

22 Tee 32mm 5 nos 133 665.00

23 Tee 40mm 5 nos 172 860.00

24 Tee 50mm 5 nos 264 1320.00

25 Union 32mm 5 nos 189 945.00

26 Union 40mm 5 nos 230 1150.00

27 Union 50mm 5 nos 361 1805.00

28 GI reducer socket 25mmx 32mm 10 Nos 70 700.00

29 Gate Valve 20mm 5 Nos 465 2325.00

30 Gate Valve 15mm 12 Nos 335 4020.00

31 Gate Valve 25mm 5 Nos 640 3200.00

32 GI Union 20mm 10 Nos 118 1180.00

33 GI Union 15mm 25 Nos 68 1700.00

34 GI Union 25mm 10 Nos 154 1540.00

35 Cross Tee 15mm 20 nos 25 500.00


Page:232

36 GI pass over 15mm 60 Nos 35 2100.00

37 Jute coconut 2 kg 78 156.00

38 Zinc 500grm 10 grm 160 1600.00 Total 132,116.00

3b. CPVC pipe and fittings39 Pipe SDR, 13, 20mm 30 Pcs 224 6720.00

40 Pipe SDR, 11, 20mm 45 Pcs 248 11160.00

41 Pipe SDR 11, 25mm 10 pcs 300 3000.00

42 Elbow 90 degree 20mm 300 Nos 20 6000.00

43 Elbow 90 degree 25mm 50 30 1500.00

44 Tee 20mm 100 Nos 20 2000.00

45 Cross Tee 20mm 50 nos 25 1250.00

46 Tee 25mm 30 nos 20 600.00

47 Step over bend/passover 20mm 60 Nos 68 4080.00

48 Brass FTP 90 degree elbow 20mm 50 Nos 60 3000.00

49 Ball Valves (CTS sockets) 20mm 30 Nos 50 1500.0050 Brass FTP Tee 20mm 20 Nos 50 1000.0051 Coupling 20mm 30 Nos 20 600.0052 Union 25mm 35 nos 131 4585.0053 Union 20mm 30 Nos 58 1740.00

54Adhesive Solution CPVC Glue 118ml 20 Nos 210 4200.00

55 Marker pen 24 Nos 10 240.0056 Clothes pices 20 Nos 25 500.0057 Hydolic Oil 60 ltrs 450 27000.0058 Thread seal tap 50 Roll 20 1000.0059 Clamp 20mm 400 10 4000.0060 Screw 25mm 10 pkt 40 400.0061 Brass Tee 15x20mm 20 40 800.00 Total 86875.00

3c. PP-R pipe and fittings62 PPR-pipe (SDR 11/Pn 10) 16mm 30 pcs 248 7440.0063 PP-R pipe (SDR 11/pn 10) 20mm 30 pcs 298 8940.0064 Pipe (SDR 11/PN 10) 25mm 20 pcs 446 8920.0065 Elbow 16mm 100 nos 100 10000.0066 Elbow 20mm 100 nos 150 15000.0067 Elbow 25mm 80 nos 200 16000.0068 Tee 16mm 70 nos 100 7000.0069 Tee 20mm 60 nos 150 9000.00

70 Tee 25mm 50 nos 200 10000.00

71 Pass over/step over bend 16mm 30 nos 50 1500.0072 Pass over/step over bend 20mm 30 nos 63 1890.0073 Pass over/step over bend 25mm 20 nos 80 1600.0074 Brass elbow 15mmx20mm 100 nos 125 12500.00

Page:233

Annexes:x-xviii

75 Brass female adapter 15x20mm 20 nos 380 7600.0076 Brass female adapter 15x25mm 20 nos 380 7600.0077 Brass male adapter 15x20mm 20 nos 380 7600.0078 Brass male adapter 15x25mm 20 nos 380 7600.0079 Union 16mm 20 nos 80 1600.0080 Union 20mm 20 nos 110 2200.0081 Union 25mm 20 nos 160 3200.0082 Cap 20mm 10 nos 10 100.0083 Coupling/socket 20mm 40 nos 10 400.0084 Ball valve 20mm 30 nos 150 4500.0085 Reducer socket 16x20mm 20 nos 25 500.0086 Reducer socket 20x25mm 20 nos 25 500.0087 Pipe clip 20mm 200 nos 30 6000.0088 pipe 15mm 20 pcs 1800 36000.0089 pipe 20mm 20 pcs 2900 58000.0090 elbow 15 mm 60 nos 300 18000.0091 elbow 20mm 60 nos 500 30000.0092 Tee 15mm 30 nos 300 9000.0093 Tee 15mm 30 nos 300 9000.0094 Flux standard 10 nos 1250 12500.0095 solder standard 10 nos 1800 18000.00

Total 349,690.00

3d. Drawing Instrument96 Drawing board 20 nos 500 10000.0097 T-square 20 nos 350 7000.0098 Set square 20 set 100 2000.0099 Dusting cloth 5 pcs 60 300.00

100 Mini Drafter 20 set 3000 60000.00101 Instrument box 20 set 100 2000.00102 Triangular engineering scale 20 set 500 10000.00

Drawing paper A3 5 pkt 650 3250.00103 Pencil of different grades 20 set 5 100.00

Total 94,650.00

3e. HDPE pipe 104 Pipe 20mm,10kg/Sq.cm 1 Roll 1850 1850.00

105 Pipe 25mm,,10kg/Sq.cm 1 Roll 2300 2300.00106 Pipe 32mm,6kg/Sq.cm 50 mtr 80 4000.00107 Pipe 40mm,6kg/Sq.cm 40 mtr 200 8000.00108 Pipe 50mm,6kg/Sq.cm 40 mtr 250 10000.00109 Twist Dril Bit 3mm 20 Nos 33 660.00110 Twist Dril Bit 4mm 20 Nos 40 800.00111 Twist Dril Bit 6mm 20 Nos 65 1300.00112 Twist Dril Bit 8mm 20 Nos 85 1700.00113 Twist Dril Bit 10mm 20 Nos 110 2200.00114 Twist Dril Bit 12mm 20 Nos 170 3400.00115 Twist Dril Bit 16mm 20 Nos 350 7000.00


Page:234

116 Twist Dril Bit 18mm 20 Nos 490 9800.00117 Twist Dril Bit 20mm 20 Nos 565 11300.00118 Tile cutter blade 110mm 20 Nos 150 3000.00

Total 67310.00

4. Safety gearSl No. Item Specification Qty. Rate Unit Amount

1 Helmet 20 nos 150 3000.002 Safety boot 20 Pair 1200 24000.003 Glove 20 no 200 4000.004 Ear plug 20 nos 100 2000.005 Google 20 no 150 3000.006 Dust mask 20 no 100 2000.007 Apron 20 nos 200 4000.008 Safety belt 20 no 1500 30000.009 Safety bag 20 no 900 18000.00

10 workshop Dress 20 set 1500 30000.0011 Fire extinguisher 4 set 12250 49000.00

Total 169,000.00

Consolidated CostingSl No. Item Cost Remarks

1 Tools 372150.00 one time2 Equipment 591200.00 one time

3 Materials 730641.00 Yearly4 Safety gear 169000.00 One time Yearly

Grand total 1,862,991.00

Page:235

Annexes:x-xviii

Annex XII: Costing for Masonry1. Tools


1 Spade Standard 10 No 400 4000.00

2 Shovel Standard 10 No 450 4500.003 Mortar Pan, Standard 10 No 200 2000.004 Measuring Tape 50 m 10 No 750 7500.005 Measuring Tape 5m 20 No 150 3000.006 Wire Brush Hard 40X300mm 20 No 70 1400.007 G I bucket 15-litre capacity 20 No 450 9000.008 Hand Saw 16'' long 10 No 250 2500.009 Cold Chisel 10x 150mm (150 gram) 20 No 180 3600.00

10 Plumb Bob 150 gram 20 Nos 150 3000.00

11 Spirit Level

1m longVertical, Horizontal 45 degree angle 20 No 600 12000.00

12 Stone dressing hammer 350 gram 20 No 250 5000.0013 Trowel Small 20 No 50 1000.0014 Trowel Medium 20 No 60 1200.0015 Trowel Large 20 No 80 1600.0016 Try Square 1ft long 20 No 200 4000.0017 Water level pipe 10m long 10 No 150 1500.0018 Wheel Barrow Standard 10 No 3500 35000.0019 Hacksaw frame Standard size 10 No 180 1800.0020 Hacksaw blade 12inchesx24TPI 10 Pkts. 360 3600.0021 Claw Hammer 200gram 10 No 220 2200.0022 Brick hammer 200gram 20 No 150 3000.0023 Bar bending Die 8mm 10 No 200 2000.0024 Bar bending Die 10mm 10 No 350 3500.0025 Bar bending Die 12mm 10 No 400 4000.0026 Bar bending Die 16mm 10 No 800 8000.0027 Bar Binding hook 6mm 20 No 100 2000.0028 Sledge Hammer 5 kg 5 No 200 1000.0029 Binding hook 6mm 20 No 100 2000.00

30Tile cutter blade(BTC 110mm)- 230V,1100W,11000rpm 15 No 200 3000.00

31 Wooden float Standard 20 Cft. 300 6000.0032 Wooden edge 1m 10 Cft 300 3000.0033 Snip 12inches long 10 No 750 7500.0034 Measuring jar/glass 1ml 20 No 200 4000.0035 Gauge Box Standard 10 cft 300 3000.0036 Tool box 65cmx25cmx25cm 20 No 1000 20000.00

Total 181,400.00


Page:236

2. Equipment

Sl. No Items Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate Total cost

1 Tiles Cutter Machine-32mm,1200W,RPM 13000,Net Weight 2.9kg 5 No 5000 25000.00

2 Dumpy Level Digital-Japan made 5 No 120000 600000.00

3 Compressive testing machineChannel Type Load Frame 1 No 150000 150000.00

4 Mortar mixer machine Light load-Eletric 1 No 100000 100000.00

5 Earth block machine (manual)Hollow Block Making Machine (manual) 2 No 120000 240000.00

Total 1,115,000.00

3. Materials


1 Binding wire 0.7-4.0 mm 10 Kg 90 900.002 Bricks 2nd class 9000 No 25 225000.003 Brush Soft 20 No 80 1600.004 Cement OPC 43 grade 50 Bag 445 22250.005 Modi Thread 100 Roll 50 5000.006 Reinforcement bar- 10,12,16,20,25mm 250 Kg 50 12500.007 Reinforcement bar Tor-8mm 250 Kg 50 12500.008 Sand Crushed stone 300 Cft 180 54000.009 Drawing paper A3 20 pkt 650 13000.00

10 Drawing board Wooden -500 x 500 mm 20 No 1500 30000.0011 Set squares Plastic 20 No 100 2000.0012 Mini drafter 20 No 3000 60000.0013 T-square 20 No 350 7000.0014 Dusting cloth Cotton 20 No 60 1200.0015 Engineering scale 20 No 500 10000.00

Total 456,950.00



1 Safety Gloves Rubber 20 Pair 200 4000.002 Safety Helmet Hard 20 No 400 8000.003 Safety shoes Leather-Steel toe 20 Pair 1800 36000.004 Safety Goggles 20 No 250 5000.005 Dust mask 20 No 200 4000.006 Safety belt 10 Set 1500 15000.007 Workshop dress 20 Set 1500 30000.008 Apron 20 No 380 7600.009 Earplug 20 Pair 100 2000.00

10 Tool bag 20 Set 1000 20000.00

11 Fire extinguisher(Multipurpose dry powder (ABC) 2 kg) 5 No 4000 20000.00

Total 131,600.00


Page:237

Annexes:x-xviii

Sl. No. ITEMS Total cost Remark

1 Tools 181400.00 One time 2 Equipment 1115000.00 One time 3 Materials 459950.00 Every year

4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 131600.00One time( Yellow

highlighted) Total 1,887,950.00

Grand Total (Extra 10%) 1,027,895.00


Page:238

Annex XIII: Costing for Electrical

1. Tools


1 Screw driver set 5pcs 20 Set. 300 60002 Combination pliers 200 mm 20 No 250 50003 Wire stripper 7" 20 No 250 50004 Long nose pliers 7" 20 No 230 46005 Cutting pliers 7" 20 No 250 50006 Electrician knife 6’’ 20 No 50 10007 Neon circuit voltage tester 20 No 2000 40,0008 Tool box 20 No 2000 40,000

Total 106,600

2. Equipment/Instruments

Sl.No Items Specification Qty Unit Approx.Rate Amount

1 Voltmeter Digital ,CE-0102V 96,upto 1000V AC 20 No 4800 96000

2 Voltmeter Digital ,CE-0102V 0-500 Volts,AC 20 No 4800 96000

3 Voltmeter Digital ,CE-0102V 0-300 Volts,AC 20 No 4800 96000

4 Voltmeter Digital ,CE-0102V,upto 1000V DC 20 No 4800 96000

5 Voltmeter Digital ,CE-0102V 20 No 2000 400006 Ammeter 0-2A,AC 20 No 2000 400007 Ammeter 0-2A,DC 20 No. 2000 400008 Ammeter 0-3A,AC 20 No. 2000 400009 Ammeter 0-50mA,Ac 20 No. 2000 40000

10 Ammeter 0-200mA,AC 20 No. 2000 40000

11 Wattmeter0-600W, 20011-19 - Wattmeter - Analog Portable

20 No. 1800 36000

12 Clamp on meter 20 No 2500 5000013 Multimeter 20 No 1800 3600014 Galvonometer 20 No 1800 36000

15 Frequency meter Digital E-500F, 20- 99.99Hz 15 No 9500 142,500

16 Power factor meter 15 No 1800 2700017 Phase sequence meter 5 No 1800 900018 Energy Meter 15 No 1800 27,00019 Convertor 36V/12V/5V 4 No 1800 7200

20 Invertor RS 485/2000W/solar invertor 2 No 4800 9600

21 Megger 5 No 5520 27600

22 DC power supply

Dual Output Voltage,0~30V Dual Output Current (0-3A) Fixed Output (5V/2A )

5 No 1400 7000

23 CRO 5 50000 250000

Page:239

Annexes:x-xviii

24 Extension Cable Drum Single Phase 50m 5 No 4500 22500Total 1,311,400

3. Materials

Sl. No Materials Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate Total cost

1 PVC insulated Copper wire 1sq mm 10 Roll 1200 12000

2 PVC insulated Copper wire 1.5 sq mm 10 Roll 2800 280003 PVC insulated Copper wire 4 sq mm 10 Roll 4800 480004 PVC copper Flexible wire 0.5sqmm 10 Roll 1000 100005 One way switch 6A 230V 30 No 30 9006 MCB SP 6A 230V 15 No 235 35257 MCB DP 16A 230V 15 No 1000 150008 MCB TPN 16A 230V 15 No 1200 18000

9Square battery (For multimeter) 15 No 80 1200

10 Cell 9V/5V 100 No 30 300011 Resistor 100/200ohm 100 No 30 300012 Capacitor 2.5 to 10 microfarad 100 No 50 500013 Inductor 50 No 50 10014 PN junction diode 50 No 50 10015 Transistor c5200 50 No 50 250016 Zener diode 50 No 50 10017 Bread board 15 No 150 225018 Inductor 15 No 20 30019 Power socket 16A .230v 25 No 350 875020 Incandescent lamp 200W,230V 50 No 30 150021 Incandescent lamp 100W,230V 50 No 30 150022 Incandescent lamp 60W,230V 50 No 30 150023 Incandescent lamp 40W,230V 50 No 30 150024 Batten holder 6A 230v 50 No 45 225025 Pendent holder 6A 230v 50 No 45 225026 Extension Cable Drum Single Phase 150m 3 No 9000 2700027 Extension Cable Drum Three Phase 100 m 2 No 12000 2400028 Insulation Tape 20mmx10m 100 Roll 30 3000

Total amount 226,225


Page:240

4. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)


1 Workshop dress Pant & Shirt 20 No 1850 37000

2 Safety helmet Assorted Size 20 No 150 30003 Hand Gloves medium/large 20 pairs 170 34004 Safety goggles Standard Size 20 No 150 30005 Ear plug small/medium/large 20 No 100 20006 Dusk Mask Cotton 20 No 150 3000

7 Fire extinguisher Carbon Tetrachloride 12Kg 3 No 14900 44700

8 Safety belt 20 No 2500 500009 Safety boot Assorted Size 20 No 2000 40000

10 Ladder 10m 2 No 15000 3000011 Tool bag 20 No 900 18000

Total 216,100

Consolidated CostingSl.No Items Cost Remark

1 Tools 106600 One time2 Equipment/ Instrument 1311400 One time3 Materials 226225 Every year4 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 216100 Every year/ One time Grand Total 1,860,325

Page:241

Annexes:x-xviii

Annex XIV: Costing for Welding1. Tools

Sl No. Item Specification Qty Unit Approx rate Amount

1 Allen key set All sizes 5 nos 205 10252 Ball Peen hammer 250gm,with handle 20 nos 132 26403 Bench vice No.1 20 nos 2079 415804 C-Clamps 300mm 20 nos 185 37005 Center Punch 150mm 20 nos 85 17006 Chipping hammer 300mm 10 nos 175 17507 Combination Plier 150mm 5 nos 215 10758 Cross peen hammer 250g with handle 20 nos 242 48409 Divider 150mm 5 nos 135 675

10 Double cut rough Flat file 50x5x300mm with handle 20 nos 220 440011 Double cut rough round file 50x5x300mm with handle 20 nos 220 440012 Double cut rough square file 50x5x300mm with handle 20 nos 220 440013 Double cut rough triangular file 50x5x300mm with handle 20 nos 220 440014 Double cut smooth Flat file 50x5x300mm with handle 20 nos 220 440015 Double cut smooth round file 50x5x300mm with handle 20 nos 220 440016 Double cut smooth square file 50x5x300mm with handle 20 nos 220 440017 Double cut smooth triangular file 50x5x300mm with handle 20 nos 220 4400

18 Double ended ring spanner set10 pcs 6-32 mm chrome-plate 2 set 1804 3608

19 Double open ended spanner set10 pcs 6-27/ 6 (MM) / 6 (AF) 2 set 1144 2288

20 Earth Clamp 12 nos 90 108021 Electrode holder Handicool HC600 12 nos 605 726022 Flat Chisel 20mmx200mm 20 nos 187 374023 Hand snip 10 nos 350 350024 Straight shank drill bits 4mm, HSS 20 nos 64 128025 Straight shank drill bits 8mm, HSS 20 nos 132 264026 Straight shank drill bits 12mm, HSS 15 nos 264 396027 Straight shank drill bits 14mm,HSS 15 nos 741 1111528 Taper shank drill bits 16mm,HSS 10 nos 455 455029 Taper shank drill bits 22mm,HSS 10 nos 1700 1700030 Long nose plier 200mm 5 nos 264 132031 Mallet 500 gm 20 nos 75 1500

32 Measuring tape5m, Weight -0.265 Kg, with- 9534.05. 20 nos 450 9000

33 Neon Tester 500Volt 20 nos 48 96034 Screw driver, Flat/Philips 12.00x300mm 2 set 264 52835 Scriber bent end 200mm 20 nos 215 430036 Side cutting plier 150mm 5 nos 250 125037 Sledge hammer 5kgs,with handle 5 nos 726 363038 Soft hammer 200gm 20 nos 175 350039 Hacksaw Frame 12"adjustable 5 nos 203 101540 Steel Rule 30cm 20 nos 495 9900


Page:242

41 Tong 450mmL,150mm opening 20 nos 979 1958042 Try square 300mm,graded 20 nos 180 360043 Welding shield Auto Darkening Helmet 10 nos 5000 5000044 Welding screen best quality 10 nos 450 450045 Welding filter glass black 110x85x3mm 20 nos 40 80046 Welding filter glass clear 110x85x3mm 20 nos 16 32047 Wire brush Less tempered,12" 10 nos 35 35048 Wire stripping plier 180mm 10 nos 280 2800

Total 275,059

2. Equipment

Sl.No Description Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate Amount

1 Arc welding machine

Inverter Based, Light weight, Heavy duty,MMA Welding rectifier set of 400amps capacity, 3 Phase line of input supply. .

10 nos 29150 291500

2 Arc welding machine

Single phase, Inverter Based, Light weight,Heavy duty MMA Welding rectifier set of 200 amps capacity, 3 Mtrs Welding Cable.

10 nos 10010 100100

3 Angle grinder machine 4”

Continuous rating Input 840W Wheel diameter 100mm (4”) No load speed (rpm) 11,000 Dimensions (L x W x H) 271x118x97 mm (10-5/8”x4-5/8”x3-13/16”) Net Weight 1.8 kg (4.0 lbs.)

7 nos 5060 35420

4 Cable drum for arc welding 3phase with single phase. (length 20m) 2 nos 2500 5000

5 Cut-Off machine Rating Input 2,000W Wheel diameter 355 mm 7 nos 12100 84700

6 Drilling machine Medium duty,Power Hand drill 7 nos 3074 21518

7 Grinding machine Table size710x225mm,3 T slot Width of T slot 14 Automatic longitudinal feed 400mm 1 nos 47300 47300

8 Hand lever shear Blade length-400mm, plate 3mm(Flat round square) 3 nos 7000 21000

9 Pillar drilling machine 32mm Pillar type 1 nos 60000 60000

Total 666,538

Page:243

Annexes:x-xviii

3. Materials

Sl. No. Description Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate Amount

1 Cutting wheel Dia 355mm 100 nos 250 250002 Cutting wheel Dia 100mm 30 nos 50 15003 Drawing board A3 500X500 20 nos 500 100004 Drawing paper A3 297X420 10 bundle 650 6500

5 Drawing paper A4 210X297 10 bundle 650 65006 Dusting cloth 18”x18” 20 nos 60 12007 Emery Cloth all Grades 20 nos 29 5808 Grinding wheel dia 100mm 20 nos 70 1400

9 Hacksaw Blade 300X12.5X0.63mm 12X1/2X0.025 18Teeth per 25mm 10 nos 72 720

10 M. S. Flat 70X8mm 200 Kg 69 1380011 M. S. Flat 60X6mm 200 Kg 69 1380012 M. S. Flat 50X5mm 200 Kg 69 1380013 M.S Plate (1no) 8’x4’x6mm 150 kg 72 1080014 M.S Plate (1no) 8’x4’x8mm 200 kg 72 1440015 M.S Plate (1no) 8’x4’x10mm 233 kg 72 1677616 M.S. Angle iron 60X60X6.00mm 150 kg 68 1020017 M.S. Angle Iron 50X50X5.00mm 150 kg 68 1020018 M.S. Angle iron 40X40X4.00mm 150 kg 68 1020019 M.S.Sheet (1no) 8’x4’x20g,(1.00mm) 23 kg 77 177120 M.S.Sheet (1no) 8’x4’x14g,2.00mm 46 kg 75 345021 M.S.Sheet (1no) 8’x4’x8g,4.06mm 93 kg 183 1701922 Mini drafter 20 nos 1500 30000

23 MS Electrode mild steel 2.00x350mm 24 Pkt 375 9000

24 MS Electrode mild steel 2.50x350mm 24 Pkt 365 8760

25 MS Electrode mild steel 3.15x450 mm 24 Pkt 396 9504

26 MS Electrode mild steel 4.00x450 mm 24 Pkt 398 9552

27 Set square 20 nos 100 200028 T-square 20 nos 350 7000

Total 265,432


Page:244


Sl.No Description Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate

Total Cost

1 Ear Plug 20 pair 25 5002 Fire extinguisher Carbon Tetrachloride 12Kg 5 nos 5000 250003 Hand glooves Gaunt let type 20 pair 175 35004 Nose musk V - 44++ FFP1 S 20 nos 100 20005 Safety belt 10 nos 495 49506 Safety Boot 20 pair 1500 300007 Safety Goggles Standard size 20 pair 78 15608 Safety Helmet C-132 20 nos 165 33009 Tool bag 20 No 900 18000

10 Welder apron 20 nos 275 550011 Welding fume mask 414-SlOV-V FFP2 NR 20 nos 275 550012 Workshop dress 20 pair 1800 36000

Total 135,810


Sl.No Items Cost Remark1 Tools 275059 One time2 Equipment 666538 One time3 Materials 265432 Every year

4 Personal protective equipment (PPE)135810 One time

Every year Grand Total 1,342,839

Page:245

Annexes:x-xviii

Annex XV : Costing for Automobile

1. ToolsSl.No Items Specification Qty Unit Rate Amount

1 Steel tool box Stanley 5 nos. 650.00 3250.002 D.E. spanner 6mm to 22mm 5 sets 950.00 4750.003 Ring spanner 6mm to 22mm 5 sets 950.00 4750.00

4Socket wrench (10mm-22mm) 6mm to 22mm 5 sets 1450.00 7250.00

5 Reversible ratchet 117x22x12.5mm 5 nos. 400.00 2000.006 Sliding handle 165mm 5 nos. 300.00 1500.00

7Extension (short,medium,long) 160mm & 76mm 5 nos. each 350.00 1750.00

8 Universal joint 46mm 5 nos. 150.00 750.009 Combination plier 125mm long, insulated handle 5 nos. 150.00 750.00

10 Long nose plier 4", insulated handle 5 nos. 120.00 600.0011 Cutting plier 6", insulated handle 5 nos. 120.00 600.0012 Ball peen hammer 250g 5 nos. 100.00 500.0013 Plastic hammer 850g with handle 5 nos. 100.00 500.0014 Screw driver set 5pcs 5 sets 150.00 750.00

15Heavy duty screw driver(flat head) a) (1.2x8) x (7x37) x 319mm 5 sets 650.00 3250.00

b) (1.6x10) x (9x39) x 325mmc) (2x12) x (10x39) x 375mm

16Heavy duty screw driver(cross head) a) (6x37) x 219mm x 120gm 5 sets 650.00 3250.00

b) (6x37) x 244mm x 126gmc) (8x39) x 275mm x 194gm

17 Wheel brace/wheel wrench a) 30c Pkw, 400mm 5 nos 850.00 4250.00b) 32c Pkw, 400mmc) 31c cLkw2, 700mmD) 34c Lkw, 700mm

18 Drift punch 150mmLX5mm dia. 5 nos. 50.00 250.0019 Center punch 120mmLX12mm 5 nos 50.00 250.0020 Wire brush Standard 5 nos 100.00 500.0021 Round file 8 inch long with handle 10 nos 150.00 1500.0022 Flat file 8 inch long with handle 10 nos 150.00 1500.0023 Half round file 8 inch long with handle 10 nos 150.00 1500.0024 Triangle file 8 inch long with handle 10 nos 150.00 1500.0025 Punching tool Stanley 5 nos 350.00 1750.0026 Flat cold chisel 175mm L 5 nos 100.00 500.0027 Hack saw frame Adjustable handle 20 nos 150.00 3000.0028 Inspection lamp tube type, plastic, 12V 5 nos 120.00 600.0029 Tire lever 240, 450, 510, 760, 940mm 5 nos 600.00 3000.0030 Steel rule 2 mtrs 5 nos 250.00 1250.0031 Sledge hammer 10kg with handle 2 nos 500.00 1000.0032 Chipping hammer Stanley 5 nos 150.00 750.0033 Tong Stanley 5 nos 100.00 500.00


Page:246

34 Try square Standard 5 nos 120.00 600.0035 Scriber Stanley 5 nos 100.00 500.0036 Flexible pipe with adapter Compressed air pipe 1 nos 1500.00 1500.0037 Electrode holder Standard 2 sets 4000.00 8000.0038 Welding cable Stanley 1 set 850.00 850.0039 Adjustable wrench set 150, 200, 250mm 1 set 2500.00 2500.0040 Allen key 2mm to 12mm 1 set 1250.00 1250.0041 Drill bit 2 to 10mm, stanley 5 sets 4500.00 22500.0042 Waste oil drain container 20ltrs,32 ltrs 2 nos 1800.00 3600.00

Total 101,100.00

2. Equipment

Sl.No Name of equipments Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate Total cost

1Diesel engine Vehicle (Hilux) Fout stroke CI engine 1 nos 1200000.00 1200000.00

2Diesel engine Vehicle (Bolero) Fout stroke CI engine 1 nos 750000.00 750000.00

3Petrol engine vehicle (Maruti van) 4 stroke SI engine 1 nos 430000.00 430000.00

4 Maruti car/alto 5 stroke SI engine 1 nos 430000.00 430000.005 Anvil block 65/50x25/8x140mm, stanley 2 4500.00 9000.006 Hydraulic floor jack 3,5,10 ton(ELGI) 3 28000.00 84000.007 Screw jack 3,5,10 ton 5 4500.00 22500.008 Vice locking plier Poly Grip 5 1500.00 7500.009 Pipe falrring tool 3 - 10mm dia., stanley 5 set 1200.00 6000.00

10 Pneumatic impact wrench Pneumatic operated 2 nos. 9500.00 19000.0011 Two post Car lift ELGI- 1 no 180000.00 180000.0013 Straight edge gauge 500mm, stanley 5 nos 1000.00 5000.00

14Tire pressure gauge with adapter Max. 10kg 2 sets 900.00 1800.00

16 Tie rod end remover Two jaws stanley 5 nos 450.00 2250.0017 Oil cane 300g 2 nos 1350.00 2700.0018 Grease gun 250kg/300cc 2 nos 4500.00 9000.0019 Oil dispenser Suction gun stanley 2 nos 1800.00 3600.0020 Torque wrench a) 30 to 150Nm 3 nos 6500.00 19500.00

b) 60 to 300Nmc) 160 to 800Nm

21 Vernier caliper 300mm 5 nos 1800.00 9000.0022 Measuring tape 5mtrs 5 nos 250.00 1250.0023 Garage air compressor 15HP, 925rpm, ELGI 1 no 250000.00 250000.0024 Dial gauge 0.01 to 10mm 2 nos 1800.00 3600.0025 Coil spring compressor Two clamping jaws 4 nos 4700.00 18800.0026 Magnetic lifter 500gm 1 no 1500.00 1500.0027 Brake fluid tester Grand Index 2 sets 2500.00 5000.0028 Bench vice Double jaws 5 nos 4500.00 22500.0029 Hydraulic press 15 ton press force, 3 HP 1 no 47000.00 47000.0030 Arc welding machine 2 phase, Heavy Duty 1 no 150000.00 150000.0031 Pedestral grinding machine 4HP 1 no 120000.00 120000.00

Page:247

Annexes:x-xviii

32

Bench drilling machine

Model No. BMT-25 Pillar Drilling Machines - 25mm Cap / 8 Speed 155mm Travel with FINE FEED – Square Model Electrical such as 1HP 1440 RPM 3 phase Ele. Motor

1 no 45000.00

45000.0033 Work bench Standard 4 nos 15000.00 60000.0034 Tray Stanley 5 nos 1200.00 6000.0037 wheel wedge Standard 6 nos 350.00 2100.0038 Hydraulic jack 3 ton, 5ton,10 ton 4 nos 5500.00 22000.0040 Belt tension gauge 30-180lbs. 1 no 13500.00 13500.0041 Venyl tube Synthetic transparent 2 nos 70.00 140.00

42 Drilling vice Base fixing width 80,100 and 135mm 1 no 1200.00 1200.00

43Multi meter (digital) AC/DC 0-1000V, 2 mega ohm, 20DCA 2 nos 4500.00 9000.00

44 Hand held vacum pump metal body 1 no 9500.00 9500.00

Total 3,978,940.00

3. Materials

Sl.no Name of materials Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate Total cost

1 Brooms Hard handled 5 nos 50.00 250.002 Buckets Standard 3 nos 150.00 450.003 Sponge Standard 2 nos 200.00 400.004 Detergent Synthetic 5 ltrs 280.00 1400.005 Rag/markin cloth Cotton 100 mtrs 45.00 4500.006 Hack saw blade HSS 5 pkts 650.00 3250.007 Electrode 3.15mm, 4.15mm 5 pkts 650.00 3250.008 MS Flat 40mmx40mm 20 kg 70.00 1400.009 MS angle 40mmx40mm 20 kg 70.00 1400.00

10 MS tube/pipe 25mmx25mm 20 kg 75.00 1500.0011 Grease (MP) Multi purposse 2 kg 280.00 560.0012 Grease (WB) wheel bearing 2 kg 280.00 560.0013 Diesel HSD 40 ltrs 55.00 2200.0014 Petrol 40 ltrs 50.00 2000.0015 Kerosene 20 ltrs 45.00 900.0016 Brake fluid DOT4 5 ltrs 320.00 1600.0017 Gear oil GL-SAE 10 ltrs 380.00 3800.0018 Power steering fluid ATF Dexron 5 ltrs 300.00 1500.0019 Emery paper 60 grite 80 grite 50 pcs 15.00 750.0020 Leaf spring Bolero 10 sets 7500.00 75000.0021 leaf spring bush Bolero 10 sets 150.00 1500.0022 Shackle pin Bolero 4 nos 180.00 720.0023 Hanger pin Bolero 10 nos 180.00 1800.0024 U- bolts Bolero 10 sets 650.00 6500.0025 Center bolt Bolero 10 nos 150.00 1500.0026 Shock absorber Maruti van 10 nos 3500.00 35000.0027 Coil spting Maruti car 6 nos 3800.00 22800.0028 Strut bar Maruti van 10 nos 3200.00 32000.00

29Machpherson strut assembly Maruti car 4 sets 7000.00 28000.00


Page:248

30 Suspension arm Maruti van 10 nos 4500.00 45000.0031 Stabilizer Maruti car 6 sets 3200.00 19200.0032 Stabilizer link Maruti van 10 nos 1200.00 12000.0033 Suspension arm bush Maruti van 10 nos 100.00 1000.0034 Lateral control rod Maruti van 5 nos 2000.00 10000.0035 Stabilizer bush Maruti van 10 sets 450.00 4500.0036 Torsion bar Hilux, hiace bus 2 nos 12000.00 24000.0037 Cotter pin Bolero,van and maruti car 10 nos 20.00 200.0038 Check nut Bolero,van and maruti car 10 nos 100.00 1000.0039 Luck nut Bolero,van and maruti car 10 nos 100.00 1000.0040 brake booster Bolero 2 no 12000.00 24000.0041 Brake master cylinder body Van/Bolero 5 nos 4600.00 23000.0042 Brake master cylinder kits Van/Bolero 5 sets 450.00 2250.0043 Brake pipes Van/Bolero 5 sets 1500.00 7500.0044 Wheel cylinder body Van/Bolero 10 sets 750.00 7500.0045 Wheel cylinder kits Van/Bolero 10 sets 350.00 3500.0046 Bleeding screw Van/Bolero 10 nos 100.00 1000.0047 Brake shoe Van/Bolero 10 sets 3200.00 32000.0048 Brake shoe return spring Van/Bolero 10 sets 750.00 7500.0049 Brake pad Van/Bolero 10 sets 1200.00 12000.0050 Brake caliper assembly Van/Bolero 4 sets 1250.00 5000.0051 Caliper pin Maruti car 10 nos 150.00 1500.0052 Anchor pin Maruti car 10 nos 20.00 200.0053 Rust leak Anti rust 10 ltrs 150.00 1500.0054 Parking brake cable Maruti car 5 nos 1800.00 9000.00

55Nuts and bolts (8mm-22mm) 6mm-22mm 10 sets 1500.00 15000.00

56 Flat washer (10mm-20mm) 6mm-22mm 10 sets 1000.00 10000.00

57Spring washer (10mm-20mm) 6mm-22mm 10 sets 1000.00 10000.00

58 Fire extinguisher ABC type fire extinguisher 5 no 15000.00 75000.00

59 Drawing board A4 Double locking board with megnetic clamp 20 nos 550.00 11000.00

60 Set square 30°x60°and 45°x90° 20 nos 100.00 2000.0061 T-square Standard 20 nos 350.00 7000.00

Total 621840.00

4.PPE

Sl.no Name of PPE Specification Qty. Unit Approx. Rate Total cost

1 Helmet Standard 20 nos 200.00 4000.002 Earmuff Standard 20 nos 150.00 3000.003 Goggles Spark proof plastic 20 nos 150.00 3000.004 Mask Standard 20 nos 150.00 3000.005 Safety boot Steel toe 20 nos 1800.00 36000.006 Leather apron leather 20 nos 300.00 6000.007 Leather hand gloves Long sleeve 20 pairs 200.00 4000.008 Fender cover Resin type 10 nos 150.00 1500.009 Mechanic hand glove fabric 20 pairs 250.00 5000.00

Page:249

Annexes:x-xviii

10 Safety stand Standard 10 nos 1000.00 10000.0011 Welding screen Stanley 10 sets 150.00 1500.0013 Workshop dress Cotton fabric 20 sets 1200.00 24000.00

Total 101000.00

Consolidated CostingSl No. Items Total cost Remarks

1 Tools 101100.00 One time2 Equipments 3978940 One time3 Materials 621840 One time4 PPE 101000 Yearly

Total 4,802,880.00


Page:250

Annex XVI: Costing for Computer Hardware and Networking


1Screw driver set

Precision Screwdriver Set(Support Laptop & Desktop)

10 Nos250

2500

2 Hammer 150 to 200 gram 10 Nos 100 1000

3Computer cleaning tools kits Standard 10 Nos 450 4500

4Needle Nose Plier

Diameter: 1inch, Length: 19cm and Item Weight: 77g (Computer supports)

10 Nos 100 1000

5 Tweezer standard 10 Nos 30 300

6 Soldering iron(with stand) "Soldering Station Iron Stand(Computer supports)" 10 Nos 280 2800

7 Soldering pump Standard 10 Nos 60 600

8 Punching tools Impact punch down. RJ11, RJ45, Cat5e, Cat6 10 Nos 200 2000

9 Crimping tools For Coaxial Cable, F-pin and BNC (RG58, RG59 and RG6) 10 Nos 350 3500

10 Cutting tools For UTP cable 10 Nos 80 80011 Cable tester 10 Nos 550 550012 Wire Stripper tool standard 10 Nos 75 75013 Sprit level 10 Nos 250 2500

14 Laptop LCD opener tools

25 in 1 set,Screen Opening, Repair Tools Kit and many more

10 Nos 850 8500

Total 36,250

2. EquipmentSl.No Items Specification Qty Unit Rate Amount

1 Printer HP LaserJet, 30ppm Black and White, 2 Paper tray. 4 Nos 6500 26000

2 Drilling Machine Set 4 Nos 8500 34000

3

Scanner

"8-bit Gray (256 shades) at 600 x 600 dpi 120 images per minute one-sided 8.5 x 11""/A4 - 120 sheets per minute,Office use."

4 Nos 6500 26000

4

Barcode Reader

Handheld barcode scanner with driver CD/DVD. Zebra/Equivalent. Working Current: Buzzer,LED Light. Image Sensor: CMOS(IMAGE)

4 Nos 3200 12800

5Multi-Meter

Handheld digital multimeter, Measurement Type: AC, DC, AC/DC. Probe Type: Test lead set

10 Nos 1050 10500

6 Blower PC Air Blower (Portable, 700W) 4 Nos 2500 100007 Laptop (Intel core i5 support) 10 Nos 32000 320000

Page:251

Annexes:x-xviii

8Photocopy Machine

Device memory (standard/max)256 MB / 512 MB.Optional functions(Scan).Office use.

4 Nos 65000 260000

9 Calculator Standard 10 Nos 300 3000

11 Modem Router (WiFi) Router's wireless frequency (2.4GHz and above) 10 Nos 3000 30000

12Switch

Gigabit Ethernet 48 x 10/100/1000 (PoE) + 4 x shared SFP

10 Nos 6000 60000

13 Firewall Device Hardware firewall for small business 1 Nos 75000 75000

15Signal Testing Instrument

Signal Quality Analyzer-R MP1900A(Support wire and wireless)

10 Nos 850 8500

16 Projector In class room support,HDMI and VGA ports 4 Nos 46000 184000

18

Desktop Monitor

24-inch monitors, 16:9 aspect ratio, full HD 1080-pixel resolution, inputs (DVI, HDMIand VGA)

10 Nos 4500 45000

TOTAL 1,104,800

3. Materials Sl.No Items Specification Qty Unit Rate Amount

1

Mother board (Desktop)

Motherboard with Ram, (4 GB), Intel CPU (i5) with Accessories (Fan and Heatsink) on board Gigabit Lan.

10 Nos 28600 321000

2 Cabinet(System case) Dektop type 10 Nos 2500 250006 Hard Disk Drive 500GB,SATA 10 Nos 2400 240007 SATA cable for Drive standard 10 Nos 50 5008 Power cable Male type 10 Nos 220 22009 SMPS ATX (SATA support) 10 Nos 2000 20000

11Screws

Hard disk drive and Optical drive support.Stainless steel

2 Pkt. 550 1100

12 Hardware Manual books stadard 10 Nos 300 300013 USB drive 4GB 4 Nos 350 1400

14 Installation media Bootable(Window 10 64 bits) 10 Nos 1500 15000

15 Anti-virus 10 users(Quick heal) 10 Users 600 600016 Backup software Genuine with product key 10 Nos 600 6000

17 Internal DVD drive (Desktop) Above 22x speed,SATA Connector. Internal 10 Nos 2500 25000

18 Blank DVD-RW Re-writable 40 Nos 45 180019 Piece of cloth standard 10 Nos 45 45020 Pen Standard 20 Nos 15 30021 Paper A4 size 1 Ream 300 30022 Pencil HP drawing pencil 20 Nos 5 10023 Eraser Standard 20 Nos 5 10024 Thermal paste Standard (CPU) 15 Nos 50 750


Page:252

25 Spray standard 10 Nos 145 1450

26 Speaker PC dual speaker with rich sound and bass. 10 Nos 650 6500

27 Keyboard Standard with USB Connector. 10 Nos 350 3500

28 Screen cleaner kits LCD/LED Support 10 Nos 650 650029 UTP cable CAT 6e 100 Mtr. 65 650030 I/O box standard 10 Nos 600 6000031 Case and Cap standard 30 Mtr. 65 195032 Modular Jack Standard. For UTP cable. 10 Nos 120 1200

33

RJ45 connectors

"Shilded connector, Model Number: STCON,RJ45 "

2 Pkt. 500 1000

34 Debug card For Troubleshooting computer 10 Nos 1400 14000

35 Soldering lead 40/60x50gm 10 Nos 60 60036 Soldering wax Standard 10 Nos 60 60037 Wireless Network Card (Desktop) 10/100/1000 mbps 10 Nos 2500 25000

38 Mouse Optical mouse with USB connector 10 Nos 450 4500

TOTAL 587300

4. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)Sl.No Items Specification Qty Unit Rate Amount

1 Safety Gloves Medium/large 20 Nos 200 2000

2Safety Helmet (For Network cabling) Assorted Size 10 Nos 150 1500

3 Safety shoes Assorted Size 20 Nos 1500 300004 Safety Goggles Standard 20 Nos 150 30005 Dust mask Cotton 20 Nos 100 20006 Safety belt Standard 10 Nos 1500 150007 Workshop dress Pent and shirt 20 Nos 1500 30000

8

Tool bag

For computer Tools (Wire cutter, Screwdriver, Crimping tools, Punching tools, cable tester and other Accessories )

20 Nos 350 7000

9 CD bag Standard 20 Nos 350 7000

10 Anti-Static wrist band Static control and 360-degree protection 20 Nos 100 2000

11 Anti-Glare screen UV protection 10 Nos 450 450012 Hairnet standard 20 Nos 200 4000

13 Fire extinguisher Carbon Tetrachloride 12 kg 4 Nos 3000 12000

Total 120,000

Page:253

Annexes:x-xviii


Sl.No Items Total Cost1 Tools 362502 Equipment 11048002 Materials Required 587300

3Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) 120000

Grand Total 1,848,350


Page:254

Annex XVII: Costing for Tailoring


1 Scissors (brass) brass 20 Nos 250 5000.002 Tailor measuring tap Tailor tap 20 Nos 50 1000.003 Screw driver 12” 8” 6” 4” 2” 5 set 300 1500.004 Wrench Double end spanner 3 set 500 1500.005 Extension code Heavy duty 5 meters 5 Nos 550 2750.006 scale (1mtr) Steel 5 Nos 200 1000.007 Bobbin 3 dozen 120 360.008 S M. Needle No 16,18, 5 pkt, each 1 pkt 120 120.009 machine belt Leather 20 nos 50 1000.00

10 Thread cutter 20 nos 100 2000.0011 Thread remover 20 nos 50 1000.00

Total 13230.00

2. EquipmentSl.No Items Specification Qty Unit Rate Amount

1 Sewing Machine set Double 20 Nos 12000 2400002 Inter lock Light duty 4 nos 7000 280003 Iron press Steam iron 8 Nos 1800 144004 Iron press Table Wooden 5 nos 5000 250005 Cutting Table Wooden 2 nos 5000 10000

10 Total 317,400.00

3. MaterialsSl.No Items Specification Qty Unit Rate Amount

1 Tailor chalk NA 20 pkt 150 3000.002 Machine oil 100ml 5 doz 600 3000.003 Cloth Poplin 200 mtr 35 7000.004 Cloth Terry cotton 200 mtr 100 20000.005 Cloth (jachur) Polister 325 mtr 70 22750.006 Pangthag kira Hand woven 20 no 700 14000.007 Mar tha/Se tha pieces NA 500 mtr 350 175000.008 Swing Thread polister 15 box 450 6750.009 Colth Blazer 14 mtr 300 4200.00

10 White/green board 1 no 2500 2500.0011 board marker Blue/Black 4 pkt 240 960.0012 projector LCD 1 no 50000 50000.00 Total 309,160.00

4. Personal Protective Equipment Sl.No Items Qty Unit Rate Amount

1 Safety Gloves 10 pair 200 2000.003 Safety shoes 20 pair 1200 24000.005 Dust mask 20 nos 100 2000.007 Workshop dress 20 nos 1500 30000.00

12 Fire extinguisher ABC 4 nos 11000 44000.00

Total 102,000.00

Page:255

Annexes:x-xviii

Consolidated CostingSl.No Items Cost Remark

1 Tools 13230.00 One time 2 Equipment 317400.00 One time 3 Materials 309160.00 Every year

4Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)

102000.00 one time Yearly

Grand Total 741790.00


Page:256

Annex XVIII: Costing for Painting

1. EquipmentSl.No Items Qty Unit Rate Amount

1 རང་ཁ ༢༡ no 2400 50400

2 འབ་ཁ་ 20 no 3800 76000

3 གང་ཤང་ 1 no 3300 3300

4 ཐག་ཤང་། (ruller 60 cm) 10 No 150 1500

5 ཚན་སབ་སང་ག་དན་ལ་ཨན་ཏ་ board 90x60cmx8mm 20 nos 300 6000

6 ཉན་སང་ག་ ཞམ། 20 No 400 8000

7 ཉན་སང་ག་ མག་ཤལ། 20 No 200 4000

8 ཉན་སང་ག་ ཐགཔ། 20 No 1500 30000

Total 179200

2. Materials 1 ཚན་ཕར་ཆ་ཆང་། 200 no 15 3000

2 ཕག་གཟ་ཆ་ཆང་། 20 no 40 800

3 བག་པར་ཆ་ཆང་། 360 no 80 28800

4 རབ་བར་མ། 5 No 300 1500

5 ས་སག (chalk) 20 box 40 800

ལག་བང་ (flip chart) 10 roll 300 3000

རག་སག་ (marker pen) 50 pices 30 1500

6 རམ་ སན་བཞ་ནའ་ཧད། 1 No 350 350

7 ས་ཚན།

གནགཔ། 4 Kg 70 280

སརཔ། 4 Kg 70 280

དམརཔ། 4 Kg 70 280

དཀརཔ 4 Kg 70 280

8 ཟངས་ཚན་དཀར། སར། དམར། ལང་། ལ་ཁ། ཧནམ།

80 no 45 3600

9 སན་ཀཝ་སན། 5 Kgs 120 600

ཤང་ སན། 3 kg 200 600

10 ར་མ་འབ་ན་ འབ་སབ། 80 nos 150 12000

11 ཡག་ཀག། 40 nos 10 400

12 པ་ས་ གཞག་ཆས། 40 nos 10 400

14 དཀར་བཅད་ 50 bottle 20 1000

15 ནག་བཅད་ 50 Bottle 20 1000

16 རས་ཤང་/ ཐང་སམ། 20 nos 350 7000

Page:257

Annexes:x-xviii

17 སང་ཐགས། (ཁ་ཤ) 20 mtrs 200 4000

18 ཐང་ཀ་བཙམ་ན་ཁབ། 20 nos 10 200

19 སདཔ། 10 Rolls 100 1000

21 གམ་ཙ། 2 Nos 200 400

22 ས་དཀར་ར། 20 Kgs 45 900

Total 60470

Consolidated CostingSl.No Items cost Remark

1 Equipments 179,200 highlighted one time

2 Materials 60,470non-

highlighted yearly Grand total 239,670


Page:258

Page:259

Assessment Guideline

ASSESSMENT GUIDELINE

1. INTRODUCTION

Assessment is the g process of gathering, analyzing and reflecting on evidence to make an informed and consistent judgments to improve students’ learning. The assessment guideline for the TVET programme will provide a toolkit and templates for teachers to use in the design and review of valid, reliable and equitable assessments to enhance students’ learning experience. The Assessment Guide promotes principles of consistency of practice, intelligible programme assessment structure, sustainable assessment, and quality of contact hours.

The primary purpose of assessment is to promote learning. It provides evidence of how learners are progressing vis-a-vis the defined standards throughout the period of learning. The quality assessment includes cognitive, affective and psychomotor domains. It is informed, authentic, valid and reliable. There are two different types of assessments: i.e. Formative, and Summative. Formative assessment refers to a wide variety of methods that teachers use to conduct in-process evaluations of students’ comprehension, learning needs, and academic progress during a lesson, unit, or course. The goal of summative assessment is to evaluate students’ learning at the end of an instructional unit by comparing with some standard or benchmark. Summative assessments are often at high stakes, which means they have a high point value. Example of a summative assessment includes examination.

2. RATIONALE

One of the aims of TVET is to fulfill the nation’s need for a skilled workforce; to meet the demand for the right skill for the right job. Therefore, the TVET curriculum must ensure that the learners undergo relevant and appropriate experiences to achieve a set of predetermined standards defined by the learning outcomes or competencies. Subsequently, this calls for a robust assessment mechanisms to be in place to ensure that the graduates from the TVET programme possess the competencies to meet the demands .Further, the assessment tools used in TVET have to be designed to integrate the inculcation of national and human values and positive ethics and attitude in the learners.

3. MODE OF ASSESSMENT

In order to ensure acqisition of the knowledge and competency and the attainment of positive values and attitude, both formative and summative assessment methods should be used objectively. The assessment should also focus on assessing the values, attitudes and entrepreneurial skills of students, which is vital towards developing a workforce that is not only skilled but also possess positive values and attitude

The assessment for TVET should be conducted through the following modes:

3.1 Continuous formative assessment

The Continuous Formative Assessment (CFA) is an assessment of student’s learning that is carried out throughout the academic year involving a variety of organised, both formal and informal learning activities to facilitate quality teaching and learning. There are different tools that teachers can use to assess and see whether learning has taken place or not. Instructors can often provide constructive feedback on the students’ work to find out how much they have learnt and also to discover their weak areas. Instructors may decide to take appropriate actions – whether to move with the next lesson or to conduct remedial lessons on the topics covered – based on the information indicated through the formative assessment.


Page:260

CFA is carried out to help learners learn more and better so that they can acquire the knowledge and competencies outlined in the learning outcomes at respective levels. In short, an effectively implemented CFA practices would ensure the successful completion of the course by all the students.

The following are some of the benefits of CFA:

• provide opportunities to both the teacher and the learner to reflect on the learning process and on the level of achievement

• help teachers to find out what teaching methods and materials work best

• help teachers pay attention to individual differences and learning styles of the learners

• make learners realize how well they can do certain types of work and what they need to improve

• enable learners to see the connection between efforts and results

• allow the learners to evaluate themselves and also in peer group

• enable learners to take on multiple roles – as learners, helpers, evaluators and reviewers of the learning processes

• enable learners to appreciate each other’s talents and accept the weaknesses

• develop and tap the higher level thinking and problem solving skills of learners.

Some Tools and Techniques for carrying out CFA:

Assessment Techniques Assessment Tools• Portfolio

• Conferences

• Homework

• Classwork

• Checklist

• Questionnaire

• Anecdotal records

• Observations

3.2 Continuous Summative assessment:

It is a continuous process of grading learner’s performances and achievements. Based on their performance, teachers/instructors provide feedbacks for improvement. It also enables teachers/instructors to understand what teaching methods and materials work best. Following are some of the assessment techniques and tools used for assessment:

a. Assignment

An assignment is a task or piece of work, usually a part of a study or a project, that is given to the learners, either individually or in groups, to be completed over a specified period of time. Assignments shall be both in practical and theoretical areas etc. The assignment has all the information referred from the class notes and other reference books which are accurate. The assessed assignment note should be returned to the students with marks and feedback. The assessment records shall be maintained by the respective instructors and should be submitted to the Head of Department. The marks obtained from assignments should be added to respective learning objectives under every chapter.

The ‘Written Assessment’ of (20%) is graded by sample rubrics prepared based on:

• Attendance.

Page:261


• Presentation.

• Participation.

• Attitude.

• Class work.

• Home work.

NB: It is important that learners know exactly how their assignments will be assessed. Therefore, the instructors should share the marking or assessment rubrics with the learners.

b. Project work

The project work will have a weighting of 20% in the final progress report. The project work will be assessed as per the samples of criteria and rubrics provided.

c. Modular assessment

To conduct written test for theory, standard test items should be developed with marking schemes. The exam/assessment coordinator may be consulted for the test paper moderation as required.

d. On-the-job training (OJT) assessment

On-the-job training is a form of individualized training that allows learners to enhance the skills and knowledge in the real practical field. The OJT assessment is basically focused on improving the knowledge, skills and attitudes of the students. In order to fully evaluate the impact of OJT, it is necessary to assign quality and quantified value of job. The students should understand that everything learned in the school can be used in future.

3.3 SUMMATIVE ASSESSMENT (PRACTICAL AND WRITTEN EXAMINATION

An assessment activities undertaken for the purpose of evaluating a work and assigning a grade or marks is termed as summative assessment. Evaluation usually happens at the end of a learning unit or term, and compares students achievement against set standard or learning outcomes. Below are some of the continuous summative assessment mechanisms outlined for TVET curriculum are.

a. Modular assessment

To conduct practical test, assessment resources should be mobilized to assess all the skills in the module. The instructor concerned, in consultation with HoD, should carry out modular assessment for certification.

b. Practical assessment

The skills of each chapter under every module will be assessed to ensure that the student has acquired the required level of skills. However, the instructors should focus on the core skills under each module to assess students till they are able to perform competently. The practical assessment shall be done based on the nature of the practical conducted for different trades.

c. Written assessment

Written assessment is to evaluate the students’ performance at the end of lesson. The students shall be assessed to ascertain their understanding of the lesson presented through written assessment. The question items for the written assessment shall be designed with reference to the following:

• Use of blue print.


Page:262

• Use of weighting for strands.

• Use of question pattern.

• Sample questions.

4. BLUE PRINT

Blueprint is a map and a specification for an assessment program which ensures all aspects of the curriculum and educational domains over a specified period of time are covered. The term “blueprint” is derived from the domain of architecture which means “detailed plan of action”. It ensures setting of different levels of questions covering all the modules. The method of forming the question paper emanates from the six cognitive levels of thinking proposed in Blooms Taxonomy. (Refer Fig.1 & table no.1)

4.1 Cognitive Leveling

Lower order thinking skills Higher order thinking skills.

Remember Understand Apply Analyze Evaluate Creative• recognizing

• identifying

• recalling

• interpreting

• clarifying

• paraphrasing

• representing

• translating

• illustrating

• classifying

• categorizing

• summarizing

• concluding

• interpolating

• predicting

• comparing

• explaining

• executing

• carrying out

• implementing

• using

• differentiating

• discriminating

• distinguishing

• focusing, selecting

• organizing

• finding coherence

• integrating outlining

• parsing

• structuring

• attributing

• deconstructing

• checking

• coordinating

• detecting

• monitoring

• testing

• critiquing

• judging

• generating

• hypothesizing

• planning

• designing

• producing

• construct

Page:263


Recall facts and basic conceptsdefine, duplicate, memorize, repeat, state

Explain ideas or conceptsclassify, describe, discuss, explain, identify, locate, recognise, report, select, translate

Use information in new situationsexecute, implement, solve, use, demonstrate, interpret, operate, schedule, sketch

Draw connections among ideasdifferentiate, organise, relate, compare, contrast, distinguish, examine, experiment, question, test

Justify a stand or decisionappraise, argue, defend, judge, select, support, value, critique, weigh

Produce new or original workDesign, assemble, construct, conjuncture, develop, formulate, author, investigate

Evaluating

Remembering

Understanding

Applying

Analyzing

Creating

4.2 Blue print sample

Content / Chapter Distribution of marks for questions ranging from lower to higher order thinking skillsRemembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating TOTAL

Practicing Occupational Health and Safety(OHS )

4 2 1 2

Apply basic electronics theory

5 7 4 4

Install Solar PV panel 1Basic electrical theory 1 2 1Install control board and switch gear

3 1 1 2

House wiring 2 3 8 3 1Installation of Earthing 2 4 2

NOTE: The overall weighting for theory and practical is 20% and 80% respectively.

Refer sample questions (5.2) for detailed information.


Page:264

4.3 blue print sample (questions and Marks distribution)

Content / Chapter

Levels of question Marks

Remembering Understanding Applying Analyzing Evaluating Creating

Practicing Occupational Health and Safety(OHS )

A. Q1

2 (2)

8(2)

5(2)

A.Q1

1(2)

A.Q3

2(1)

10(1)

A.Q1

1(2)

B.Q3

2(2)

5(1)

A.Q1

9(2)

14(2)

A.Q3

7(1)

8(1)

B.Q2

a(1)

24

Apply basic electronics

theory

A.Q1

4(2)

A.Q3

1(1)

B.Q3

a(1)

b(2)

c(1)

d(1)

e (1)

A.Q2

10(1)

A.Q4

3(2)

4(2)

A.Q1

3(2)

A.Q2

6(1)

A.Q4

1(2)

2(2)

B.Q4

a(1)

b(2)

A.Q3

6(1)

A.Q4

5(2)

B.Q5

2(1)

30

Install Solar PV panel

AQ1,

3(2)AQ1

1(2)

B.Q2

a(2)

6

Basic electrical

theory

B.Q2

c(1)

e(1)

f(1)

g(1)

A.Q3

3(1)

4(1)

5(1)

B.Q5

1(1)

A.Q2

7(1)

9

Install control board and switch gear

A.Q2

2(1)

A.Q2

9(1)

A.Q3

9(1)

A.Q2

8(1)

4

Page:265


House wiring

practical

A.Q1

13(2)

A.Q2

1(1)

B.Q1

a.b.c.d.e

(5)

A.Q2

4(1)

B.Q5

3(1)

B.Q2

b(1)

11

Installation of Earthing

A.Q1

9(2)

15(2)

B.Q2

d(1)

A.Q1

6(2)

11(2)

A.Q2

5(1)

A.Q1

7(2)

A.Q1

10(2)

12(2)

16

Total marks: 16 25 19 27 7 5 100

Note:

• A –section

• Q-question

• 1-Sub question

• ( )- Marks

ExaminationsStrand 1


Strand 3 &4


Total

Written exam 80% 10% 10% 100

5. WEIGHTING FOR STRANDS (THEORY)

5.1 Question patternSECTION A: [60]

Multiple Choice Questions [30 Marks]

True or False [10 Marks]

Fill in the blanks [10 Marks]

Matching Questions [10 Marks]

SECTION B: [40]

Short Answer Questions (SAQ) [30 Marks]

Extended Respond Questions (ERQ) [10 Marks]


Page:266

5.2 Sample questions paper

SECTION AQuestion 1: Multiple Choice Question (MCQ) [30 Marks]

Direction: Choose the most appropriate answer from the choices given.

1. What does OHS stand for? (1)

a. Occupational Health and Sustain

b. Occupational Heart and Safety

c. Occupational Hand and Shine

d. Occupational Health and Safety

2. What is the full form of PPE?

a. Professional Protective Elements.

b Personal Protective Equipment.

c. Personal Protective Elements.

d. Professional Protective Equipment.

3. Who is responsible for providing Personal Protective Equipment in the workplace? (2)

a. Supervisor

b. Employer

c. Self

d. Co-worker

4. Material that does not respond to an electric field and completely resists the flow of

electric change is called: (2)

a. semiconductor

b. conductor

c. insulator

5. The instrument used for measuring current is: (1)

a. multi-meter

b. ohm meter

c. ammeter

d. frequency meter

6. ………..

Page:267


7. ……….

8. ……….

Question 2: Direction: State whether the following statements are TRUE or FALSE. [10 Mark]

1. One of the purposes of 5S is to identify waste and reduce productivity.

2. Always lift the weight with a bent back.

3. Floor openings and floor holes must be covered or protected by a guardrail.

4. State whether the following statements are TRUE or FALSE.

a. Safety signs and symbols increase awareness of hazards in the workplace.

b. Safety must be given priority in every workplace.

5. State whether the following statements are TRUE or FALSE.

a. An ammeter is always connected in series.

b. Resistance is the substance which oppose the flow of current.

6. ………..

7. ……….

8. ……….

Question 3: Fill in the Blanks [10 Marks]

Direction: Fill in the blanks with appropriate answer.

1. When two resistors 10ohm and 20 ohm are connected in series, the total resistance will be ………Ω

2. When two resistors 10ohm and 20 ohm are connected in parallel, total resistance will be…… …Ω

3. A circuit element between two nodes is called ………..

4. Kirchhoff ’s law states, that in any …………..electric circuit, the algebraic sum of potential drops (I.R) is equal to the sum of the impressed.

5. 5000 micro ampere is equal to……

6. Battery is rated in………

7. By Ohm’s law current is directly proportional to…………

8. A circuit has a supply voltage of 10V DC and current of 0.5A, the circuit resistance is …….ohm

9. In ………………circuit the total resistance is equal to the greatest resistance connected in the circuit.


Page:268

10. The full form of DC is……

Question 4: [10 marks]

Direction: The column “A” consists the electrical components and column “B” consists of description. Match column “A” and column “B”.

Coulumn A COLUMN B1. Filter 2. Rectifier 3. Capacitance 4. Resistance 5. Inductance

a. Stores energy in the form of electrostatic field. b. Stores energy in the form of magnetic field. c. Effective opposition offered by capacitance.d. Effective opposition offered by inductance. e. Opposes the flow of current. f. Converts AC (alternating current) to pulsating DC (direct current).g. Converts output pulsating DC voltage to pure direct current.h. Increases the strength of weak signal.

Answer 1- 2- 3- 4- 5-

SECTION: B

Question 1: Short Answer Question. [30 Marks]

1. State two reasons why OHS is important.

2. State three causes of accidents.

3. State the properties of natural magnets

4. Calculate the value of the following resistors.

a. <insert mage> b. <insert image>

5. Calculate the value of voltage across each resistor from the given circuit diagram.

<insert image>

6. Draw signs and symbols of the following: [0.5x10=5]

a. Fuse

b. One way switch

c. Ceiling fan

d. MCB

e. Switch

Page:269


f. Bell

g. Lamp

h. Exhaust fan

i. Fan

j. Multi-meter

Question 2: Extended Response Question [10 marks]

1. Explain the limitations of Ohm’s law. (2)

2. Why does current flow in neutral in unbalanced three-phase four wire, star-connected loads?

(4)

3. Instruct a resonance circuit (4)

4. Justify why current remains the same in unbalanced three-phase three wire, star-connected

load? (2)

5. ………………..


Page:270

B. PRACTICAL EXAM (100 MARKS, CONVERT)

6. WEIGHTING FOR STRANDS (PRACTICAL)

Assessment/ ExaminationStrand 1


Strand 3 &4


Total

Practical assessment/examination 10% 80% 10% 100

Sample questions for practical exam.

Candidate ResourceUnit Title Carry out domestic building wiringUnit CodeTotal Marks Pass mark Time HoursAssignment: Perform call bell wiring.

What you need to do:1. Interpret the drawing.2. Estimate the material required.3. Collect the tools and materials. 4. Prepare layout.5. Fix the PVC casing capping on the layout.6. Draw the wires through the casing capping.7. Mark the location of switchgears, fittings, fixtures and accessories.8. Fix fittings, fixtures and accessories.9. Perform the installation test.10. Check the function of the circuit.11. Store the tools and instruments to its proper place.

12. Clean the work area.

Direction:

1. Respond to assessors.

2. Adhere to occupational health and safety rules at all times of performance.

3. Perform activities in sequence; in case of confusion please contact your assessors.

4. Performance will be assessed on the following criteria:

a. Exhibit personality and professionalism.

b. Follow occupational health and safety measures.

c. Complete the task on time.

Page:271


6.1 Sample check list for conducting practical

Observation Checklist

Unit Title Carry out domestic building wiring

Unit Code

Problem/Project: Perform call bell wiring

Candidate’s Name: CID NO:

Place of Assessment: Date of Assessment:

A. During the demonstration of skills did the candidate do following:

Marks Allocated

Marks Obtained Remarks

1. Follow the OHS. 12. Prepare materials required. 13. Lay the PVC casing and capping horizontally and vertically as per

the diagram. 2

4. Fix switch box and distribution board firmly on the wiring board. 25. Carryout pre-testing /verification of wiring materials. 46. Fix light fittings, fixtures and protective switchgears. 37. Carryout wire connection to fittings correctly. 28. Tighten the switch box and distribution box connection firmly. 29. Terminate the wires as per the standard. 2

Marks (A) 19Marks Obtained(A)

B. Is the job outcome correct in the following areas?

Criteria 4 3 2 1 0 MF Total marks

1. Maintain all the dimensions as per the single line diagram* 42. Lay the PVC casing and capping horizontally and vertically as

per the diagram. 3

3. All the points are working/functioning as per the circuit diagram* 4

4. Complete the job within the specified time. 1

Total marks 48

Criterion 1 & 3 must receive rating of minimum 4, criterion 2 must receive minium of 3 or above and criterion 4 must receive minium 1. The minimum total score MUST be 42.

Total marks (B) 48Marks Obtained (A)Marks Obtained(B) Total Marks(A+B) 19+48=67

Total Marks Obtained(A+B)The Candidate’s performance was: Satisfactory:

Not Satisfactory:

Assessor’s Name: Signature:


Page:272

6.2

Sam

ple

rubr

ics f

or p

ract

ical

eva

luat

ion

Task

Des

crip

tion

43

21

0

Mai

ntai

n al

l the

dim

ensio

ns a

s pe

r the

sing

le li

ne d

iagr

amTh

e di

men

sion

of si

ngle

line

di

agra

m is

mai

ntai

ned

as p

er th

e st

anda

rds.

It is

criti

cal s

tep

whe

re a

min

imum

of 4

is a

mus

t.

Lay

the

PVC

cas

ing

and

capp

ing

horiz

onta

lly a

nd v

ertic

ally

as p

er

the

diag

ram

.

PVC

cas

ing

and

capp

ing

is la

id

horiz

onta

lly a

nd v

ertic

ally

as p

er

the

diag

ram

.

PVC

cas

ing

and

capp

ing

is la

id

horiz

onta

lly o

r ve

rtic

ally

as p

er th

e di

agra

m.

It is

criti

cal s

tep

whe

re a

min

imum

of 3

is a

mus

t.

All

the

poin

ts a

re w

orki

ng/

func

tioni

ng a

s per

the

circ

uit

diag

ram

.

All

the

poin

ts a

re w

orki

ng/

func

tioni

ng a

s per

the

circ

uit

diag

ram

.

It is

criti

cal s

tep

whe

re a

min

imum

of 4

is a

mus

t.

Com

plet

e th

e jo

b w

ithin

the

spec

ified

tim

e.Jo

b co

mpl

eted

on

give

n tim

eJo

b co

mpl

eted

afte

r 15

’ of g

iven

tim

eJo

b co

mpl

eted

aft

er 3

0 m

inut

es

of g

iven

tim

e

Job

com

plet

ed a

fter

45 m

inut

es o

f giv

en

time

Job

not c

ompl

eted

eve

n aft

er 4

5 m

inut

es

7. R

UB

RIC

S FO

R C

LA

SS W

OR

K (C

W) A

ND

HO

ME

WO

RK

(HW

) ASS

ESS

ME

NT

Crit

eria

43

21

Con

tent

A

ll in

form

atio

n re

leva

nt to

the

task

as

signe

d is

cove

red.

75%

of t

he in

form

atio

n re

leva

nt to

th

e ta

sk a

ssig

ned

is co

vere

d.50

% o

f the

info

rmat

ion

rele

vant

to

the

task

ass

igne

d is

cove

red.

25%

of t

he in

form

atio

n re

leva

nt to

the

task

ass

igne

d is

cove

red.

Nea

tnes

sC

lass

wor

k / h

omew

ork

assig

ned

is m

aint

aine

d ne

atly.

Cla

ss w

ork

/ hom

ewor

k as

signe

d is

mai

ntai

ned

with

few

smud

ges.

Cla

ss w

ork/

hom

ewor

k as

signe

d is

mai

ntai

ned

with

seve

ral s

mud

ges.

Cla

ss w

ork/

hom

e w

ork

is m

aint

aine

d di

sord

erly.

Tim

elin

eSu

bmiss

ion

of h

omew

ork/

clas

s wor

k is

done

on

time.

Subm

issio

n of

hom

ewor

k/cl

ass w

ork

is de

laye

d by

1 d

ay.

Subm

issio

n of

hom

ewor

k/cl

ass

wor

k is

dela

yed

by 2

day

s.Su

bmiss

ion

of h

omew

ork/

clas

s w

ork

is de

laye

d by

3 d

ays.

Illus

trat

ion

Ever

y co

mpo

nent

of t

he d

iagr

am is

la

belle

d.

75%

of t

he d

iagr

am is

labe

lled.

50%

of t

he d

iagr

am is

labe

lled.

25%

of t

he d

iagr

am is

labe

lled.

Acc

urac

yA

ll th

e w

ritte

n an

swer

s are

corr

ect.

75%

of t

he w

ritte

n an

swer

s are

co

rrec

t.50

% o

f the

writ

ten

answ

ers a

re

corr

ect.

25%

of t

he w

ritte

n an

swer

s are

co

rrec

t.

Page:273


8. W

EIG

HTI

NG

FO

R C

ON

TIN

UO

US

ASS

ESSM

ENT

(CA

)

Con

tinuo

us A

sses

smen

t St

rand

s 1

(Con

cept

s)

Stra

nds 2

(Ski

lls)

Stra

nds 3

&4

(Val

ues,

attit

udes

an

d en

trep

rene

uria

l co

mpe

tenc

ies)

Tota

l

CA

/HW

/PW

80%

10%

10%

100

Prac

tical

10

80%

10%

100

Aver

age

45%

45%

10%

100

9. R

UBR

ICS

FOR

PRO

JEC

T W

OR

K (P

W) A

SSES

SMEN

T

Cri

teri

a 4

32

1C

onte

ntTh

e st

uden

t is a

ble

to

know

, ide

ntify

and

ex

plai

n ne

cess

ary

theo

ries a

nd ap

plic

atio

ns

of p

ract

ical

for t

he

com

plet

ion

of th

e pr

ojec

t.

The s

tude

nt is

abl

e to

iden

tify

and

expl

ain

nece

ssar

y th

eorie

s an

d ap

plic

atio

ns

of p

ract

ical

for t

he

com

plet

ion

of th

e pr

ojec

t with

som

e as

sista

nce.

The

stud

ent i

s un

able

to id

entif

y or

exp

lain

conc

epts

w

ithou

t maj

or

prom

ptin

g.

The

stud

ent i

s not

ab

le to

iden

tify

and

expl

ain

maj

or

theo

ries.

Dire

ctio

nFo

llow

ed a

ll th

e in

stru

ctio

ns.

75%

of t

he d

irect

ion

is fo

llow

ed.

50%

of t

he

dire

ctio

n is

follo

wed

.

25 %

of t

he d

irect

ion

is fo

llow

ed.

Prep

ared

ness

A

ll to

ols a

nd m

ater

ials

are

colle

cted

. 7

5 %

of t

he

mat

eria

ls ar

e co

llect

ed.

50%

of th

e m

ater

ials

are

read

y.25

% o

f the

mat

eria

ls ar

e co

llect

ed.

Com

plet

ion

of th

e ta

sk.

Proj

ect w

ork

is co

mpl

eted

on

time.

Proj

ect w

ork

com

plet

ion

is de

laye

d by

1 d

ay.

Proj

ect w

ork

com

plet

ion

is de

laye

d by

2 d

ays.

Proj

ect w

ork

com

plet

ion

is de

laye

d by

3 d

ays.

Safe

ty

Stud

ent h

as fo

llow

ed

OH

S th

roug

hout

the

proj

ect w

ork.

Stud

ent h

as fo

llow

ed

OH

S m

ost o

f the

tim

e.

Stud

ent h

as

follo

wed

OH

S so

met

imes

.

Stud

ent h

as to

follo

w

OH

S fe

w ti

mes

.


Page:274

10. LESSON PLAN FORMAT

Occupation: NC Level: Module title: Total time:Learning outcome: Date:Skill:

Terminal performance objective: (Given, Cue, Who, What, Within, How well)Enabling objectives:

(Define, List, State, Explain…)

Sl.No What activity Who (T/L) How (method/

media)

Duration Assessment (test question)

Projects/problems:

Prepared by (Name of Instructor): Date:

Revised by: Date:

Name and Signature of Head of the Department (HoD)

Page:275


Task sheetModule Title Module code: Learning Outcome Task Title Task No: DurationObjective: At the end of the Task, Trainees will be able to:

Terminal Performance Objective:

Given:

Cue:

Who:

What:

Within:

How well: Sl.no Trainer activities Methodology Duration

123

Demonstrate the task

Provide guided practice

Individual practice

Tool and equipment required:

Sl.no Name Qty required Remarks

Raw materials(consumables) required:Sl.no Name Qty required Rate Amount Remarks

Total

Task Title

Task No:

Note: During Demonstration/observation of skills, did the trainee do the following?Step # Steps YES NO

1

2


Page:276

3

4

5

6

Note: For a quality performance guide, all items should be checked “YES”Project/assignment:

Page:277


11. F

OR

MAT

FO

R M

AR

KS

CO

MPI

LATI

ON

1st T

erm

2nd

Term

Gra

nd

Tota

lIn

dex.

No

Nam

eC

WH

WPW

Tota

l Pr

actic

al

Exam

Theo

ry

Exam

Tota

l C

WH

WPW

Tota

lPr

actic

al

Exam

Theo

ry

Exam

Tota

l

2%1%

2%5%

30%

5%40

%2%

1%2%

5%45

%10

%60

%


Page:278

Page:279


References

(DCRD)MoE. (2012). Science Curriculum Framework PP-XII. Paro: DCRD, MoE.

(MoE), D. (2005). ENGLISH Curriculum Framework Classes PP-XII. Paro: CAPSD.

Boodhai, N. (n.d.). CONCEPT PAPER FOR THE DEVELOPMENT OF A CARICOM STRATEGIC PLAN FOR VOCATIONAL EDUCATION SERVICES (CSME). Trinidad & Tobago: Navneet Boodhai.

(n.d.). Concept Note Vocational Education and Training in European Development Cooperation. European Commission.

DCRD. (2014). Values Education Framework Classes PP-XII. Paro: DCRD.

Education, F. N. (n.d.). Vocational education and training in Finland. Finland: Finnish National Board of Education.

Education, M. (2013). Technical-Vocational Education Overview. Monitaba: Manitoba Education.

Education, P. S. (2018). TVET Country Profile: India. India: PanditSunderlal Sharma Central Institute of Vocational Education.

Goel, D. V. (n.d.). TECHNICAL AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING (TVET) SYSTEM IN INDIA FOR SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT. India: Ministry of Human Resource Development, Government of India.

Lee Ji-Yeon (KRIVET, K. (n.d.). Vocational Education and Training in Korea: Achieving the Enhancement of National Competitiveness. Korea: Director of Career Development Center, KRIVET.

MoE. (2014). Bhutan Education Blueprint 2014-2024. Thimphu: Ministry of Education.

MoE. (2014). National Education Policy(Draft). Thimphu: Ministry of Education.

MoLHR. (2013). TECHNICAL & VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING POLICY FINAL DRAFT. Thimphu: Ministry of Labour and Human Resources.

REC. (2012). The National Education Framework. Thimphu: REC.

Sirohi, D. V. (n.d.). TVET System in India: An Oerview. New Delhi: NEUPA.

Tasmania, U. o. (2014). TASMANIAN CURRICULUM FRAMEWORK. Tasmania: University of Tasmania.

Yek, T. M. (2006). Technical Education 2020 in Singapore: Better Quality, Higher Performance and More Choices through a Market Approach. Singapore: Institute of Technical Education.

Yeo, T. (n.d.). Employment and TVET: Singapore’s approach.

TRASHI DELEK

TECHNICAL AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING (TVET) · Vocational Education and Training...

Documents

Transcript of TECHNICAL AND VOCATIONAL EDUCATION AND TRAINING (TVET) · Vocational Education and Training...